Development Standards
* Editor's Note: Because a work plan for related studies has been developed, interim zoning ordinance M-4517 shall be in effect for one year following October 13, 2025, or as otherwise renewed in accordance with RCW 36.70A.390.
* Editor's Note: Because a work plan for related studies has been developed, interim zoning ordinance M-4517 shall be in effect for one year following October 13, 2025, or as otherwise renewed in accordance with RCW 36.70A.390.
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
Purpose. The purpose of this chapter is to provide the development standards by which accessory structures are regulated to assure (1) that these clearly remain subordinate and incidental to the primary use and buildings on the same lot; and (2) in combination with primary buildings do not result in undue crowding, restriction of access, or other adverse impacts on the site and surrounding property. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Detached accessory buildings. A detached building, accessory to a single family or duplex residence, may be constructed under one of the following criteria:
1. Overall A detached building, accessory to a single family or duplex residence, may be constructed according to the requirements and regulations for a principal building in the zone which it is located, e.g., total lot coverage, setbacks, building height, etc., except the accessory structure shall be located behind the front elevation of the primary structure.
2. Additional Provisions for smaller buildings within setbacks. A detached building, accessory to a single family or duplex residence, may be constructed within the rear and/or side setbacks provided:
a. The detached accessory structure does not exceed 120 square feet in floor area and used for tool and storage sheds, play houses, or greenhouse and hothouses, and similar uses.
b. No portion of the detached accessory building shall exceed 8' in height above grade, to roof peak.
c. The detached accessory building shall not cover more than 50% of a required rear and/or side yard setback area.
d. The nearest wall of the detached accessory building must be located a minimum of 6' from the wall of any building. Eaves of adjacent buildings must be at least 4' apart.
e. Detached accessory buildings, are subject to the Building Code provisions of Title 17.
f. The detached accessory structure shall be located behind the front elevation of the primary structure.
B. Prior to primary structure completion. Accessory buildings shall not be permitted prior to the completion of the primary building/structure and/or permitted use on the same lot, or in the event that the primary building/structure/use ceases to exist. (Ord. M-4066 § 3, 12/16/2013; Effective 01/16/2014; Ord. M-3840 § 39, 08/06/2007; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
Purpose. To provide flexibility in the construction of certain private improvements associated with approved developments, this chapter establishes the circumstances under which the Planning Official may allow a delay in construction of certain required private improvements by use of an escrow or other form of security acceptable to the City to assure that such private improvements are constructed within a specified timeline and in accordance with approved standards. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. The Planning Official may delay construction of certain required private improvements beyond certificate of occupancy provided it is determined that good cause has been shown by the applicant. Where mitigation for environmental impacts has not been completed prior to the City final permit approval (such as final plat approval or final building inspection) and is therefore required as a condition of final permit approval, good cause shall be deemed to exist.
B. Guarantee for provision of private improvements. On all projects where private improvements are required, the Planning Official may require an escrow or other form of security acceptable to the City in an amount not less than 100% of the cost of the improvements that secures and provides for the actual construction and installation of the improvements required as condition(s) of approval for the development. The use of escrow or other form of security shall be limited to:
1. Approved private transportation system improvements, including sidewalks and streetlights, provided emergency access improvements are constructed on-site as needed;
2. Approved private stormwater collection and management facilities;
3. Approved landscaping and trees to meet minimum on-site tree density or landscaping requirements, including installation and maintenance costs.
4. Approved fences and walls.
5. Approved mitigation for environmental impacts, including but not limited to, construction, maintenance, and monitoring to ensure that mitigation is fully functional.
C. Requirements.
1. The applicant shall request approval of an extension on the construction of private improvements listed in Subsection B above by means of a Type I permit, pursuant to Chapter 20.210.040. Such request shall state the remaining improvements not yet constructed, the reasons for a requested delay, and requested timeline for improvements to be made. The request shall be accompanied by a draft escrow agreement or other security acceptable to the City.
2. Each escrow or other form of security acceptable to the City request shall include the following:
a. A scheduled cost breakdown for project work to be completed presented as Exhibit A, an escrow agreement shall not be accepted without an approved unit cost breakdown for the remaining improvements.
b. The draft escrow agreement in a form provided by the City.
c. An irrevocable license signed by the owner of subject property to run with the property which provides the City with the right to allow the employees, agents or contractors of the City to go on the subject property for the purpose of inspecting and, if necessary, doing the work or making the improvements covered by the escrow or other form of security acceptable to the City.
d. Any other documents deemed necessary by the City.
e. Applicable processing fee as contained in Chapter 20.180 VMC Fees.
4. Failure to carry out agreement. In the event the applicant fails to carry out provisions of the agreement and the City has un-reimbursed costs or expenses resulting from such failure, the escrow or other form of security acceptable to the City shall be forfeited and the money shall be paid to the City to defray its costs. If the amount of the escrow or other form of security acceptable to the City exceeds the cost and expense incurred by the City, the City shall release the remainder, and if the amount of the escrow or other form of security acceptable to the City is less than the cost and expense incurred by the City, the applicant shall be liable to the City for the difference.
D. Release of escrow or security. Upon completion of required improvements, the applicant shall request in writing that the Planning Official release all or a portion of the funds held in escrow. Such improvements shall be inspected and accepted as complete by the City prior to the release of any such escrow funds, or portion thereof. (Ord. M-3931 § 29, 11/02/2009; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
Purpose. The Planning Official has the authority to make exceptions to and interpretations of the provisions in this Title per the process outlined in Chapter 20.255 VMC. From time to time, the Planning Official is directed to codify those exceptions and interpretations that have broad applicability. The purpose of this chapter is to provide a place where these interpretations can be codified. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Pre-existing legal lots. If any lot, legally platted at the time of its creation, or the aggregate of such contiguous lots or land parcels held in single ownership has an area or dimension less than required for the zoning district in which the property is located, the lot or aggregate holdings may be occupied by any permitted use in the district subject to compliance with all other requirements of the district including the minimum setbacks thereof; provided, however, that the use of a lot in a residential district which has an area deficiency shall be limited to one single-family dwelling. All lots shall have a minimum of 20 feet of access to a public or private street, or access easement. Single ownership of abutting parcels shall not affect the right of the Planning Official to approve development of the single lot that has an area deficiency. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
Exceptions. Except for the Vision and Airport Height Overlay District, height limitations set forth elsewhere in this Title shall not apply to the following:
A. Barns, silos, water towers and tanks, or other farm buildings and structures, provided they are not less than 50 feet from every lot line; and
B. Chimneys, church spires, belfries, cupolas, domes, smokestacks, flagpoles, grain elevators, cooling towers, solar energy collectors, monuments, fire house towers, masts, aerials, elevator shafts, street lights, power or communication distribution lines, and other similar projections; (Ord. M-4034 § 28, 12/03/2012; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Projections into required yards. Certain architectural features may project into required yards or courts as follows:
1. Cornices, canopies, eaves, belt courses, bay windows, sills or other similar architectural features, or fireplaces not including floor extensions may extend no more than 24 inches into any required yard area.
2. Fire escapes, open-uncovered porches, balconies, or outside stairways may extend no more than 18 inches into any required side, side street, or rear yard setback, and no more than six feet into any required front yard setback. Open porches, decks or stoops not exceeding 18 inches in height may extend no closer than 18 inches to any lot line.
B. Exceptions to front yard requirements.
1. If there are legally established structures on both abutting lots with front yards less than the required depth for the district, the front yard for the lot need not exceed the average front yard of the abutting structures.
2. If there is a legally established structure on one abutting lot with a front yard less than the required depth for the district, the front yard need not exceed a depth of halfway between the depth of the front yard on the abutting lot and the required front yard depth.
C. Flag lots. The setbacks for flag lots may be reduced upon review and approval of the planning official; provided, that no setback is less than five feet, and the dwelling is not less than 25 feet from any other dwelling.
D. Exception for existing setbacks. Additions to legally established building floor area may be continued along existing setback lines so long as a minimum setback of three feet is maintained. This provision does not allow additional building height. (Ord. M-4105 § 3, 11/17/2014; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Conditions under which permitted. The following conditions shall exist before any building permit is issued for zero lot line development:
A. Side-yard setbacks. The setback on the adjacent lot to the zero setback side yard lot shall be either zero or at least 5 feet; for exceptions, see Section 20.902.020 VMC.
B. Covenants. Covenants running with the land, approved by the City Attorney, which guarantee that the opposite side yard setback of not less than 5 feet shall be kept perpetually free of permanent obstructions (for exception, see Section 20.902.020), shall be filed with the deed(s) or noted on a plat.
C. Building Walls.
1. The building wall on the zero-foot yard setback shall be constructed of window-free, fire resistive construction per the Building Code standards of Title 17, no portion of which shall project over any property line. The construction shall be subject to review by the Building Official.
2. Covenants running with the land, approved by the City Attorney, shall convey a 4-four-foot maintenance easement with a 1-1/2-foot encroachment into the easement provision, in order to permit variations in design from the adjoining lot. No windows shall be allowed along this wall in any case.
3. Zero lot line (common-wall) construction may be permitted, provided adjoining walls are fire- resistive and constructed according to the standards of sound transmission, per the Building Code standards of Title 17. Common walls must be attached a minimum 60% of the length of the entire building wall.
D. Exception. Zero lot line development standards do not apply to free-standing fences and/or walls that are not directly connected to a roof structure. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Purpose. The purpose of this chapter is to establish standards for fences, walls and sound walls constructed in the City of Vancouver. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Applicability. This section applies to all fences and walls not a part of a building, including retaining walls and sound walls constructed in the City of Vancouver. Special standards are established for gated access communities in Chapter 20.914. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Land Use Permits. Type I site plan approval is required for any sound wall. No land use permit is required for other wall or fence; however the standards of this chapter shall apply, unless exempted by VMC 20.912.040.
B. Building Permit. Building permits are required for all fences over 6' in height. Building permits are also required for walls 4' or over and for walls which support additional weight from a building or parking area. (Ord. M-4354 § 3(H), 2021; Ord. M-4034 § 29, 2012; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. This chapter does not apply to fences or walls 30" or less in height, measured from grade, unless such a wall is structurally supporting additional weight from a building or parking area.
B. Hedges located in a vision clearance triangle must be maintained at a height of 30" or less measured from street grade. All other hedges within private property are not regulated by this title. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Fences and walls must be wholly contained on the applicant’s property, or located on a property line when both abutting property owners are in agreement.
B. Fences and walls must not be placed in any manner to hinder access to an easement.
C. In residential zones, fences that are streetward of the front wall of the house shall be limited to 5' in height, so long as the top 1' is constructed to be at least 80% open to views (e.g., wrought iron, chainlink, etc.). In other required side, street side and rear yard setbacks areas, solid fences shall be limited to 6' in height. See Exception for sound walls at 20.912.080.
D. In commercial and industrial zones, fences within the required setback area are limited to 6' in height. See Exception for sound walls at 20.912.080.
E. Land Use Permits cannot be issued for fences or walls that are in the public right-of-way.
F. Fences and walls shall not interfere with vision clearance at an intersection of roads or driveways. Fences and walls under 30" in height are generally allowed in a vision clearance triangle unless the topography causes a restriction of clear vision. Fences that are 80% open (such as wrought iron and chain link) are allowed in a vision clearance triangle when maintained in a manner that is clear of vegetation that could restrict clear vision. (Ord. M-4147 § 4, 12/07/2015; Ord. M-4105 § 3, 11/17/2014-Effective 12/17/14; Ord. M-3959 § 44, 07/19/2010; Ord. M-3922 § 43, 07/06/2009; Ord. M-3847 § 13, 11/19/2007; Ord. M-3840 § 40, 08/06/2007; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Barbed wire, razor wire and electrically charged fences are not permitted as accessory to residential uses.
B. Within commercial and industrial or other nonresidential properties, barbed wire and razor wire are only allowed as the top to a security fence accessory to permitted uses. In these cases, 2' of such wire can be attached to the top of a 6' wall or fence, as long as it is vertical or angled in toward the enclosure.
C. Barbed wire, razor wire, and electrically charged fences are prohibited in the City Center (CX) District. (Ord. M-3701 § 30, 05/02/2005; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
A. The city’s planning official or the city’s hearings examiner has the authority to approve walls and fences on the perimeters of developments that are incorporated as a design element that is part of a planned development or subdivision design. The planning official and hearing examiner can exceed the standards of this chapter, except those standards for vision clearance. In all cases the planning official and hearing examiner shall require the recording of appropriate provisions (covenants or similar methods) for maintenance to be assumed by the property owners or association of owners. (Ord. M-4354 § 3(I), 2021; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
When sound walls are required to mitigate sound impacts for properties located adjacent to a railroad right-of-way, state highway, or where residential abuts commercial or industrial properties, the Planning Official may approve a sound wall which exceeds the height limit of 20.912.050(C) up to maximum of 8' if the following criteria are met:
A. Landscaping. Exterior walls facing a street or highway shall be landscaped with groundcover, shrubs, vines, mounds and trees such that at least 50% of the height of the wall shall be screened from the adjacent public street within 2 years.
B. Type of Wall. Walls shall be constructed of graffiti-resistant solid brick or other material that requires minimum maintenance. A textured surface treatment that is compatible with and appropriate to the area for which it is proposed shall be provided.
C. Walls between properties. All property owners shall agree on the height and type of wall prior to approval from the City.
D. Height of Walls. Walls may exceed 8' in height, to a maximum of 12', provided they are adjacent to a public right-of-way as outlined above, and based on an approved noise study prepared by a licensed acoustical engineer that demonstrates the additional height is necessary in order to reduce noise levels at the property line to 65 dBA. An approved noise study shall include an analysis of potential impacts of sound transfer as a result of construction of a proposed wall.
E. The Planning Official may deny a request for a sound wall if it is determined that the proposed height and/or materials of the wall would not be in keeping with the visual character of surrounding properties, or that such placement would create a threat to public health and safety. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
Purpose. The standards for Gated Access are provided here as a Type I review as authorized at 20.210.020(B)(1). These standards are intended to implement safe ingress and egress while promoting visual attractiveness and site security. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Land use permit required. A land use permit is required for any gate across access a driveway, unless exempted by 20.914.020B.
Exemptions. The permit and development standards of 20.914 shall not apply for the following: any commercial or industrial development where the gate will remain open during business hours, or any residential gate for secondary driveway to be used exclusively for access to RV, boat or similar vehicle parking area.
Development standards. A detailed site plan shall be submitted with the Type I application which depicts the access point(s) and demonstrates all of the following required elements:
1. Stacking area. Each access point shall show an area of sufficient length and width to safely stack traffic coming onto the property from the adjacent roadway. Transportation Services shall determine the length of the stacking area based on the adjacent roadway type and design configuration. A parking area shall be provided to the right of the entry lane to accommodate visitors not able to open the gate.
2. Entrance/Exit Design. Adequate vision clearance shall be provided so that motorists leaving a gated community have a clear view of the sidewalk on either side of the exit, and so that approaching pedestrians have a clear view of any approaching vehicle. Gated community entrances and exits shall be designed to achieve travel speeds not to exceed 5 miles per hour, and shall require a vehicle stop directly prior to crossing the street sidewalk. Entrance and exit areas shall be designed so that vehicles approaching or leaving the gated community can queue to enter/exit the traffic stream without blocking the sidewalk.
3. Turnaround feature. Each gate access point shall have an area that allows traffic to safely maneuver a turnaround when the gate is in closed position.
4. Lane width inside the gate. Fire and emergency access vehicles require passing room within the development. Twenty feet of unobstructed driving surface is required on the interior side of the access point and gate.
5. Emergency vehicle access required. Each project will require the applicant to produce a confirmation of approval from the Fire Marshal that indicates that the design of the gate(s) meets the Fire Marshal’s requirements for emergency entry. The Fire Marshal’s written approval shall be submitted with this application.
6. No encroachment into publicly owned right-of-way. The gates, operating equipment and fencing shall be located wholly within the private portion of the property. The property line shall be clearly indicated on the site plan. Swing gates are not allowed to encroach into the public right-of-way. The drives, streets and lanes inside a gated community are to remain private.
7. Pedestrian Access. Separate pedestrian access from driving lanes. Each access point shall have a pedestrian access and walkway that is separate from the driving lanes and links directly to the public sidewalk. Pedestrian walkways shall meet all standards for accessibility required by the Americans with Disabilities Act.
8. Lighting. Lighting fixtures shall be established and maintained at the access points to provide vehicle and pedestrian safety. The required lighting shall be automatically controlled to turn on during the hours of darkness.
9. Vision Clearance. Each access point shall demonstrate vision clearance as per 20.985 VMC.
10. Gate Material. The moving portion of the gate shall be constructed of material that is at least 80 percent open. Typically, wrought iron or other decorative material is used.
11. Gate opening width. Each gate must open to a minimum width of 15 feet or as required by the Fire Marshal. (Ord. M-4034 § 30, 12/03/2012; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
Reasons for impact fees. It is the purpose of this chapter to ensure that adequate facilities are available to serve new growth and development, and to promote orderly growth and development by requiring that new development pay a proportionate share of the cost of new facilities needed to serve growth. In addition, it is also the purpose of this chapter to ensure that impact fees are imposed through established procedures and criteria so that specific developments do not pay arbitrary fees or duplicate fees for the same impact. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Uniform applicability. This chapter shall be uniformly applicable to development that occurs within a designated service area or overlay service areas.
B. For pre-development permit issuance. No building permit shall be issued for a development in a designated service area or overlay service area as defined in this chapter unless the impact fee is calculated and paid pursuant to this chapter.
C. For new development requiring a building permit the impact fee(s) shall be calculated at the time of building permit application. Impact fees shall be due and payable at the time of the building permit issuance unless deferred, as provided in VMC 20.915.075 and 20.915.076. Notwithstanding the foregoing, all impact fees shall be recalculated for building permit applications that have not been issued within one year.
D. For development not requiring a building permit. For development not requiring a building permit (e.g., approval of a change in use of a building or land), the impact fee shall be calculated and imposed at the time of the associated development approval.
E. For manufactured home parks. For manufactured home parks, the impact fee shall be calculated and imposed at the time of site plan approval.
F. All impact fees shall be calculated using the impact fee rates in effect at the time of calculation. (Ord. M-4512 § 2, 2025; Ord. M-4340 § 2, 2021; Ord. M-4325 § 3, 2020; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. General. Service areas, which may vary by type of public facility, are established as shown on the Park Impact Fee Technical Document and Vancouver Transportation Impact Fees Program Technical Document, which are incorporated herein by reference.
B. Service areas and fees. Such areas will provide a nexus between those paying the fees and receiving the benefits to ensure that those developments paying impact fees receive substantial benefits.
C. Establishment of overlay service areas. Overlay service areas may be established for system improvements identified in the capital facilities plan which are:
1. Designed to serve geographic areas whose boundaries are not generally contiguous with established service areas; or
2. Designed to serve more than one established service area; or
3. Where a system improvement is designed to serve an established service area, or service areas, but is located partly or entirely outside of the city or urban growth area, and provides a substantial benefit to the assigned service area. Properties within this type of overlay service area are not subject to city impact fees to the extent those properties are outside the city.
D. Factors affecting service areas. Additional or revised service areas may be designated by the city council upon consideration of the following factors:
1. The Comprehensive Plan;
2. Standards for adequate public facilities incorporated in the capital facilities plan;
3. The projections for full development as permitted by land use ordinances and timing of development;
4. The need for and cost of un-programmed capital improvements necessary to support projected development; and
5. Such other factors as the city council may deem relevant.
E. Service areas and urban growth boundaries. Service areas adjoining an urban growth boundary shall automatically be adjusted to conform to any change in such boundary. (Ord. M-4274 § 1, 2019; Ord. M-4181 § 1, 2016; Ord. M-4107 § 2, 2014; Ord. M-3933 § 3, 2009; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Formula. The impact fee component for roads shall be calculated using the following formula:
TIF = FxTxA
1. "TIF" means the traffic impact component of the total development impact fee.
2. "F" means the traffic impact fee rate per vehicle trip in dollar amounts, for each service area. Such rate shall be established in the Traffic Impact Fee Program Technical Document, incorporated herein by this reference, for each service area by estimating the cost of anticipated growth-related roadway projects divided by the projected number of growth-related trips within that service area. Between major program updates, the calculated per trip fee will be adjusted annually to account for inflation using the Engineering News Record Construction Cost Index for Seattle, and as outlined in the Traffic Impact Fee Program Technical Document.
3. "T" means the trips generated by a proposed development and calculated according to the Traffic Impact Fee Program Technical Document. The calculation of “T” described in the Traffic Impact Fee Program Technical Document includes, for some retail commercial land uses, a “business enhancement factor (BEF)” adjustment. Refer to the Traffic Impact Fee Program Technical Document for land uses eligible for the BEF. In the absence of a land use code precisely fitting the development proposal, the director of public works or designee shall select the most similar code and may make appropriate adjustments to the trip equation applicable thereto. In selecting the appropriate land use code and in making adjustments thereto, the Review Authority shall be guided by the most recent edition of the Trip Generation Manual, Institute of Transportation Engineers.
4. "A" means an adjustment for the portion of anticipated additional tax revenues resulting from a development which is prorated to system improvements contained in the capital facilities plan. Such adjustment for traffic impacts is determined to be 15%, so that "A" equals 85%. (Ord. M-4107 § 3, 2014; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Formula. The impact fee component for parks shall be calculated using the following formula:
PIF = F × U
1. “PIF” means the parks impact component of the total development impact fee.
2. “F” means the parks impact fee rate per unit of housing, either single-family or multifamily residential, as applicable, for each service area. Such rate shall be established in the parks impact fee program technical document, incorporated herein by this reference, for each service area by estimating the cost of anticipated growth-related parks projects. Between major program updates, the calculated per unit fee will be adjusted annually pursuant to the methodology set forth in VMC 3.08.100 and as outlined in the parks impact fee program technical document.
3. “U” means the number of units, either single-family or multifamily, whichever is applicable, consistent with a proposed development.
B. Current park impact fee rates shall be as set forth in Table 20.915.050-1:
Table 20.915.050-1.
Year | Park District | Single-Family (SF) | Multifamily (MF) |
|---|---|---|---|
January 1, 2023 | A, B, C | $4,757 | $3,476 |
January 1, 2024 | A, B, C | $5,232 | $3,824 |
January 1, 2025 | A, B, C | $5,756 | $4,206 |
January 1, 2026 | A, B, C | $6,130 | $4,480 |
C. At least one copy of the park impact fee technical document adopted by the city council, including the current park impact fee schedule as calculated thereunder, shall be filed in the office of the city clerk for use and examination by the public. (Ord. M-4388 § 2, 2022; Ord. M-4376 § 10, 2022; Ord. M-4363 § 9, 2022; Ord. M-4319 § 3, 2020; Ord. M-4274 § 2, 2019; Ord. M-4181 § 2, 2016; Ord. M-3933 § 4, 2009; Ord. M-3663 § 22, 2004; Ord. M-3653 §§ 3, 5, 2004; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Plan adoption. In order for the city to collect school impact fees on behalf of a school district, said school district’s capital facilities plan shall be adopted as a portion of the city of Vancouver’s comprehensive plan in accordance with the provisions of this section.
B. Plan submittal. In conjunction with mandated comprehensive plan updates, a school district requesting impact fees shall submit to the city planning commission a capital facilities plan adopted by the school board and consisting of the following elements:
1. A standard of service which identifies the program year, class size by grade span, number of classrooms, types of facilities, and other factors identified by the school district.
2. The district’s capacity over the next six years based upon an inventory of the district’s facilities either existing or under construction and the district’s standard of service.
3. A forecast of future needs for school facilities based upon the district’s enrollment projections.
4. At least a six-year financing plan component, updated as necessary to maintain at least a six-year forecast period, for financing needed school facilities within projected funding levels.
5. Application of the formula set out in subsection F of this section based upon information contained in the capital facilities plan. Separate fees shall be calculated for single-family and multifamily types of dwelling units, based upon the student generation rates determined by the district for each type of dwelling unit. If insufficient information is available for a district to calculate a multifamily student generation rate, a county-wide average shall be utilized. For purposes of this chapter, manufactured homes and each unit of a duplex shall be treated as single-family dwellings.
C. Planning Commission review. The planning commission shall review a school district’s capital facilities plan or plan update in accordance with the provisions of this subsection.
1. Factors. The planning commission shall consider:
a. Whether the district’s forecasting system for enrollment projections appears reasonable and reliable;
b. Whether the anticipated level of state and voter-approved funding appears reasonable and historically reliable;
c. Whether the district appropriately applied the formula set out in subsection F of this section.
2. Public hearing. In the event the district or the planning commission on its own motion proposes to modify the school impact fee, the planning commission shall not make its recommendation until holding a duly advertised public hearing on the proposal.
3. Recommendation. The planning commission may request a school district to review and to resubmit its capital facilities plan or update consistent with the provisions of this section. The planning commission shall submit an annual report to the board for each school district for which school impact fees are collected.
D. Council action. No new or revised school impact fees shall be effective until adopted by the council following a duly advertised public hearing to consider the school district’s capital facilities plan or plan update.
E. Interlocal agreement. School impact fees shall not become effective until the school district has entered into an interlocal agreement provided for in VMC 20.915.100.
F. Formula. The impact fee component for schools shall be separately calculated for each participating school district using the following formula:
SIF = { (CS × SF) − (SM) − (TC) − (FC) } × A
1. SIF means the school component of the total development impact fee.
2. CS means the cost of the improvements for each type of facility listed in the school district’s capital facilities plan less the cost to cure existing overcapacity divided by the capacity of the improvement. Type of facility means elementary school, middle school and high school. The development cost by service area is shown in Table 20.915.060-1.
3. SF means student factor. The student factor is the number of students typically generated from one residential unit for each type of school facility.
4. SM means state match. State match is the amount received from the state toward school construction costs. The state match component of the formula is that amount representing the per student amount of state matching funds. This is calculated for each type of facility as: student factor times Boeckh Index (average annual construction cost of a school facility per square foot) times square-foot standard per student established by the Superintendent of Public Instruction times state match percentage (that percentage of the total cost of a school facility funded by state funds). The state match for each school district shall be calculated annually.
5. TC means tax credit. This is calculated as:
TC = ((1 + i)10 − 1) / (i(1 + i)10) × (AAV) × (SPTL)
a. AAV means the average assessed value for the dwelling per single family unit.
b. SPTL means the current school district capital property tax levy rate.
c. i means the current interest rate as stated in the Bond Buyer Twenty Bond General Obligation Bond index.
6. FC means facilities credit. This is the value of any improvements listed in a school district’s capital facilities plan provided by the developer.
7. A means an adjustment for the portion of anticipated additional tax revenues resulting from a development that is prorated to system improvements contained in the capital facilities plan. The adjustment for school impacts is determined to be 85 percent.
Table 20.915.060-1. School District Impact Fees
School District | Single-Family | Multifamily |
|---|---|---|
Battle Ground | $10,760 | $3,845 |
Camas | $6,650 | $6,650 |
Evergreen | $6,432 | $3,753 |
Vancouver | $2,786 | $2,486 |
(Ord. M-4402 § 3(Y), 2023; Ord. M-4289 § 4, 2019; Ord. M-4223 § 4, 2017; Ord. M-4147 § 4, 2015; Ord. M-3994 § 5, 2011; Ord. M-3959 § 45, 2010; Ord. M-3952 § 1, 2010; Ord. M-3951 § 1, 2010; Ord. M-3909 § 1, 2008; Ord. M-3854 § 1, 2007; Ord. M-3785 § 2, 2006; Ord. M-3736 § 1, 2006; Ord. M-3730 § 34, 2005; Ord. M-3663 § 23, 2004; Ord. M-3653 § 2, 2004; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. For residential and nonresidential development. The impact fee for a nonresidential development shall be computed by applying the traffic impact fee formula set out in VMC 20.915.040. The impact fee for a residential development shall be computed by applying the traffic impact fee, park impact fee and school impact fee formulae set out in VMC 20.915.050 and 20.915.060, combining the results; provided, that the school impact fee component shall not apply to housing which by restrictive covenant is exclusively for persons 62 years of age or older.
B. For mixed uses. If the development for which approval is sought contains a mix of uses, the impact fee must be separately calculated for each type of use.
C. Criteria to reduce or eliminate impact fees. An administrative appeal may be considered by the director of community development to reduce or eliminate impact fees by submittal of an application prior to the payment of fees. Appeals shall be reserved for unusual circumstances which make the standard impact fee as applied to the development unreasonable. Upon receipt of an application for any such appeal, the city shall distribute a written notice of appeal and a copy of the supporting studies and data required below to the office, department, or school district responsible for the applicable capital facilities for which the impact fee is imposed. The appeal must be supported by reasonable studies and data provided by the applicant showing that:
1. The formulae or method contained in VMC 20.915.040, 20.915.050 or 20.915.060 to calculate the fees do not accurately reflect the cost of system improvements that are reasonably related to the service demands and needs of a particular development; or
2. Such facility improvements will not reasonably benefit the proposed development.
3. The current development proposal implements a concomitant rezone agreement, development agreement or other development approval pursuant to which public facilities identified in the capital facilities plan were dedicated or constructed, and which are of benefit to the community at large and which fall within the definition of system improvements. The appellant shall have the burden of producing and presenting studies and data that clearly show the basis and substantiation of the appeal upon submittal. Appeals shall be reviewed by means of a Type I procedure, pursuant to VMC 20.210.020. Impact fees may be paid under protest in order to obtain a permit or approval of development activity. (Ord. M-4402 § 3(Y), 2023; Ord. M-4340 § 3, 2021; Ord. M-4172 § 1, 2016; Ord. M-4107 § 5, 2014; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Prior to issuance of single-family detached or attached residential building permits, an application may be submitted for deferral of payment of full impact fees until scheduling of final building inspection by the City. For these purposes “attached single-family” shall be limited to common-wall housing with no more than one unit per legal lot.
B. The amount of impact fees deferred shall be determined by the fees in effect at the time the applicant applies for a deferral. “Applicant” as defined in this section shall include an entity that controls the applicant, that is controlled by the applicant, or is under common control with the applicant.
C. An impact fee deferral application must be submitted for each parcel to be developed. This application shall include:
1. Administrative fees as specified under VMC 20.180.
2. A locally recorded impact fee deferral lien against the property involved, granted to the City of Vancouver in the amount of the deferral. The deed shall be signed by all owners of the property, with signatures acknowledged as required for a deed. The deed shall be binding on all successors, and subordinate to one mortgage for construction of the property granted by the impact fee deferral applicant.
3. The deferral period shall not exceed a period of 18 months from issuance of the building permit, at which time any deferred impact fees shall be due.
4. Upon receipt of all deferred impact fees, the City of Vancouver shall execute release of the lien for the property. The property owner at that time shall be responsible for recording the release, at their expense.
5. The City of Vancouver may institute foreclosure proceedings for unpaid impact fees due. For unpaid School Impact Fees, School Districts may also institute foreclosure proceedings if the City of Vancouver has not done so within 45 days after receiving notice from the District requesting initiation of such proceedings. (Ord. M-4172, Added, 08/15/2016, Sec 2)
A. Concurrent with the application for multi-family residential building permit, an application may be submitted for deferral of payment of traffic and park impact fees. If approved, eligible impact fees may be deferred until the payment deadline criteria provided in subsection C of this section. For these purposes “multi-family” shall be defined as a building or portion designed or used as a residence by three or more households and containing three or more dwelling units.
B. The amount of impact fees deferred shall be determined by the fees in effect at the time the applicant applies for a deferral subject to annual recalculation as provided in VMC 20.915.020(C). “Applicant” as defined in this title shall include an entity that controls the applicant, that is controlled by the applicant or is under common control with the applicant.
C. The impact fee payment deferral period shall terminate on the date that an application for inspection for temporary certificate occupancy, or final certificate occupancy (if no temporary certificate required), is submitted, or 36 months from issuance of the building permit, whichever event occurs first at which time any deferred impact fee shall be due. An application for deferral of impact fees under this section, or a deferral that has been approved prior to the issuance of a building permit, shall terminate upon expiration or denial of the concurrently submitted building permit application. The city may deny an application for temporary building occupancy inspection and withhold issuance of any building certificate occupancy permits until all deferred impact fees have been paid.
D. An impact fee deferral application must be submitted for each parcel to be developed. The deferral application shall include an impact fee deferral agreement and lien on forms provided by the city. The lien shall be recorded against the property, granted to the city of Vancouver in the amount of the deferral and shall be signed by all owners of the property, with signatures acknowledged as required for a property deed. The lien shall be binding on all successors, and subordinate to one deed of trust securing a mortgage for construction of the property granted by the impact fee deferral applicant.
E. Upon receipt of all deferred impact fees, the city of Vancouver shall execute release of the lien for the property. The property owner at that time shall be responsible for recording the release, at their expense.
F. The city of Vancouver may institute foreclosure proceedings for unpaid impact fees due.
G. School impact fees are excluded from this provision and are not eligible for deferral of payment. (Ord. M-4512 § 3, 2025)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Exemptions from impact fees. The following developments shall be exempt from the requirement for payment of impact fees: publicly operated elementary, middle, junior high and senior high schools, and administrative, maintenance and other facilities of a school district and facilities of an Educational Service District.
B. Exemption or waiver from impact fees for low-income housing pursuant to RCW 82.02.060(2). Pursuant to RCW 82.02.060(2), the review authority may grant a total or partial exemption or waiver from impact fees for housing developments containing up to three dwelling units and qualifying as low-income housing as defined in this chapter, to be owned and occupied by, or leased to, low-income persons. Requests for exemption and/or waiver for four or more dwelling units must be approved by the city council. No such impact fee exemption and/or waiver shall be granted for any low-income housing that has been granted a property tax exemption pursuant to Chapter 3.22 VMC, Multi-Family Tax Abatement. Any such exemption or waiver shall be subject to:
1. Provision being made for payment of the impact fee from public funds other than impact fee accounts; and
2. Adequate documentation that the housing meets appropriate standards regarding household income, rent levels, sales price, location, and number of units;
C. Alternative exemption from impact fees for low-income housing pursuant to RCW 82.02.060(3). Pursuant to RCW 82.02.060(3), the city council may grant an alternative exemption for low-income housing under this subsection. No such impact fee exemption and/or waiver shall be granted for any low income housing that has been granted a property tax exemption pursuant to Chapter 3.22 VMC, Multi-Family Tax Abatement
1. The city council may either:
a. Grant a partial exemption of not more than 80 percent of impact fees, in which case there is no requirement to pay the exempted portion of the fee from public funds other than impact fee accounts; or
b. Provide a full waiver, in which case the remaining percentage of the exempted fee must be paid from public funds other than impact fee accounts; and
2. Compliance with all of the requirements of subsection D of this section is required.
D. An exemption for low-income housing granted under subsection B or C of this section must comply with all of the following conditions:
1. The developer shall record a covenant with the Clark County auditor. The covenant must:
a. Prohibit using the property for any purpose other than for low-income housing.
b. Require that if the property is converted to a use other than for low-income housing, the property owner must pay the applicable impact fees in effect at the time of conversion.
c. Define low-income housing as housing for which the monthly housing expense is no greater than 30 percent of 80 percent of the median-family income adjusted for family size for Clark County, Washington, as reported by the United States Department of Housing and Urban Development.
2. When the city grants an exemption for low-income housing granted under subsection B or C of this section, it may not collect revenue lost through the granting of the exemption by increasing impact fees unrelated to the exemption.
3. A school district that receives school impact fees collected by the city must consent in writing prior to city approval of any exemption from school impact fees granted under subsection B or C of this section. Failure of a school district to provide consent in writing to the city within 30 days of the school district’s receipt of written request for approval from the city shall constitute disapproval of the requested exemption.
E. Reduction in traffic impact fees for qualifying businesses. To promote business development, the review authority may grant a reduction of traffic impact fees as specified in Table 20.915.080-1 below for businesses which meet all of the following requirements:
1. The business owner shall commit, through a development agreement approved by city council, to locate a number of new employees that coincides with the TIF incentive in Table 20.915.080-1. Such new employees shall locate to the city within the first year of the business obtaining an occupancy permit; and
2. The median salary of all company employees to be located shall, at a minimum, coincide with the specified percent of median individual income in Table 20.915.080-1. Median individual income shall be based on the most recent available information from U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development for the Portland-Vancouver MSA at the time of the development agreement approval; and
3. If the owner or developer of the property or building is not the business locating within the city, documentation shall be submitted to the city that satisfactorily demonstrates that the business received the benefit of the fee reduction rather than the owner or developer; and
4. The business shall provide the city with such documentation and access to records as needed to verify satisfaction of the foregoing requirements. In the event that the business fails to satisfy any of the requirements criteria, the business shall pay to the city the amount of the fee reduction together with interest at the statutory rate provided for at RCW 19.52.010 upon demand.
The city shall make provision for payment of the impact fee reduction to the transportation impact fee account from public funds other than impact fee accounts.
Table 20.915.080-1 Business Development TIF Incentive | |||
|---|---|---|---|
Median Salary of All Business Employees | Minimum Employees | TIF Benefit | |
1. | 200% of Median Individual Income | 200 | 25% TIF reduction, up to $100,000 |
2. | 150% of Median Individual Income | 250 | 25% TIF reduction, up to $100,000 |
3. | 125% of Median Individual Income | 300 | 25% TIF reduction, up to $100,000 |
4. | 200% of Median Individual Income | 400 | 50% TIF reduction, up to $200,000 |
5. | 150% of Median Individual Income | 500 | 50% TIF reduction, up to $200,000 |
6. | 125% of Median Individual Income | 600 | 50% TIF reduction, up to $200,000 |
This provision shall be operative until December 31, 2020, unless renewed by city council.
F. Criteria for calculating impact fees. The impact fee for an exempt or waived development shall be calculated as provided for in this chapter and paid with public funds; except that there is no requirement to pay the exempted portion of the fee from public funds other than impact fee account for a partial exemption of not more than 80 percent of impact fees that has been approved under subsection C of this section. Such payment may be made by including such amount(s) in the public share of system improvements undertaken within the applicable service area. If an impact fee(s) is waived, the review authority, pursuant to VMC 20.915.070, or state law may determine whether a public share-contribution or a reduced public-share contribution is required. (Ord. M-4340 § 4, 2021; Ord. M-4154 § 3, 2016; Ord. M-4108 § 1, 2014; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. For the developer. The developer shall be entitled to a credit against the applicable impact fee as follows:
1. The developer shall be entitled to a credit against the applicable impact fee for the fair market value of any dedication of land for and reasonable documented construction costs acceptable to the City associated with the improvement to, or new construction of any system improvements provided by the developer that are identified in the capital facilities plan and that are required by the City as a condition of approval to the development proposal against which the impact fee is assessed.
2. No credit shall be given for project improvements as defined under VMC 20.150.
3. Traffic Impact Fee Credit. Effective June 3, 2015 (effective date of ordinance), the maximum traffic impact credit shall be in the amount of the impact fee applicable to the development proposal against which the impact fee is assessed. The credit shall be applied to the impact fee as calculated for the development proposal against which the impact fee is assessed and shall not exceed the impact fee due.
4. Street Project Assessment Reimbursement Contract for Excess Costs. If a developer has incurred costs for street project system improvements in excess of the amount of the traffic impact fee applicable to the development proposal against which the impact fee is assessed, the developer may apply to the City for a street project assessment reimbursement contract pursuant to VMC Chapter 11.10.
5. Existing traffic impact fee credits. TIF credits that existed prior to June 3, 2015 (effective date of ordinance) shall be utilized consistent with the provisions of the TIF Program Technical Document. The value and ownership of such TIF credits as of June 3, 2015 (effective date of ordinance) shall be documented by a list thereof published by the City and distributed by US mail to the last known addresses of said owners on June 3, 2015 (effective date of ordinance).
B. Traffic Impact Fee reduction. The developer may be provided a TIF reduction pursuant to Section 20.550.050(A) VMC.
C. Traffic Impact Fee Credit for the developer. Additionally, the developer may be provided a credit against the impact fee in an amount up to 10% of the traffic component to account for contributions of mass transit facilities that are approved by the City and made a condition of approval for the development.
D. Impact fee reduction. Where impact fees are owing prior to completion of a system improvement undertaken by the developer, the impact fee shall be reduced by 85% from the Director of Public Works estimate of the credit to be due upon dedication and completion of the required work, provided, if the same has been assured by a bond or other guarantee, as governed by Chapter 20.909 VMC, to be completed no later than the date of occupancy for commercial/industrial/multi-family structures or the final building inspection for single-family and other uses. Upon completion of the required system improvement, appropriate refunds shall be made and credits recognized up to but not to exceed the amount of the impact fee applicable to the development proposal against which the impact fee is assessed based upon the Director of Public Works’ determination of the value of dedication and reasonable construction costs.
E. City credit utilization. Traffic impact fee credits issued by the City after June 3, 2015, (effective date of adopted ordinance) may be utilized in lieu of cash payment only for traffic impact fees for the development proposal against which the impact fee is assessed, as provided in subsection A.3 above. Other impact fee credits recognized by the City may be utilized in lieu of cash payment of impact fees for the subject development and/or any other development within the same service area. (Ord. M-4107 § 6, 12/01/2014; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Process for revision of traffic impact fees. Traffic impact fee rates shall be adjusted periodically to reflect changes in costs of land acquisition and construction, facility plan projects and anticipated growth. Traffic Impact Fee Program Technical Document may contain provision for automatic revision of traffic impact fee rate no more than once annually to reflect the change in a generally recognized and applicable inflation/deflation index.
B. Park impact fee rates may be revised. Rates may be revised using the following process:
1. The adopted Park Impact Fee Technical Document may be revised periodically by the city council when financial analysis establishes that there is a need for a major program update, but no less than every three years to evaluate the status of the rate of collection and the projected need to serve future residents. Such adjustments shall only become effective upon adoption by the city council.
C. Process for revision of school impact fees. School impact fee rates shall be adjusted periodically to reflect changes in costs of land acquisition and construction, facility plan projects and anticipated growth. Such adjustments shall only become effective upon adoption by the city council of a modification to the capital facilities plan.
D. Operation of impact fee fund. The city has created and established a special purpose, nonlapse impact fee fund. The city finance director shall establish separate accounts within such fund and maintain records for each such account whereby impact fees collected can be segregated by type of facility and by service area:
1. Collected interest. All interest shall be retained in the account and expended for the intended purposes that the impact fees were imposed.
2. Impact fee fund annual report. By April of each year, the finance director shall provide a report for the previous calendar year on each impact fee account showing the source and amount of moneys collected, earned or received and system improvements that were financed in whole or in part by impact fees.
E. Inter-local agreements and fees. The city of Vancouver may enter into an inter-local agreement with Clark County to establish a coordinated program for the imposition, collection, administration and expenditure of traffic and park impact fees.
F. School impact fees. School impact fees shall not be collected on behalf of any school district until such district enters into an inter-local agreement with city of Vancouver providing for submittal of capital facilities plans, fund administration, report of expenditure, allocation of risk, and other appropriate matters. Where Clark County adopts a substantially similar school impact fee for a district whose boundaries include portions of the city of Vancouver, such an inter-local agreement may include the county. The inter-local agreement may include a fee to cover the city’s cost of administering the school impact fee program.
G. Imposition of impact fees for costs previously incurred. The Review Authority may impose an impact fee for system improvements costs previously incurred by the city of Vancouver to the extent that new growth and development will be served by the previously constructed improvements, provided such fee shall not be imposed to make up for any system improvement deficiencies.
H. Expenditures for system improvements with impact fees. Impact fees for system improvements shall be expended only in conformance with the capital facilities plan. Impact fees shall be expended or encumbered for a permissible use within 10 years of receipt, unless an extraordinary and compelling reason exists for fees to be held longer than 10 years. Such extraordinary or compelling reasons shall be identified in written findings by the city council.
I. Refunds for the current owner. The current owner of property on which an impact fee has been paid may receive a refund of such fee if the city fails to expend or encumber the impact fees within 10 years of when the fees were paid, or such other period of time established pursuant to this subsection, on public facilities intended to benefit the development activity for which the impact fees were paid. In determining whether impact fees have been encumbered, impact fees shall be considered encumbered on a first-in, first-out basis. The current owner likewise may receive a proportionate refund where the public funding of applicable service area projects by the end of such 10-year period has been insufficient to satisfy the ratio of public-to-private funding for such service area as established in the capital facilities plan. The city shall notify potential claimants by first-class mail deposited with the United States Postal Service at the last known address of claimants.
1. Refund time period. The request for refund money must be submitted to the Vancouver city council in writing within one year of the date the right to claim the refund arises or the date the notice is given, whichever is later. Any impact fees that are not expended within these time limitations, and for which no application for refund has been made within this one-year period, shall be retained and expended on the indicated capital facilities. Refunds of impact fees under this subsection shall include interest earned on the impact fees.
2. Criteria for a refund with interest. A developer may request and shall receive a refund, including interest earned on the impact fees, when the building permit for which the impact fee has been paid has lapsed for noncommencement of construction. A partial refund shall be provided where the project for which a building permit has been issued has been altered resulting in a decrease in the amount of the impact fee due.
J. Impact fees as additional and supplemental requirements. The impact fee is additional and supplemental to, and not in substitution of, any other requirements imposed by the city on the development of land or the issuance of building permits. This is provided that any other such city development regulation which would require the developer to undertake dedication or construction of a facility contained within the city capital facility plan shall be imposed only if the developer is given a credit against impact fees as provided for in Section 20.915.090 VMC. (Ord. M-4319 § 4, 2020; Ord. M-4181 § 3, 2016; Ord. M-4107 § 7, 2014; Ord. M-4034 § 31, 2012; Ord. M-3959 § 46, 2010; Ord. M-3952 § 2, 2010; Ord. M-3951 § 2, 2010; Ord. M-3933 § 5, 2009; Ord. M-3909 § 2, 2008; Ord. M-3854 § 2, 2007; Ord. M-3785 § 2, 2006; Ord. M-3653 § 1, 2004; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
The intent of the infill ordinance is to encourage the development of underutilized and challenged parcels in the R-9, R-6, R-4, and R-2 zoning districts. The infill ordinance accommodates a variety of housing types including single-family detached and single-family attached. (Ord. M-4517 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2025; Ord. M-4465 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2024; Ord. M-4455 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2024; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Eligibility Criteria. This chapter may be applied to parcels created prior to the adoption date of the ordinance codified in this chapter that meet all of the following criteria:
1. The parcel is within the R-9, R-6, R-4, R-2 zoning district; and
2. The net developable area (excluding any critical areas) of the parcel is two and one-half acres or smaller in area. An infill parent parcel size may be increased by five percent with approval from the planning official; and
3. The proposed development can and will be served by urban services at the time of final plat or development approval. For the purposes of this chapter, “urban services” shall mean public water and sewer service as described in VMC Title 14; and
4. There is urban development abutting the subject site on at least 50 percent of its nonstreet perimeter. For the purposes of this section, “nonstreet perimeter” shall mean that portion of the perimeter of the parcel that is not abutting a public street. Where there is no abutting public street, the entire perimeter is used for measurement.
a. For the purposes of this chapter, “urban development” shall mean a parcel that meets at least one of the following criteria:
1. All parcels with existing nonresidential or multifamily structures that are currently receiving urban services (e.g. public sewer and water); or
2. Tax exempt parcels, regardless of development status; or
3. All plats which have received final or preliminary approval within the last five years; or
4. Parcels two and one-half acres (net developable area) or smaller in area which have existing residential structures; or

5. Parcels that are designated on the city of Vancouver comprehensive plan for multifamily, commercial, or industrial development; or
6. Parcels that are not developable based on a prior development review determination (e.g., park lands, environmentally sensitive lands, properties with utility easements).
B. Applicability of the Standards. All infill parcels created as a result of the application of this chapter and the subsequent infill development on those parcels shall be subject to the standards of this chapter. For the purposes of this chapter, the following definitions apply:
1. An “infill parent parcel” is the larger parcel of land from which infill parcels are divided.
2. “Infill land division” is the division of an infill parent parcel using some or all of the standards of this chapter.
3. “Infill parcels” are either parcels that meet the eligibility criteria of this chapter or those parcels created by the land division of an infill parent parcel through the application of the standards in this chapter.
4. “Infill development” is the subsequent residential development on infill parcels.
5. Repealed by M-4465.
6. “Infill development plan” is a plan that is required to be submitted with infill development which identifies the existing and proposed lot characteristics, including applicable standards and incentives.
7. “Predominant” shall mean the most frequently occurring residential design characteristic along both sides of the road frontage from intersection to intersection (or block face). (Ord. M-3840 § 41, 08/06/2007; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
A. All of the provisions of this code that would apply to a non-infill project shall apply to infill projects except as specifically modified by this chapter. If there is a conflict between the standards of this chapter and the provisions of any applicable overlay districts or plan districts, the overlay district or plan district standards shall supersede the standards of this chapter.
B. Development applications which meet the eligibility criteria for infill development, as outlined in this chapter, must comply with additional transportation standards as provided for in VMC 11.80.060, Infill Streets. (Ord. M-4517 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2025; Ord. M-4465 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2024; Ord. M-4455 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2024; Ord. M-4354 § 3(J), 2021; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Infill Land Divisions. The subdivisions and short subdivision of an infill parent parcel into nine or fewer parcels shall be subject to Type II review. The subdivision of an infill parent parcel into more than nine parcels shall be subject to Type III review. The proposed development shall comply with all applicable land division procedures and standards unless specifically modified pursuant to this chapter.
B. Development on Infill Parcels. All development on infill parcels created pursuant to this chapter shall be subject to the standards for infill development. The applicable infill development standards shall be recorded as a plat note on the final plat as a condition of approval.
C. Pre-application Meeting. The pre-application conference required pursuant to VMC 20.210.080, Pre-application Conference, may not be waived for infill lot development. In addition to the notice requirements of Chapter 20.210 VMC, Decision Making Procedures, the planning official or designee shall also mail written notice to all owners of record of property as shown on the most recent property tax assessment roll, located adjacent to and across the street from the subject property. The city shall also notify the appropriate neighborhood association(s) board members. This mailing shall be concurrent with that required by Chapter 20.210, Decision Making Procedures. Members of the public shall be provided with an opportunity to comment on the proposed project at a specific time during the meeting set aside for public comments. The notice must provide a brief description of the proposed development and a preliminary development plan. (Ord. M-4517 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2025; Ord. M-4465 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2024; Ord. M-4455 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2024; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Minimum Parcel Area. Within an infill land division for single-family development, no parcel shall be smaller than the minimum parcel area identified in Table 20.920.050-1, provided no lot shall exceed the maximum required by the underlying zoning district.
B. Additional Dwelling Types Allowed. In addition to the uses allowed by VMC Table 20.410.030-1 (Lower Density Residential Districts Use Table), single-family attached dwellings are allowed on infill parcels subject to the standards of this chapter.
1. Procedures for Single-Family Attached Dwellings. Development proposals for single-family attached dwellings utilizing the provisions of this chapter shall be subject to the following procedures:
a. Land divisions shall be reviewed according to Chapter 20.320 VMC. In addition, if the land is subdivided, development proposals must receive approval of a development plan that demonstrates how the proposal complies with this chapter and all other applicable requirements. The development plan shall be submitted and reviewed in conjunction with the land division application.
b. Preliminary plats may not be approved without approval of the submitted development plan. Both the development plan and preliminary plat must be fully consistent with standards of this and all other applicable provisions of this code.
c. Preliminary plats may be approved only where conditions of approval are established to ensure that subsequent or existing development on the resultant parcels shall occur consistent with the approved development plan.
d. Building permits may only be approved if consistent with the approved development plan and land division for all units with common walls.
2. Building Mass Supplemental Standard. The maximum number of consecutively attached single-family units (i.e., with attached walls at property line) shall not exceed four units.
3. Existing Public Alley Access. Single-family attached subdivisions (creation of 10 or more parcels for single-family attached dwellings) shall receive primary vehicle access from a rear alley if a public alley exists within or adjacent to the subdivision.
4. Pedestrian Pathways. City may require dedication of right-of-way or easements and construction of pathways between single-family attached parcels (e.g., between building breaks) to provide for pedestrian connectivity between groupings of single-family attached units and from one side of the parcel to another.
C. Minimum Parcel Size.
1. Infill parcels for single-family development (attached, detached) shall meet minimum parcel area requirements as shown in Table 20.920.050-1.
Table 20.920.050-1. Minimum Parcel Area for Single-Family Dwellings
Zoning District | Minimum Parcel Area Single-Family Detached (sq. feet) | Minimum Parcel Area Single-Family Attached (sq. feet) |
|---|---|---|
R-9 | 2,000 sf | 1,500 sf |
R-6 | 3,000 sf | 2,000 sf |
R-4 | 4,000 sf | 2,500 sf |
R-2 | 8,000 sf | 5,000 sf |
2. Parcel area may be varied by the planning official upon request. The planning official may grant a variance for up to one percent for proposed lots.
D. Minimum Parcel Width and Depth. Within an infill land division, the minimum parcel width and minimum parcel depth standards of Table 20.410.050-1 (Development Standards in Lower-Density Residential Zones) may be reduced by up to 50 percent. However, subsequent development on infill parcels that were created with less than the minimum width and depth required by Table 20.410.050-1 (Development Standards in Lower-Density Residential Zones), shall not be eligible for a variance to the minimum setback or frontage requirements.
E. Maximum Lot Coverage. Maximum lot coverage may be increased 30 percent over the standard for the applicable zone as shown in Table 20.920.050-2.
Table 20.920.050-2. Maximum Building Coverage
Zoning | Current Building | Building Coverage Standard |
|---|---|---|
R-9 | 50% | 65% |
R-6 | 50% | 65% |
R-4 | 50% | 65% |
R-2 | 50% | 65% |
F. Setbacks. Infill parcels developed under provisions of this chapter shall comply with setback requirements of Table 20.410.050-1 (Development Standards in Lower-Density Residential Zones); except that minimum front and side setbacks shall be as follows:
1. Minimum Front Yard.
a. Eighteen feet for garage or carport structures or other similar vehicular shelter.
b. Ten feet for other buildings.
2. Minimum Side Yard.
a. Single-family attached dwellings – interior side yard between attached buildings may be zero feet.
b. All other uses shall comply with the standard side setbacks of the applicable zoning district.
G. Expedited Development Review Process. An applicant may request an expedited review process for infill projects. An expedited infill project shall be contingent upon city staffing and other resource availability. Community development department will endeavor to complete review of an infill project within a 60-day time period from fully complete (FC) to issuance of the land use decision for projects that do not require a hearing; and 80 days for projects that require a hearing. (Ord. M-4517 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2025; Ord. M-4465 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2024; Ord. M-4455 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2024; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Repealed by Ord. M-4517. (Ord. M-4465 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2024)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Purpose. The intent of this chapter is to ensure that all new or substantially remodeled buildings, accessory uses and parking lots are provided with landscaping to ameliorate air and noise pollution; to afford protection from wind and inclement weather protection; and to regulate open storage to protect and enhance property values and make the City a more aesthetically pleasing place to live and work.
B. The City recognizes the aesthetic, ecological and economic values of landscaping to:
Establish and protect vegetation in urban areas for aesthetic, health (e.g. improved air quality, reduction in atmospheric carbon dioxide, etc.) and urban wildlife reasons;
Reduce stormwater runoff pollution, temperature, and rate and volume of flow;
Promote compatibility between land uses by reducing the visual, noise and lighting impacts of specific development on users of the site and abutting uses;
Aid in energy conservation by providing shade from the sun and shelter from the wind; and
Restore natural communities through reestablishment of native plants. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
Applicability. The provisions of this chapter shall apply to all development including the construction of new structures, the remodeling of existing structures where the landscaping is nonconforming, as outlined in Chapter 20.930 VMC, Nonconforming Situations, and to any changes of use which result in the need for increased on-site parking or loading requirements or otherwise change the access requirements.
Landscape plan. A landscape plan prepared in accordance with Section 20.925.110 VMC and 20.770 VMC shall be submitted to the Planning Official for review and approval. The plan shall be drawn to scale and shall be approved prior to land use approval.
Review procedures. Landscape plans shall be reviewed in conjunction with the associated land use application. In the event that the landscape plan is proposed as a separate action, the Planning Official shall approve, approve with conditions, or deny a plan submitted under the provisions of this chapter by means of a Type I procedure, per Chapter 20.210 VMC, Decision-Making Procedures. (Ord. M-4179 § 89, 2016; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Landscaping requirements. Landscaping shall be provided and maintained per Tables 20.925.030-1 and 20.925.030-2.
Table 20.925.030-1. Minimum Landscaping and Buffer Setback Standards
Zoning of Proposed Development (Buffer width is the setback for the commercial and industrial zoning districts) | |||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Required street trees and parking area landscaping do not count towards these requirements except as allowed by the street tree and parking code sections. | Lower-Density Residential3 | Higher-Density Residential3 | Commercial and Mixed Use1 | Industrial1 | |||||||||
R-2, R-4, R-6, R-9, R-17 | R-18, R-22, R-30, R-35, R-50 | CN, CC, CG, HX and MX only | OCI | IL A | IH | ||||||||
Zoning of Land Abutting Development Site | Separated from site by a street | Not separated by a street | Separated from site by a street | Not separated by a street | Separated from site by a street | Not separated by a street | Separated from site by a street | Not separated by a street | Separated from site by a street | Not separated by a street | Separated from site by a street | Not separated by a street | |
Lower-Density Residential | R-2, R-4, | None | None | L2 10 ft | L3 5 ft6 | L2 10 ft | L4 10 ft | L2 10 ft | L4 10 ft | L3 20 ft | L4 in 40 ft5 L5 in 50 ft5 | L3 20 ft | L4 in 40 ft5 L5 in 50 ft5 |
Higher-Density Residential | R-18, R-22, | None | L3 5 ft6 | L1 10 ft | L1 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L4 10 ft | L2 5 ft | L2 5 ft | L3 20 ft | L4 in 40 ft5 L5 in 50 ft5 | L3 20 ft | L4 in 40 ft5 L5 in 50 ft5 |
Commercial and Mixed Use | CN, CC, CG, MX | L1 10 ft | L3 5 ft6 | L2 10 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L12 0 – 5 ft | L2 5 ft | L12 0 – 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 10 ft |
Industrial | OCI | L1 10 ft | L3 5 ft | L1 10 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L12 0 – 5 ft | L2 5 ft | L12 0 – 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 10 ft |
IL, A, | L1 10 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L2 5 ft | L2 5 ft | L12 0 – 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L1 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 10 ft | |
IH | L1 10 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 5 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 5 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 10 ft | L2 10 ft | L12 0 – 5 ft | |
Resource (County) | FR-80, FR-40, AG-20, AG-WL, Park/WL | L1 10 ft | L3 50 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 50 ft | L2 10 ft | L2 5 ft | L2 5 ft | L3 10 ft | L2 10 ft | L1 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 10 ft |
1Zero lot line developments shall comply with the standards and requirements of VMC 20.910.050.
2If building is to be built on the property line there is no required buffer for that portion of the site.
3Applies to multifamily site plan applications and the perimeter of land divisions, not to individual single-family lot developments.
4In case of conflict with yard, setback, landscape, screening, or buffer standards specified in other sections of this title, the stricter standard shall apply, except for plan districts where the district standards shall always apply even if less strict than the standards of this table.
5Buffer widths abutting parking areas that are landscaped in accordance with the requirements of VMC 20.945.040(I) can be reduced to 25 feet.
6Where a directly abutting site not separated by a street is currently developed with a single-story residential structure, the minimum setback is five feet plus one additional foot for each three feet of proposed building height above 35 feet, up to a maximum setback of 15 feet. The additional setback for buildings above 35 feet in height applies only to the portions of those buildings above 35 feet.
Table 20.925.030-2. Landscaping and Screening Design Standards1
Type | Name | Description | Minimum Shrubs Based on Buffer Depth | Minimum Trees | Wall or Berm or Fence Required – Standards |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
L1 | General (for open areas) | Used where distance is primary means of separating uses or development, and landscaping enhances area between them | a. 10 ft or less = None b. Over 10 ft = 2 high or 3 low shrubs per 400 sq. ft. landscaped area | a. One tree per 30 lineal ft. b. One tree per 800 sq. ft. | None |
L2 | Low Screen | Distance and low-level screening intended to separate uses or development. Applied where low-level screening sufficiently reduces the impact of a use or development, or where visibility between areas is more important than a greater visual screen. | Continuous screen 3 ft. high, 95% opaque year-round. 3+-gallon containers or equivalent with spread 18+ inches | One tree per 30 lineal ft. of landscaped area or as needed to provide a tree canopy over the landscaped area | 3-ft.-high masonry wall or F2 fence or a berm may substitute for shrubs |
L3 | High Screen | Physical and visual separation between uses or development principally using screening. Used where full separation is warranted by impacts of proposed development, notwithstanding loss of direct views. | Enough shrubs to form a 6-ft.-high buffer screen 95% opaque year-round; 5+-gallon containers or equivalent with spread of 30+ inches | 6-ft. F1 or F2 high wall or fence with or without berm may substitute for shrubs | |
L4 | High Wall | Used where extensive screening of visual and noise impacts is needed to protect abutting sensitive uses and/or there is little space for separation between uses. | Four high shrubs required per 30 lineal ft. of wall | 6-ft. F2 high wall required | |
L5 | High Berm | Used instead of L4 where extensive screening is warranted and more space is available for separation between uses. | L2 low shrubs on top of berm so total screen height = 6 ft. | 4 – 6 ft. high berm required. If under 6 ft. high, plant L2 low shrubs on top of berm so overall screen height is 6 ft. | |
F1 | Partially Sight-Obscuring Fence | Partial visual separation applied where a proposed use or development has little impact, or where visibility between areas is more important than a total visual screen. | 6 ft. high – at least 50% sight-obscuring – wood, metal, chain link with slats, bricks, masonry or other permanent materials. | ||
F2 | Fully Sight-Obscuring Fence | Full visual separation where complete screening is needed to protect abutting uses, and landscaping alone cannot provide that separation. | 6 ft. high – 100% sight-obscuring – made of wood, metal, bricks, masonry or other permanent materials – no chain link fences with slats or similar construction. |
1 Additional Requirements:
L1, L2, L3, L4, L5 – Groundcover plants, grass lawn or approved flowers must fully cover the landscaped area not in shrubs or trees.
L2, L3 – When applied along street lot lines, the screen or wall is to be placed along the interior side of the landscaped area.
L4 – When abutting another property, the wall shall abut the property line. When abutting a street or road right-of-way, the wall shall be on the interior side of the landscaped area.
L1 – Within the commercial districts where a building is to be placed at the buffer line for a front setback, concrete or brick pavers may be used in place of the required groundcover for the length of the building for the front setback only, provided the required trees are still supplied, the paved area is connected to the public sidewalk, and pedestrian amenities are provided such as benches or pedestrian plazas. Building need not be placed at the required buffer line to utilize this section if the area between the buffer line and the building is devoted entirely to pedestrian-only areas.
L1, L2, L3, L4, L5 – Groundcover plants to be placed not more than 30 inches on center and 30 inches between rows. Rows of plants shall be staggered for a more effective covering. Groundcover shall be supplied in a minimum four-inch-size container or a two-and-one-quarter-inch container or equivalent if planted 18 inches on center.
Figure 20.925.030-1.

B. Obligation to maintain. Unless otherwise provided by the lease agreement, the owner, tenant and his agent, if any, shall be jointly and severally responsible for the maintenance of all landscaping and screening, which shall be maintained in good condition so as to present a healthy, neat and orderly appearance, shall be replaced or repaired as necessary, and shall be kept free from refuse and debris.
C. Pruning required. All plant growth in landscaped areas of developments shall be controlled by pruning, trimming or otherwise so that:
1. It will not interfere with the maintenance or repair of any public utility;
2. It will not restrict pedestrian or vehicular access;
3. It will not constitute a traffic hazard because of reduced visibility; and
4. Trees shall be pruned to provide at least eight feet of clearance above sidewalks and 13 feet above a local street, 15 feet above a collector street, and 18 feet above an arterial street roadway surfaces.
D. Installation requirements. The installation of all landscaping shall be as follows:
1. All landscaping shall be installed according to accepted planting procedures;
2. The plant materials shall be of high grade, and shall meet the quality and size standards of the American Standards for Nursery Stock (ANSI Z60, 1-1986, as updated); and
3. Landscaping shall be installed in accordance with VMC 20.925.050.
4. All landscaped areas shall be provided with an irrigation system or a readily available water supply with at least one outlet located within 50 feet of all plant material.
5. All landscaped areas shall be provided with a six-inch curb which could include curb cuts, wheel stops or other protective measure to allow for stormwater flow as part of LID.
6. Landscaped areas shall have a minimum length or width dimension of five feet in order to count toward the minimum required landscaped area.
E. Certificate of Occupancy. Certificates of occupancy shall not be issued unless the landscaping requirements have been met or other arrangements have been made and approved by the city such as described in VMC 20.909.020(B).
F. Care of landscaping along public rights-of-way. Appropriate methods for the care and maintenance of street trees and landscaping materials shall be provided by the owner of the property abutting the rights-of-way, unless otherwise required for emergency conditions and the safety of the general public.
G. Conditions of approval of existing vegetation. The review procedures and standards for required landscaping and screening shall be specified in the conditions of approval during development review and in no instance shall be less than that required for site development.
H. Height restrictions abutting public rights-of-way. No trees, shrubs or plantings more than 18 inches in height shall be planted in the public right-of-way abutting roadways having no established curb and gutter.
I. Sight visibility. Sight visibility requirements of Chapter 20.985 VMC, Vision Clearance, shall be met. (Ord. M-4377 § 2(e), 2022; Ord. M-4341 § 3 (Exh. B), 2021; Ord. M-4179 § 90, 2016; Ord. M-3931 § 30, 2009; Ord. M-3840 § 43, 2007; Ord. M-3701 § 31, 2005; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
Protection of existing vegetation. Existing vegetation on a site shall be protected as much as possible, and the protection of existing vegetation during development activities shall whenever possible, include open field or nontreed areas. Chapter 20.770 Tree, Vegetation, and Soil Conservation Ordinance contains additional standards for protection and retention of trees, vegetation, and soil.
Methods of protection. The developer shall provide methods for the protection of existing vegetation to be retained, such as protective fencing to remain during the construction process.
Remaining plants and undisturbed areas. Plants to be saved and areas not to be disturbed shall be noted on the landscape plans. The plan shall locate fencing used to protect vegetation and soils from damage during construction. (Ord. M-4179 § 91, 2016; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Minimum plant specifications.
1. All required trees shall be at least 2" in caliper and shrubs at least 1 gallon.
2. Trees shall optimize tree diversity; include native species and at last 60% conifers; utilize insect and disease resistant trees unless determined by the Planning Official as not appropriate for the site conditions.
3. Trees, shrubs, perennials, perennial grasses, and groundcovers shall be located and spaced to accommodate their mature size on the site.
B. Soils, soil conditioning and mulching.
1. A minimum of 12" depth of non-mechanically compacted soil shall be available for water absorption and root growth in planted areas.
2. A minimum of a 4" layer of porous mulch shall be applied to all exposed soil surfaces of nonturf areas within the landscape area. Plant types that are intolerant of mulch shall be exempt from this requirement. Non-porous material, such as plastic sheeting, shall not be placed under the mulch. However, porous landscape fabric is permitted.
3. Areas that have been cleared, graded, or compacted and that have not been covered by impervious surface, incorporated into a drainage facility or engineered as structural fill or slope shall be amended with organic matter. (Ord. M-4179 § 92, 2016; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Street trees required. All development projects fronting on a public street or a private street approved after the adoption of this Title shall be required to plant street trees in accordance with the standards in VMC 20.925.060(C).
B. Street tree planting list. Approval of any planting list shall be subject to review by the Planning Official, since certain tree species can damage utilities, streets and sidewalks.
C. Size, and spacing and placement of street trees. The specific spacing of street trees by size of tree shall be as follows:
1. One 2" caliper deciduous tree shall be provided for every 30' of frontage on a public or private street., provided that the Planning Official may adjust the spacing to accommodate access points or other obstructions;
2. The species selection and spacing of trees to be planted shall be such that it provides for the eventual mature size of the trees. Soil type, soil conditions and other site constraints shall be considered when selection species for planting;
3. No new utility pole location shall be established closer than 5' to any existing street tree;
4. Tree pits shall be located so as not to include utilities (e.g., water and gas meters) in the tree well;
5. On-premises utilities (e.g., water and gas meters) shall not be installed within existing tree well areas;
6. Street trees shall not be planted closer than 20' to light standards;
7. New light standards shall not be positioned closer than 20' to existing street trees except when public safety dictates, then they may be positioned no closer than 10';
8. Where there are overhead power lines, the street tree species selected shall be of a type which, at full maturity, will not interfere with the lines;
9. Trees shall not be planted closer than 2' from the face of the curb; and
10. Trees shall not be planted closer than 2' from any permanent hard surface paving or walkway:
a. Space between the tree and the hard surface may be covered by a nonpermanent hard surface such as bricks on sand, paved blocks and cobblestones; and
b. Sidewalk cuts in concrete for tree planting shall be at least 4' x 6' or 6' x 9', or larger depending on the space constraints and the mature size of the tree, to allow for air and water into the root area.
D. Cut and fill around existing trees. Existing trees may be used as street trees if no cutting or filling takes place within the drip-line of the tree unless an adjustment is approved by the Planning Official by means of a Type I procedure, per Chapter 20.210 VMC Decision-Making Procedures.
E. Replacement of street trees. Existing street trees removed by development projects or other construction shall be replaced by the developer with those types of trees approved by the Planning Official. The replacement trees shall be of a size and species similar to the trees that are being removed unless lesser sized alternatives are approved by the Planning Official.
F. Granting of adjustments. Adjustments to the street tree requirements may be granted by the Planning Official by means of a Type I procedure, as regulated in Chapter 20.210 VMC Decision-Making Procedures. (Ord. M-3847 § 14, 2007; Ord. M-3663 § 25, 2004; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Buffering and screening of parking, solid waste containers, and open storage shall be required as follows:
A. Parking lots. All parking, loading and maneuvering areas including driveways and drive-through lanes shall be screened from view per the standards of VMC 20.945.040(I)(2).
B. Screening of service facilities. Except for one-family and two-family dwellings, any solid waste container or recycling or disposal area and ground-level service facilities such as gas meters and air conditioners which would be visible from a public street, parking area, or any residentially-zoned property shall be screened from view per the standards of Chapter 20.970 VMC by placement of a solid wood fence, evergreen hedge or masonry wall. All refuse materials shall be contained within the screened area.
C. Open Storage. Open storage, or storage not wholly within an enclosed building, shall be required to meet the following requirements of Table 20.925.070-1:
Table 20.925.070-1. Open Storage Standards
District | Open Storage Requirement |
|---|---|
R-2, R-4, R-6, R-9, R-17 | Not allowed |
R-18, R-22, R-30, R-35, R-50 | Storage no higher than 5', screened by site-obscuring fence or evergreen hedge 6' in height |
City Center District (CX) | Storage no higher than 5', screened on all sides by a site-obscuring fence or evergreen hedge 6' in height |
OCI | Not allowed |
All Other Commercial Districts | Same as for R-18, R-22, R-30, R-35 |
IL, IH | Open storage facing a street shall be screened |
Open Space Districts | Not allowed except for agricultural implements |
(Ord. M-4377 § 2(e), 2022; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
New developments and redevelopments shall provide interior parking lot landscaping per the standards of 20.945.040(I)(3). (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
When revegetation is required. Where natural vegetation has been removed through grading in areas not affected by the landscaping requirements and that are not to be occupied by structures, such areas are to be replanted as set forth in this Section to prevent erosion after construction activities are completed.
Preparation for re-vegetation. Topsoil removed from the surface in preparation for grading and construction is to be stored on or near the sites and protected from erosion while grading operations are underway.
1. Such storage may not be located where it would cause suffocation of root systems of trees intended to be preserved; and
2. After completion of such grading, the topsoil is to be restored to exposed cut and fill embankments or building pads and amended with compost to provide a suitable base for seeding and planting.
Methods of revegetation.
1. Acceptable methods of re-vegetation include replanting with native trees, shrubs, and groundcover and hydro-mulching or the planting of rye grass, barley, or other seed with equivalent germination rates;
a. The use of native trees, shrubs and groundcovers plant materials is encourages to reduce irrigation and maintenance demands;
b. The use of lawn and turf should be minimal. Where lawn or turf grass is to be established, lawn grass seed or other appropriate landscape cover is to be sown at not less than 4 pounds to each 1,000 sq. ft. of land area;
c. Other revegetation methods offering equivalent protection may be approved by the approval authority;
d. Plant materials are to be watered at intervals sufficient to ensure survival and growth; and
e. Employ other erosion control techniques as required in Chapter 14.24 VMC Erosion Control. (Ord. M-4179 § 93, 2016; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Water conservation standards.
1. Applicability. In order to ensure efficient water use in landscaped areas, the following standards shall be applied to all landscaping associated with office, commercial, industrial, institutional, parks and greenways, multiple family residential projects, and commonly-owned and/or maintained areas of single family residential projects.
2. Exemptions. These standards do not apply to landscaping in private areas of single-family projects. Parks, playgrounds, sports fields, golf courses, schools, and cemeteries are exempt from specified turf area limitations where a functional need for turf is established. All other requirements are applicable.
3. Plant selection and use limitation.
a. Minimize the amount of irrigated turf.
b. Turf, high-water-use plantings (e.g. annuals, container plants) and water features (e.g. fountains, pools) shall be considered high-water-uses and shall be limited to not more than 40% of the projects landscaped area if nondrought resistant grass is used, and no more than 50% of the landscaped area if drought resistant grass is used.
c. Plants selected in all areas not identified for turf or high-water-use plantings shall include native vegetation or be well suited to the climate, soils, and topographic conditions of the site, and shall be low water use plants once established.
d. Plants having similar water use shall be grouped together in distinct hydrozones and shall be irrigated with separate irrigation circuits.
e. No turf or high-water-use plants shall be allowed on slopes. Slopes shall be revegetated with native trees, shrubs, and groundcover.
f. No turf or high-water-use plants shall be allowed in areas 8' wide or less except public right-of-way planter strips.
g. No turf shall be installed with Tree, Vegetation, and Soil Protection Areas VMC 20.770.
B. Water efficient landscape (xeriscape) standards.
1. As an alternative to traditional landscaping, the City encourages the use of xeriscape practices, which minimize the need for watering or irrigation. Xeriscape principles can be summarized as follows:
a. Using plants with low moisture requirements;
b. Selecting plants for specific site microclimates that vary according to slope, aspect, soil, and exposure to sun and moisture;
c. Using native, noninvasive, adapted plant species;
d. Minimizing the amount of irrigated turf;
e. Planting and designing slopes to minimize storm water runoff;
f. Use of separate irrigation zones adjusted to plant water requirements and use of drip or trickle irrigation systems.
g. Using mulch in planted areas to control weeds, cool the soil and reduce evaporation; and
h. Emphasizing soil improvement, such as deep tilling, adding organic matter and other amendments based on soil tests.
2. Appropriate plant species. Trees and plants used in xeriscape plantings pursuant to this Section shall:
a. Appropriate for the ecological setting in which they are to be planted;
b. Have noninvasive growth habits;
c. Encourage low maintenance and sustainable landscape design
d. Be commercially available;
e. Shall not be plant material that was collected in the wild; and
f. Be consistent with the purpose and intent of this Section.
3. Native vegetation. Within xeriscape areas, a minimum of 50% native plants shall be used.
4. Prohibited species. The City shall maintain a list of prohibited species, which are invasive or noxious. Where such species already exist, their removal shall be a condition of development approval.
5. Additional planting standards.
a. For xeriscape areas, soil samples shall be analyzed to determine what soil conditioning or soil amendments should be used at the time of planting. Soil conditioning measures shall be adequate for the plant species selected.
b. Trees, shrubs, perennials, perennial grasses and groundcovers shall be located and spaced to accommodate their mature size on the site.
6. Plant replacement. The developer shall maintain xeriscape plantings for a two-year period from the date of planting. Within the two-year period, the developer shall replace or otherwise guarantee any failed plantings:
a. Dead or dying trees or shrubs shall be replaced; and
b. Plantings of perennials, perennial grasses or groundcovers shall be replanted to maintain a maximum 20% mortality rate from the date of planting.
C. Stormwater. Applicants are encouraged to incorporate landscaping into the on-site stormwater treatment system to the greatest extent practicable. (Ord. M-4179 § 94, 2016; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. General. Any development, except individual lots for single family or duplex structures, requiring landscape installation shall require the submission of a landscape development plan. The landscape development plan shall become part of the Site Plan required elsewhere in this Title for the purposes of review, approval, and compliance for any land use development permit, building permit and / or certificate of occupancy.
B. Information Required. Landscape plans shall contain the following information:
1. North arrow, scale, date, title, and name of owner;
2. Accurate site plan (at a scale of 1" = 20' or larger, or as appropriate for the scale of development) showing the location of property lines and their dimensions;
3. Existing and proposed water courses, drainage features, streets, sidewalks, utility lines and easements, and other public or semi-public improvements within or adjacent to the site;
4. Delineation of existing residential structures, if any, on adjacent properties;
5. All existing plant material to be removed or retained and delineation and specification of protection methods for plant materials to be retained;
6. Existing and proposed elevations at sufficient locations of the site to show drainage patterns;
7. Contour lines when the slope exceeds 6%;
8. Existing and proposed buildings and other structures, paved areas, curbs, walks, light standards, signs, fences and screen walls, and other permanent features to be added and/or retained on the site;
9. Calculation of total site area, setback areas, required buffer areas, paved vehicular use areas, required proportional landscape areas, and required plant quantities and types;
10. Location, type, and quantity of any soil amendments;
11. The location, approximate mature size, and type of all plant materials graphically depicted on the plan;
12. Complete description of plant materials shown on the plan, including common and botanical names, quantities, spacing, container or caliper size at installation, and mature height and spread;
13. Irrigation plans showing location and type of all outlets (spray, bubbler, drip, etc.); location and size of water meter or other connection; location, type, and installation details of backflow prevention device; and delineation of each watering zone or circuit; and
14. Landscape areas where xeriscape principles are to be applied shall be clearly delineated in the plan submittal; and native and nonnative species plants should be clearly distinguished. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A certificate from a licensed landscape architect shall be provided verifying that landscaping indicated on the final landscape plan has been installed. (Ord. M-4187 § 4, 2016)
The purpose of this chapter is to provide additional approval criteria and development standards for land divisions with narrow lots in order to: 1) eliminate conflicts between the design and location of driveways with public and private utilities, on-street parking and other common features such as street trees, street lights and signs, fire hydrants, common mailboxes, etc.; 2) provide for adequate guest parking; 3) ensure adequate access for solid waste and recycling collection vehicles; 4) minimize the dominance of garages on narrow lots; and 5) provide incentives for lots which utilize alleys for access. (Ord. M-3778, Added, 12/04/2006, Sec 2)
The approval criteria and development standards of this chapter shall apply to any residential short subdivision or subdivision, including infill development, which has one or more narrow lots, defined as a lot with less than 40 feet in width, exclusive of flag lots. Compliance with applicable standards shall be determined at the time of preliminary plat approval, in accordance with VMC 20.320, Subdivisions. (Ord. M-3778, Added, 12/04/2006, Sec 2)
Approval criteria. In order for the City to grant approval of a preliminary short subdivision or subdivision, the applicant shall demonstrate compliance with the following criteria, which shall be in addition to the preliminary subdivision approval criteria of VMC 20.320.040 A-G:
A. Conflicts on narrow lots shall be eliminated. The development has been designed to eliminate conflicts between on-site and off-site improvements and features associated with narrow lots. Specifically, the location, size, and design of features including driveways, public and private utilities (water, fire hydrants, sewer, roof infiltration, gas, cable, phone, electricity, etc.), on-street parking spaces, street trees, existing trees, light poles, common mailboxes, street signs, etc., shall be considered in the design of the development and coordinated to eliminate conflicts with one another and meet minimum spacing requirements.
B. Adequate guest parking shall be provided. The development has been designed to provide for at least one guest parking space for every three narrow lots in the development. Such spaces may be located on-street (on local access or loop classification roadways only) or in common parking areas subject to the development standards of 20.927.040A2.
C. Solid waste and recycling collection and access shall be provided. The development shall be designed to provide for safe access and maneuvering by solid waste and recycling collection vehicles to designated collection points for each lot. (Ord. M-3778, Added, 12/04/2006, Sec 2)
A. Implementation of Performance Standards. Various design options may be proposed to address the approval criteria of VMC 20.927.030(A) through (C). For example, the use of alleys, narrow driveways, or shared driveways – either separately or in combination – are considered to be effective solutions to many identified conflicts. In addressing the above criteria, the following development standards shall apply:
1. On-site and off-site improvements plan required. A development plan that demonstrates that utilities, driveways, street trees, etc., have been located and designed to minimize conflicts with one another shall be submitted with the preliminary land division application and incorporated into the civil engineering plan set. Such plan shall, at a minimum, show all of the following features:
a. Proposed location and width of streets, sidewalks, and landscape strips;
b. Proposed location, species, and size of required street trees;
c. Proposed guest parking spaces as required by VMC 20.927.030(B) and subsection (A)(2) of this section;
d. Proposed location of other infrastructure including light poles, fire hydrants, and community mailboxes (may be reserved areas) and existing overhead lines;
e. Proposed location and width of driveways (narrow lots only);
f. Proposed location of public water line, water meter, and sewer line to serve each narrow lot;
g. Proposed location and dimensions of areas reserved on each narrow lot for private utilities (phone, cable, gas, electric, etc.) and roof infiltration systems;
2. Standards for guest parking in common areas.
a. Common areas reserved for guest parking shall have no more than five parking stalls in each area unless applicant demonstrates required parking cannot otherwise be provided.
b. Common guest parking areas shall be improved to city parking lot standards including a permanent surface, striping, curbing, three-foot-tall screening, and treatment of stormwater runoff. Use of pervious paving is encouraged.
c. Such spaces may be designed to allow for backing movements directly into local access or loop streets only.
d. Common parking areas shall be maintained by a homeowners’ association according to a maintenance agreement to be recorded with the plat.
3. Standards for solid waste and recycling access and collection.
a. An access plan for solid waste and recycling collection service to all lots in the development shall be submitted with the land division application.
b. The access and collection plan shall show a designated collection point for each lot or solid waste enclosure areas and the ability of collection vehicles to maneuver safely to all points of collection.
c. All circulation and turnaround designs must meet the requirements of VMC 11.80.070 and the Transportation Standard Details and be feasible using city-provided solid waste truck turning modeling templates and truck specifications. Collection vehicles shall be able to circulate the development and service receptacles with minimal backing required.
d. Where collection is not feasible on each lot, a designated common collection point to serve up to four lots, located no further than 150 feet from any lot it serves, may be provided. Common collection points shall be shown on the solid waste and recycling plan, and sized to accommodate the carts and bins associated with the city’s garbage, yard debris and recycling collection system. System specifics may be obtained from the city’s solid waste services department.
e. Collection vehicle turnaround must be provided in cases where more than four lots are sharing a grouped set-out or if the distance from the grouped set-out to a lot is greater than 150 feet.
f. Designated collection points shall be located adjacent to alleys or streets but shall not obstruct sidewalks, bike lanes, or vision clearance triangles.
g. Collection points shall be illustrated on plans and show footprints of all intended carts using dimensions from city-provided solid waste receptacle standards.
h. Each lot must have storage space outside of the right-of-way for carts when not set out for collection day.
4. Standards for alleys and lots with alley access. Lots with access from side or rear alleys are highly effective in addressing conflicts at the front street. Where provided, alleys and lots served by alleys shall meet the following standards:
a. Alleys shall consist of 16 feet paved width within a 20-foot public right-of-way or private easement, and shall be constructed in accordance with approved city standards. Width of alleys designated as fire apparatus access lanes shall be as approved by the fire marshal.
b. All lots adjacent to an alley, existing or proposed, shall provide access to the garage or parking space from the alley, not the adjacent street. Residences with access from alleys shall be oriented to face the public or private street, not the alley.
c. Alleys shall connect with a public or private street at both ends, unless otherwise approved by the transportation manager.
d. Maintenance of private alleys shall be the responsibility of the homeowner’s association, and a maintenance agreement shall be recorded with the plat.
e. Subdivisions which provide access from alleys to at least 50 percent of lots shall be eligible for modifications to certain development standards, as specified in VMC 20.927.050.
5. Shared driveways. Where provided for narrow lots, shared driveways shall meet the following requirements:
a. Shared driveways serving two adjacent lots shall be no wider than 30 feet, measured at the driveway throat, unless the applicant demonstrates on the development plan that a wider driveway will not result in conflicts.
b. Shared driveways which provide access to more than two lots shall be no wider than 18 feet, measured at the driveway throat, and shall be within a 20-foot minimum wide easement.
c. Only one curb cut is permitted per shared driveway.
d. Shared driveways shall be constructed in accordance with approved shared driveway standards.
e. Garages accessed from shared driveways shall be either single-car width and located no closer to the street than the front wall (not porch) of the residence or, if wider than a single-car garage, set back at least five feet from the front wall (not porch) of the residence.
6. Narrow driveways. Where provided for a narrow lot, narrow driveways shall meet the following requirements:
a. Narrow driveways shall be no wider than 10 feet measured at the driveway throat, unless the applicant demonstrates on the development plan that a wider driveway will not result in conflicts.
b. Where possible, narrow driveways on adjoining lots shall be grouped in close proximity to create space along the frontage for parking, trees, utilities, etc.
c. Narrow driveways shall be constructed in accordance with adopted narrow driveway standards.
d. Garages accessed from narrow driveways shall be either single-car width and located no closer to the street than the front wall (not porch) of the residence or, if wider than a single-car garage, set back at least five feet from the front wall (not porch) of the residence. (Ord. M-4402 § 3(BB), 2023; Ord. M-3778 § 2, 2006)
Any development subject to this chapter which provides alley access to at least 50 percent of the total number of lots shall qualify for the following modifications to development standards:
A. The development plan required by Section 20.927.040A1 is not required to include items d-g.
B. The maximum lot coverage may be increased as follows:
1. In lower density residential districts, maximum lot coverage shall be 55%.
2. In higher density residential districts, maximum lot coverage shall be 65%.
C. If an alley is to be privately-owned within a public easement, the area which extends across individual lots may be included in the minimum required lot area and counted when calculating maximum lot coverage.
D. For lots which obtain access from a rear alley, decks constructed above the driveway shall not be counted toward the maximum lot coverage.
E. If an alley is to be publicly-owned, the alley area may be subtracted from the overall area used to calculate required on-site tree density.
F. Minimum setbacks may be reduced as follows:
1. No additional side or rear setback is required for increase in building height above 20'.
2. Minimum rear yard setback from edge of alley pavement to garage or carport may be either 4' or at least 18'. Uncovered parking spaces may be set back 4' from the edge of the alley pavement.
3. Covered porches which consume at least 40% of the front width of the residence may encroach up to 6 feet into the required front setback.
G. Large species street trees (trees maturing at 45' in height listed on the City’s Street Tree Selection List) may substitute for a portion of required on-site tree density. If the minimum on-site tree density pursuant to VMC 20.770.080 cannot be met either on individual lots or in a common tract, the Planning Official may allow a .5 tree unit credit for every large street tree if provided within 8-foot wide minimum landscape strips or planter areas throughout the development.
H. Deciduous trees of 2" minimum caliper that are planted in an alley right-of-way or alley easement may be counted toward the minimum required on-site tree density.
I. Alternative surface water treatment. The Public Works Director may approve alternative methods for treatment and disposal of surface water from alleys, as appropriate, including: the use of pervious paving, or other BMP’s approved by the Western Washington Stormwater Manual.
J. Streets may be constructed to one of the approved narrow lot neighborhood street standards of VMC Title 11, as approved by the Transportation Manager. (Ord. M-3778, Added, 12/04/2006, Sec 2)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. It is the purpose and intent of this chapter to permit legal nonconforming lots, structures and uses to continue but to prohibit or limit the enlargement, expansion or extension of such uses. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Planning Official’s determination. The Planning Official shall make a determination regarding the legal status of a nonconforming use by means of a Type I procedure using the following criteria:
1. Proof that the use was permitted at the time it was established, by any of the following:
a. Copies of building and/or land use permits issued at the time the use was established;
b. Copies of zoning code provisions and/or maps in force at the time the use was established;
c. Demonstration that the use was established before the first development code for the community was adopted.
2. Proof that the use has been maintained over time. This includes copies of one or more of the following for every year from the time the use was established until the current year. Standard evidence that the use has been maintained over time includes:
a. Utility bills;
b. Income tax records;
c. Business licenses;
d. Listings in telephone, business and Polk directories;
e. Advertisements in dated publications, e.g., trade magazines; and/or
f. Building, land use or development permits.
B. Other regulations affecting nonconforming uses. The following regulations apply to all nonconforming uses described in this chapter:
1. Ownership: The status of a nonconforming use is not affected by changes in ownership.
2. Change to a conforming use: A nonconforming use may be changed to a conforming use upon review and approval by the Planning Official. Once a conforming use occupies the site, the nonconforming rights are lost and the nonconforming use may not be re-established.
3. Change to a conditional use: A nonconforming use may be changed to a conditional use permitted in the underlying zone if approved through a conditional use review. Once a conditional use occupies the site, the nonconforming rights are lost and a nonconforming use may not be re-established.
C. Uses or structures caused to be nonconforming through adoption of a master plan or subarea pursuant to this title may be considered as conforming if they are explicitly so designated as conforming in the approved master or subarea plan. (Ord. M-4103 § 4, 11/14/2014; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Development of nonconforming lots of record. If on the effective date of this title, a lot does not meet the lot size requirements of the applicable zoning district in which the property is located, the lot may:
1. Be occupied by any use permitted outright in a commercial zoning district, if the lot is located within a commercial zoning district; or
2. Be occupied by a single-family residential unit and accessory structures if the lot is located in a residential zoning district.
B. Nonconforming development. Where a lawful structure and/or improvement exists at the effective date of this chapter that could not be built under the terms of this title, such structure and/or improvement may be continued so long as it remains otherwise lawful, subject to the following provisions:
1. The nonconforming structure and/or improvement may not be enlarged or altered in a way which increases its nonconformity. However, any structure and/or improvement or portion thereof may be enlarged or altered in a way that complies with the requirements of this title or will decrease its nonconformity; or
2. The nonconforming structure and/or improvement may be rebuilt within its original footprint if it is destroyed by fire or other calamity, provided that an application to rebuild the structure must be filed within one year of the destruction.
3. Should such a structure and/or improvement be moved for any reason for any distance whatever, it shall thereafter conform to the regulations for the zoning district in which it is located after it is moved.
4. Exception: Legally-established detached accessory structures containing conforming uses in a single family residential districts may be structurally altered provided all of the following criteria are met:
a. Such addition shall not increase the gross floor area of the original accessory structure by more than 25%;
b. The addition shall not increase the structure’s nonconformity as it relates to setbacks or distance from main structure (e.g. structure may not encroach into noncompliant setback areas further);
c. The height of the structure shall not be increased;
d. The addition shall meet minimum building and fire codes.
e. The addition shall be in conformance with all other development requirements.
C. Nonconforming uses. A nonconforming use may be continued so long as it remains otherwise lawful, subject to the following provisions:
1. Any nonconforming use may be extended throughout any existing parts of a building which were designed for such use at the time of adoption or amendment of this title, but no such use shall be extended to occupy any land outside such building;
2. When a nonconforming use is discontinued or abandoned for one year, the use shall not thereafter be used except in full conformity with all regulations of the zoning district in which it is located. For purposes of this section, a use shall be deemed to be discontinued or abandoned upon the occurrence of the first of any of the following events:
a. On the date when the structure or premises is vacated;
b. On the date the use ceases to be actively involved in the sale of merchandise or the provision of services;
c. On the date of termination of any lease or contract under which the nonconforming use has occupied the premises; or
d. On the date a request for final reading of water and power meters is made to the applicable utility districts.
D. Where a nonconforming use is discontinued or abandoned for one year, the nonconforming use status of the land shall be eliminated.
E. Provisions of subsection (2)(a) above shall not be interpreted as granting an owner of a nonconforming use a vested right. (Ord. M-4066 § 6, 12/16/2013; Effective 01/16/2014; Ord. M-3840 § 44, 08/06/2007; Ord. M-3701 § 32, 05/02/2005; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
A. Routine repairs and maintenance permitted. On any nonconforming structure or portion of a structure containing a nonconforming situation, normal repairs, or replacement of roofs, nonbearing walls, fixtures, wiring or plumbing may be performed in a manner that does not conflict with the other provisions of this chapter.
B. Restoration to safe condition permitted. Nothing in this Title prevents the strengthening or restoring to a safe condition of any building or part thereof declared to be unsafe by any official charged with protecting the public safety, upon order of such official. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that any development, redevelopment, or use of a property will have minimal adverse off-site impacts, both during and after construction. This is accomplished by ensuring that property owners comply with existing federal, state or city rules and regulations, where applicable, and, in the absence of such regulations, establishing clear and objective standards to govern the acceptable level of these impacts as measured at the property line. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Compliance with applicable state and federal regulations. In addition to the regulations adopted in this chapter, each use, activity or operation within the City of Vancouver shall comply with the applicable federal and state regulations pertaining to noise, odor and discharge of matter into the atmosphere, or ground, sewer system, water bodies, or onto properties.
B. Evidence of compliance. In the case of new developments or modifications to existing developments, Planning Official may require submission of evidence demonstrating compliance with federal, state and local regulations and copies of necessary permits, and may impose conditions as necessary to ensure compliance with this chapter. In the case of existing uses, the Code Enforcement Official, upon receipt of a complaint and following an investigation into the complaint which confirms a violation, may impose conditions as necessary to ensure compliance with such regulations.
C. Continuing obligation. Continued compliance with this chapter, as well as federal, state and local regulations shall be the responsibility of the property owner and operator. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Environmental Noise. Unless otherwise exempted by WAC 173-60-050, no development or use may create noise impacts, measured at the property line of the receiving property that exceed the maximum environmental noise levels established by WAC 173-60-050 listed in Table 20.935.030-1 below:
Table 20.935.030-1. Maximum Permissible Noise Levels
Noise Source | Receiving Property | ||
Residential | Commercial | Industrial | |
Residential | 55 dBA1 | 57 dBA | 60 dBA |
Commercial | 57 | 60 | 65 |
Industrial | 60 | 65 | 70 |
1Applicable to Home Occupation related activities only.
1. The above maximum noise levels shall be reduced by 10 dBAs between the hours of 10 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. for the receiving property. Also, at any hour of the day or night the applicable noise limitations above may be exceeded for any receiving property by no more than 5 dBA for a total of 15 minutes in any one-hour period, or 10 dBA for a total of 5 minutes in any one-hour period, or 15 dBA for a total of 1.5 minutes in any one-hour period.
2. Where potential noise impacts to adjacent uses from a proposed land use or development activity are identified, measures to mitigate such impacts may be imposed upon the land use or activity through the applicable review process, and may include: construction of a sound wall or fence; reorientation of buildings, parking and loading areas; and/or placement of berms and landscaping.
3. Sound walls shall meet the design standards of VMC 20.912.080 Fences and Walls.
4. Outdoor construction activity, including construction staging, shall occur no earlier than 7 a.m. and no later than 8 p.m., seven days a week.
5. Due to the negative effect excessive levels of environmental noise have upon the public health, safety and welfare, the noise standards set out in Table 20.935-1 are intended to apply to all uses in existence on the date of adoption of this ordinance and no right to maintain a use not in conformance with those standards shall exist.
B. Off-site drainage. No property may be graded, filled, or otherwise altered in a way that allows stormwater runoff to flow onto another property. All stormwater runoff shall be contained on-site and directed to an approved stormwater facility (such as an infiltration system) unless otherwise approved by the City, and such facility shall be maintained in proper working condition.
C. Smoke and particulate matter. No development or use may create air emissions that exceed the legal limits established by the Southwest Clean Air Agency(SWCAA).
D. Light and glare. No development or use shall create off-site glare impacts from direct or reflected light sources. For new developments, the Planning Official may impose conditions which minimize potential off-site light and glare impacts, such as placement of light sources away from adjacent properties, requiring shields on lights, or reducing the number of lights to the minimum needed for safety and security. For existing sources of glare, the Code Enforcement Supervisor may require sources of glare to be shielded or redirected to minimize off-site glare. Due to the negative effect off-site light and glare have upon the public health, safety and welfare, the prohibition on off-site light and glare is intended to apply to all uses in existence on the date of adoption of this ordinance and no right to maintain a use creating off-site light and glare impacts shall exist.
E. Vibration. No development or use shall create off-site vibration impacts, discernible without instruments at the property line of the affected use. (Ord. M-3931 § 31, 11/02/2009; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
The purpose of on-site density transfer regulations is to provide an incentive to property owners for encouraging the protection, preservation and enhancement of significant sensitive lands and cultural resources, while maintaining the overall density of an underlying zoning district. The provisions of this chapter provide that sensitive resource areas may be set aside from development, while allowing a portion of the density, otherwise allowed upon the sensitive or cultural area, to be transferred to the developable (nonsensitive) portion of the site. Parcels where sensitive resources consist of more than 50% of the gross parcel area may have such areas deducted from the minimum required density calculations. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Applicability of provisions. The provisions of this chapter are discretionary, and may be applied where the Planning Official determines that such application to a particular land division will provide protection, preservation or enhancement of significant sensitive or cultural resources. The provisions of this chapter will not be applied where such application is inconsistent with these purposes, or presents a threat to health or safety. The provisions of this chapter shall not be construed to create a vested right or interest.
B. For sensitive resources. On-Site Density Transfer may be applied to land divisions pursuant to Chapters 20.320 VMC, Subdivisions, upon properties within the Low-Density Residential Zoning Districts, as governed by Chapter 20.410 VMC, where the presence of sensitive resources, as defined in Chapter 20.150 VMC, Definitions, limit the area available for development. For purposes of the density transfer, the sensitive resource area(s) set aside pursuant to this chapter must be equal to or greater than the minimum lot size for the underlying zone, and the nonsensitive portion of the property must be able to accommodate more dense development. For example, if the subject property is zoned R-6, then the amount of sensitive resource area must be 7,500 square feet or more.
C. Provisions and land divisions. When the provisions of this chapter are applied concurrently with land division pursuant to Chapter 20.320 VMC, Subdivisions, the minimum lot size provisions of Section 20.410.050(B) VMC are not applicable, and are replaced by the provisions of this chapter. The maximum density of the development, as applied to the entire subject property, shall not be increased beyond that of the underlying zone.
D. Exemption. The provisions in this chapter do not apply to planned developments that are regulated by Chapter 20.260 VMC. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Required pre-application conference. Requests for on-site density transfer shall require a pre-application conference, as governed by Section 20.210.080 VMC.
B. Requirements for a subdivision application. Requests for on-site density transfer shall accompany a subdivision application, and the informational requirements listed below must be submitted in addition to those required under Chapters 20.320 VMC, Subdivisions, to consider the application technically complete:
1. A delineation of all sensitive resource areas to be used in the calculation of density credit, summed in square feet, and indicated on the preliminary plat map.
2. The preliminary plat shall indicate the area in square feet of each lot proposed.
3. The preliminary plat shall indicate the amount of adjustment requested to the dimensional requirements of the road standards, setbacks, or lot configuration and indicate which lots require adjustment.
4. Calculations of total developable land (TDL); and gross density, used to determine the maximum number of lots allowed.
5. A written narrative, which describes how the use of on-site density transfer will protect, preserve or enhance sensitive or cultural resource areas and achieve density. The narrative shall include proposed methods for protection of sensitive resources, and cite the development regulations that support the request.
C. Review for completeness. The determination whether to apply the provisions of this chapter will be issued concurrent with the determination that an application is fully-complete, as governed by Section 20.210.100 VMC.
D. Determination of compliance. Compliance with this chapter shall be considered as findings in the determination whether a plat application complies with the State Subdivision Statute 58.17 RCW, City of Vancouver’s Comprehensive Plan, and Chapter 30.320 VMC Subdivisions. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. For sensitive or cultural resources. Where the provisions of this chapter apply, the boundaries of the sensitive or cultural resource(s) area must be delineated, calculated in square feet, and shown on the plat map submitted with the application for land division. The delineation must be adequately marked in the field, so that it may be verified by Planning Official
B. For density adjustments. The extent of any density adjustment requested under the provisions of this chapter, including minimum lot size, dimensional standards, minimum number of lots, and modification to the street standards, shall be accurately described in the preliminary plat application.
C. Guarantees. When the provisions of this chapter are applied concurrent with land division pursuant to Chapters 20.320 VMC, Subdivisions, the property owner will be required to grant to the City adequate guarantees to assure the protection, preservation or enhancement of the identified sensitive or cultural resource areas. Such guarantees may include, but are not limited to: conservation covenants or easements; mitigation plans; designation of open space areas to be held in common ownership; public dedications or easements; and, special setbacks from protected resources. Any protection measures proposed or required as conditions of the preliminary plat shall be recorded with the final plat.
D. Minimum lot size and dimensions. The application of this chapter shall not result in the creation of any single lot with a gross area that is less than 80% of the minimum lot size of the underlying zoning designation, nor shall any lot dimension (width, depth) be created that is less than 80% of the minimum required dimension.
E. For road modifications. Road standard modifications and reductions to setbacks or dimensional standards may be applied concurrent with application of this chapter, and do not require a separate development application. Provided that, such adjustment to development standards will be limited to the extent that such adjustments are available pursuant to street standard modifications, as governed by Section 20.950.180(K) VMC and Minor A Variances, as regulated by Chapter 20.270 VMC, Variances. Further provided that reductions to setback or dimensional standards resulting from the application of the provisions of this chapter shall not be used in conjunction with other provisions of this Code for the purposes of cumulative reduction in setback or dimensional standards that exceeds the reduction limitation set forth in Section (D) above.
F. Exception to Density Transfer Requirement. Where parcels contain sensitive resource areas equal to or greater than 50% of the gross parcel area, the minimum required density may, at the applicant’s option, be based on the net buildable area instead of the gross parcel area. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Required calculations for transfer. In applying On-Site Density Transfer, the gross density of the site’s sensitive resource area may be transferred to the developable portion of the property, or, for parcels with over 50% in sensitive resource area, deducted from the minimum required density, as allowed in Section 20.940.040(F) above. The minimum area for those lots proposed on the developable portion may be reduced to no less than 80% of the minimum lot size for the underlying zone. For example, proposed lots in the R-6 Zoning District, where the minimum lot size is 7,500 square feet minimum area, could be reduced to 6,000 square feet.
1. The total acreage of the subject property shall be divided by the minimum lot size of the underlying zoning district, and the result shall be the gross density. The gross density figure shall then be rounded down to the nearest whole number. The rounded gross density calculation shall be the maximum number of lots that may be located on the Total Developable Land (TDL), except as limited by the reduction in lot area as described above.
2. The applicant may use lot size reduction, adjustment to lot size dimensions or other development standards, within the limits described in Section 20.940.040(D) and (E) VMC above to develop the number of lots allowed under the provisions of this chapter. The number of lots allowed on the TDL as a result of On-Site Density Transfer may not be increased above gross density.
Example: Total Acreage of Parcel: 2 acres (43,560 sq. ft./acre = 87,120)
Sensitive area: 10,000 sq. ft.
Zoning Designation R-6 (7,500 sq. ft. minimum lot size)
87,120/7,500=11.62
2 acres = Gross Density: 11.62 (11 lots may be developed)
7,500 sq. ft. min. lot size
Total Acreage of Parcel minus Sensitive Area equals Total Developable Area:
(87,120 sq. ft.) (10,000 sq. ft.) (77,120 sq. ft.)
Up to 11 lots @ 6,000 sq. ft. each, with lot size reduction of no more than 20% available via On-Site Density Transfer, may be developed on the Total Developable Area. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
The purpose of these standards is to provide for safe and complete connections to the transportation system, and safe on-site circulation for motorists, bicyclists and pedestrians. In addition, these standards are intended to provide for adequate vehicle parking with appropriate landscaping. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. General. When land is used for motor vehicle and/or bicycle parking, the provisions of this chapter shall apply unless otherwise noted.
B. Types of parking. For the purposes of this chapter, there are three types of parking:
1. Accessory parking is parking associated with a specific development that is reserved for the use of the customers, residents, employees, students and/or visitors associated with the development. Accessory parking shall be subject to the minimum vehicle parking ratios contained in Table 20.945.070-2 and all of the other design and development standards in this chapter.
2. Non-Accessory Parking, which is any private or public vehicle and bicycle parking, either paid or free, which is not accessory to a specific development, including public and private parking structures and lots; transit park-and-ride lots; and free-standing fleet vehicle parking lots, per the definition in Section 20.160.020 VMC. Non-accessory parking shall be subject to all of the design and development standards in this chapter but exempt from the minimum parking ratios contained in Table 20.945.070-2.
3. Valet Parking. The Planning Official may approve valet parking or stacked parking to meet a portion of the on-site parking requirement as appropriate for the use.
C. New construction. Prior to occupancy of a new structure within any zoning district, off-street vehicle parking shall be provided in accordance with Section 20.945.070 VMC.
D. Expansion of existing use. Prior to occupancy of an enlargement of a structure which increases the on-site vehicle parking requirements, off-street vehicle parking shall be provided in accordance with Section 20.945.070 VMC subject to the following:
1. The number of required vehicle parking and loading spaces shall be based only on floor area or capacity of such enlargement using the minimum parking ratios contained in Table 20.945.070-2.
2. If the minimum number of vehicle parking spaces required for the enlargement added to the existing on-site parking supply falls short of the minimum number of vehicle parking spaces required for the project as a whole, the applicant shall provide additional spaces to bring the total supply up to the minimum required.
3. If the minimum number of vehicle parking spaces required for the enlargement added to the existing on-site development exceed the minimum number of vehicle parking spaces required for the whole project, the applicant may reduce the additional number of spaces provided, providing that the total supply still meets the minimum required.
E. Change of use. When an existing structure is changed from one use to another use as listed in Chapter 20.160 VMC, the following provisions shall apply:
1. If the parking requirements for each use are the same, no additional vehicle parking shall be required.
2. Where a change results in an intensification of use in terms of the number of vehicle parking spaces required, additional vehicle parking spaces shall be provided in an amount equal to the difference between the minimum number of spaces required for the existing use and the minimum number of spaces required for the more intensive use; unless there is an excess of vehicle parking on the site to accommodate the difference.
3. Where the change results in a decrease in intensity of use, the applicant may physically eliminate excess vehicle parking spaces in an amount equal to the difference between the minimum number of spaces required for the existing use and the minimum number of spaces required for the less intensive use. An applicant may request approval to reduce the number of excess spaces on the site by means of a Type I procedure.
F. Availability. The required minimum vehicle parking shall:
1. Be available for the parking of operable passenger vehicles of residents, patrons and employees only;
2. For nonresidential uses, it shall not be used for storage of vehicles or materials, or for fleet parking used in conduct of the business or use during regular business hours; and
3. Not be rented, leased or assigned to any other person or organization, unless as part of a joint parking agreement per Section 20.945.030(B) VMC. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Location of accessory vehicle parking in relation to the primary use. The location of off-street parking will be as follows:
1. Whenever possible, the required accessory parking shall be located on the same site as the primary use to which it is accessory.
2. When it is not feasible to locate all or part of the minimum accessory parking on the same site, the following shall apply:
a. Off-street accessory parking spaces for detached and attached single-family and duplex dwellings shall be located on the same lot with the dwelling(s), unless otherwise approved as part of a planned development, per Chapter 20.260 VMC.
b. Off-street accessory parking for multi-family dwellings shall be located no more than 300' from the building that they serve.
c. Off-street accessory parking lots for all other uses shall be located no further than 300' from the building or use that they are required to serve, measured in a straight line from the building with the following exceptions:
1. Commercial, institutional and industrial uses which require more than 40 parking spaces may provide for the spaces in excess of the required first 20 spaces up to a distance of 500' from the primary site, except that marine-related industrial uses such as Ports may locate all parking not associated with an office up to 1,000' from the use it is intended to serve;
2. Parks and recreational trails, where no maximum distance requirements are established.
3. Primary uses jointly using one or more parking facilities, as provided for in Subsection (B) below shall be required to comply with the requirements in Subsection (2)(a-c) above.
B. Joint parking. By means of a Type I procedure, as governed by Section 20.210.040 VMC, owners of two or more uses with legally established parking, may agree to utilize jointly the same parking and loading spaces on one or more lots when the peak hours of operation of the uses do not overlap, subject to the following:
1. The joint parking facility(ies) shall contain the same number of vehicle parking spaces required by the use which requires the greatest amount of parking per Section 20.945.070 VMC;
2. Satisfactory legal evidence shall be presented to the Planning Official in the form of deeds, leases or contracts to establish the joint use and be recorded with the Clark County Auditor’s Office against all properties involved;
3. If a joint use arrangement is subsequently terminated, or if the uses change, the requirements of this title shall apply to each use separately.
C. Parking in mixed-use projects.
1. Mixed-use projects shall include either uses that are contained in a building (vertical mixed-use) or in a group of single-purpose buildings that share a single parking facility (horizontal mixed-use).
2. The required minimum vehicle parking shall be determined using the following formula.
a. Primary use, i.e., that with the largest parking demand within the development, at 100% of the minimum vehicle parking required for that use in Section 20.945.070 VMC;
b. Secondary use, i.e., that with the second largest parking demand within the development, at 90% of the vehicle parking required for that use in Section 20.945.070 VMC;
c. Subsequent use or uses, at 80% of the vehicle parking required for that use(s) in Section 20.945.070 VMC.
D. Disabled-accessible parking and access. All parking areas and accessible routes of travel for the disabled shall comply with the standards of the State of Washington and the City of Vancouver applicable building code. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Review Authority. Parking lot design and drainage shall be subject to review and approval of the City Transportation Manager.
B. Maintenance of parking areas. All parking lots shall be kept clean and in good repair at all times. Breaks in paved surfaces shall be repaired promptly. Broken or splintered wheel stops shall be replaced so that their function will not be impaired.
C. All signing and striping, including that for private parking lots, shall conform to the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). Individual spaces shall be marked with painted stripes.
D. Location. Parking spaces shall not be permitted in any setback except as otherwise specified in this title. For single-family and duplex dwellings, vehicle, vessel, recreational vehicle trailer parking is permitted in the front yard setback provided it is: located on a legally established driveway; located out of sight triangles as per Chapter 20.895 VMC; does not extend into city right-of-way; and is currently licensed and registered. Parking of motor homes, trailers, recreational vehicles and boats is allowed in one side or rear setback on an impervious surface and served by a paved driveway. Such parking must be screened from adjoining properties by a six-foot sight-obscuring fence or hedge.
E. No parking space shall be located where backing maneuvers from such a space would interfere with traffic flow to/from a public street to the parking area, generally within 20' of a circulation aisle-way near a public street access point.
F. Driveways. Driveways which provide access to off-street parking or loading from public streets shall comply with the following:
1. Driveways from the street to off-street parking or loading areas shall be designed and constructed to facilitate the flow of traffic and provide maximum safety for pedestrians. At a minimum all driveways shall meet arterial access spacing standards; on arterial roadways shared driveways and cross-access easements may be required to improve arterial efficiency and safety consistent with access management practices detailed in NCHRP Report 420.
2. Where driveways are gated, even temporarily, the driveway approach shall be designed such that vehicles approaching or leaving the gated drive can queue to enter/exit the traffic stream without blocking the sidewalk or the street traffic, and shall not impede internal site circulation. Design of gated driveways shall be subject to review and approval by the City Transportation Manager.
3. Driveways shall be improved with a permanent surface including but not limited to asphalt, concrete, brick or masonry or other material approved by the Planning Official. Applicants are encouraged to use City and Department of Ecology alternative paving Best Management Practices to enhance on-site water quality where appropriate based on anticipated use.
4. Except for single-family and duplex residences, groups of more than two parking spaces shall be served by a driveway so that no backing movements or other maneuvering within a street or other public right-of-way is necessary.
5. Loading/unloading driveways. If an on-site drop-off is provided, the driveway shall be designed for continuous forward flow of passenger vehicles.
G. On-site vehicle stacking for drive-through use.
1. All uses providing drive-through services as defined by this chapter shall provide a stacking lane on the same site for inbound vehicles as noted in Table 20.945-1. Stacking lane requirements shall be determined through the review process, be based upon an approved traffic study and may either exceed or fall below the guidelines detailed in Table 20.945.040-1.
Table 20.945.040-1 Stacking Lane Guidelines for Uses With Drive-Through Windows | |
|---|---|
Use | Stacking Lane Guideline |
Drive-in banks | 5 spaces per service terminal |
Automated teller | 50'/service terminal machines |
Drive-in cleaners, repair services | 50' |
Drive-in restaurants | 180' |
Mechanical car washes | 3 spaces per washing unit |
Parking facilities | |
Free-flow entry | 1 space per entry driveway |
Ticket dispense entry | 2 spaces per entry driveway |
Manual ticket dispensing | 100'/entry driveway |
Attendant parking | 100' |
Vehicle fuel sales | 3 spaces per pump |
1Minimum length of one space = 18 feet
2. Stacking lanes must be designed so that they do not interfere with parking and vehicle, pedestrian and bicycle circulation. Stacking lanes for the purpose of selling food must provide at least one clearly marked parking space per service window for the use of vehicles waiting for an order to be filled.
3. No portion of a stacking lane shall be located in a setback except at the points of connection between the site and public or private streets.
H. Pedestrian access, circulation and connections. The following standards apply to multi-family, commercial, industrial and institutional uses in all zones:
1. The applicant shall extend pedestrian circulation routes to sidewalks and transit stops along streets abutting the site, to pedestrian facilities that extend to the edge of the site from off-site, and to the edge of the site in the direction of existing, approved or proposed off-site pedestrian and transit facilities.
2. Pedestrian circulation routes shall also connect structures and uses on the site, such as buildings, vehicle and bicycle parking areas, children’s play areas, required outdoor areas, open spaces, plazas, resting areas and viewpoints.
3. To the extent practicable, the pedestrian circulation system shall be designed to minimize the distance a pedestrian needs to walk between typical origins and destinations of and off the site, including transit stops, public sidewalks and building entrances. Circuitous routes generally should be avoided except for an appropriate purpose given the use or setting.
4. Where pedestrian or bicycle routes cross access, maneuvering, parking or loading areas, the crossing must be clearly identified by using elevation changes, speed bumps, a different paving material, and other method that effectively alerts drivers, pedestrians and cyclists of the location and nature of the crossing. Striping is strongly discouraged as the only method of identification of pedestrian crossings. When striping is used, it must be continuously maintained in perpetuity in an effective manner by the property owner.
5. Where a pedestrian or bicycle route is parallel and adjacent to an auto travel lane or parking area, the pedestrian or bicycle route must be safely separated from the auto travel lane by using a raised path, a raised curb, bollards, landscaping or other physical barrier.
6. Lighting. The on-site pedestrian circulation system must be lighted to a level of 0.5 foot candle, except for handicapped accessible areas which must be lighted to 1.0 foot candle. Such lighting shall be directed in a manner to prevent glare on nearby residential areas.
7. Pedestrian route dimensions. In all commercial zones, the primary pedestrian connection between the main entrance and the fronting arterial shall be a minimum of 8' unobstructed width. All other pedestrian connections shall be a minimum of 6' unobstructed width. The Planning Official may modify these standards for minor expansions of existing uses that face site-specific challenges.
8. Required pedestrian circulation routes shall be improved with an asphalt, concrete or other approved all-weather surface; provided, pedestrian circulation routes through recreational or open space areas may be improved with a material consistent with their purpose and the characteristics of their location.
9. Connections. The pedestrian system must be connected to site and adjacent streets and nearby transit stops. The pedestrian system must also connect public open space or parks, commercial, office and institutional developments when existing development does not preclude such connection. Development patterns must not preclude eventual site-to-site connections, even if an adjacent site is not planned for development at the time of the applicant’s development. Connections between buildings and the street shall be no greater than 200' apart.
I. Parking lot landscaping.
1. Purpose. The following landscaping standards are intended to improve and soften the appearance of parking areas; reduce the visual impact of parking areas from sidewalks, streets, and especially from adjacent residential zones; shade and cool parking areas; reduce the amount and rate of stormwater runoff from vehicle areas; and improve air quality.
2. Perimeter Landscaping. Any off-street parking area, other than for a single-family or duplex dwelling, shall be effectively screened by a sight-obscuring fence, wall or evergreen planting on each side which adjoins property situated in a residential zone, the premises of any school or like institution, or a public or private street. Screening along a common property line shall be 6' high. Landscape screening shall be capable of attaining a height of 6' within 2 years of planting. Screening along all public or private streets shall be a minimum of 3' high.
3. Interior Landscaping. Interior landscaping must be provided for sites containing more than 20 parking spaces. At least 10% of the parking and maneuvering areas, not including driveway areas, must be landscaped.
a. Standards. The landscape materials must meet the general standards below:
1. The landscaping must be dispersed throughout the parking area. All of the required landscape area may be in the parking area, or some may be in the loading areas.
2. Perimeter landscaping may not substitute for interior landscaping. However, interior landscaping may join perimeter landscaping as long as it extends at least four feet into the parking areas from the perimeter landscape line.
b. Individual tree-planting spaces. Where an individual tree is planted in a space surrounded by pavement, the planting area must have a minimum dimension of six feet with each tree placed in the middle.
c. Required landscape materials for parking lot landscaping. Landscape materials for parking lot interior and perimeter landscaping must be provided as follows:
1. Tree required. At least one tree must be provided for every 10 parking stalls. Existing trees may be used to meet this standard. At lease one tree shall be planted in each landscape island. Broadleaf trees must be at least 2 caliper inches at the time of planting and conifer trees must be at least 5' tall at the time of planting. Trees must be dispersed throughout the parking area to provide shade for the parking area. Some trees may be grouped, but the groups must be dispersed.
2. Shrubs required. At least one shrub must be provided for every 30 sq. ft. of required landscaped area. Shrubs must be at least the one-gallon container size.
3. Ground cover required. All of the landscaped areas that is not planted with trees and shrubs must be planted in ground cover plants, which may include grasses. Paths made of paving stones, flagstones, bricks, pavement, or similar materials may provide access across landscaped areas, but the surface area of impermeable materials does not count toward the required landscaped area.
4. Native Species. Planting of native species is encouraged.
J. Parking lot surfacing.
1. All areas used for the parking or storage or maneuvering of any vehicle shall be improved with asphalt, concrete or other permanent surface approved by the Planning Official; The Planning Official may approve the use of City and Department of Ecology alternative paving Best Management Practices to enhance on-site water quality where determined to be appropriate based on type and frequency of anticipated use.
2. Parking areas to be used primarily for temporary staging of construction equipment and temporary parking for the facility during construction may be surfaced in gravel when authorized by the approval authority at the time the site development approval is given. The Planning Official may require the property owner to remove the gravel immediately following construction or enter into an agreement to pave the parking area: (1) within a specified period of time after its establishment; or (2) if there is a change in the types or weights of vehicles utilizing the parking area; or (3) if there is evidence of adverse effects upon adjacent roadways, water courses or properties. Such an agreement shall be executed as a condition of approval of the plan to establish the gravel parking area
K. Parking lot and access striping.
1. Except for single-family and duplex residences, any area intended to be used to meet the off-street vehicle parking requirements as contained in this chapter shall have all parking spaces clearly marked; and
2. All interior drives and access aisles shall be clearly marked and signed to show direction of flow and maintain vehicular and pedestrian safety.
L. Wheel stops. Parking spaces along the boundaries of a parking lot or adjacent to interior landscaped areas or sidewalks shall be provided with a wheel stop or bumper rail at least 6" high located 2' back from the front of the parking stall. The front 2' of the parking stall may be concrete, asphalt or low- lying landscape material that does not exceed the height of the wheel stop, provided sidewalks or other pedestrian paths are not obstructed.
M. Drainage. Off-street parking and loading areas shall be sloped to drain in accordance with specifications approved by the Director of Public Works. These areas shall be drained to prevent the flow of water onto the right-of-way, across pedestrian facilities, or onto adjacent properties unless specifically authorized by the Director of Public Works.
N. Lighting. All off-street parking areas larger than 5,550 sq. ft. shall be illuminated. Public parks that close at dusk are exempted from this provision. All lighting shall be directed away from any adjacent residential zone.
O. Space and aisle dimensions. Table 20.945.040-2
Table 20.945.040-2 Space and Aisle Dimensions | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Standard Stall Dimension | Compact Stall Dimension | Aisle Width Dimension | ||||
Angle (degrees) | Stall Width (feet) | Stall Depth (feet) | Stall Width (feet) | Stall Depth (feet) | 1-Way Aisle Width | 2-Way |
0 | 20 | 8 | 8 | 18 | 12 | 20 |
45 | 9 | 17 | 8 | 15 | 14 | 20 |
60 | 9 | 17 | 8 | 15 | 16 | 22 |
90 | 9 | 17 | 8 | 15 | 22 | 22 |
1. Designated disabled parking stalls which meet minimum dimensional requirements shall be counted as standard size parking stalls and shall be provided as required by applicable State of Washington and the City Adopted Building Code, as amended for disabled person parking spaces.
2. The width of each parking space includes a stripe that separates each space.
3. Up to 50% of all required on-site vehicular parking spaces may be compact spaces. Such spaces shall be marked as “compact” or “C”.
4. Clustering. No more than an average of 10 parking spaces shall be placed side by side without an intervening break provided by a circulation aisleway, pedestrian walkway, or landscaping. If an average of no more than 10 side-by-side stalls is maintained overall, up to 15 stalls may be located side-by-side. Where landscaping provides a break in the group of spaces, the landscape island shall extend at least 1' into the circulation aisleway to provide a visual narrowing of the circulation aisleway.
5. A portion of a parking space may be landscaped instead of paved as follows:
a. The landscaped area may be up to 2' of the front of the space as measured from a line parallel to the direction of the bumper of a vehicle using the space.
b. Landscaping must be ground cover plants; and
c. The landscaped area counts towards parking lot interior landscaping requirements, but not perimeter landscaping requirements, and shall not obstruct the minimum width requirements for pedestrian circulation.
6. Other parking angles, such as but not limited to 30 degrees or 75 degrees may be approved by the Planning Official, with dimensional requirements consistent with those illustrated in Table 20.945.040-2.
7. Minimum standards for a standard parking stall’s length and width, aisle width, and maneuvering space in a parking structure shall be determined as noted in Table 20.945.040-2. (Ord. M-4289 § 4, 2019; Ord. M-4195 § 1, 2017; Ord. M-4034 § 32, 2012; Ord. M-3931 § 32, 2009; Ord. M-3847 § 15, 2007; Ord. M-3840 § 45, 2007; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Standards for all bicycle parking. Any bicycle parking implemented under this section must meet the following standards:
1. Bicycle parking must be provided at the ground level, and may be provided in floor, or wall racks that must hold bicycles securely by the means of the frame. Bicycles may be tipped vertically for storage, but not hung above the ground. If the bicycle parking is placed in the public right-of-way, it shall not obstruct pedestrian walkways and shall meet all of the requirements outlined in obtainment of the street use permit.
2. Where required bicycle parking is provided with racks, the racks must meet the following standards:
a. The parking spaces shall be at least 2' wide and 6' long with an overhead clearance of at least 7', and with a 5' access aisle;
b. The rack must hold the bicycle securely by means of the frame. The frame must be able to be supported so that the bicycle cannot be pushed or fall to one side in a manner that will damage the wheels;
c. The bicycle frame and one wheel can be locked to the rack with a high-security, U-shaped shackle lock if both wheels are left on the bicycle;
d. The rack must be securely anchored with theft-resistant hardware.
3. Where bicycle parking is provided with lockers, such lockers must meet the following standards:
a. An area of at least 6' of horizontal distance shall be provided around the entrance of each locker that is free from obstructions, an overhead clearance of at least 7', and with a 5' access aisle; and
b. The lockers must be securely anchored.
B. Bicycle parking signing. Entry and directional signs shall be provided by the property owner if bicycle parking facilities are not directly visible and obvious from the public right-of-way. The signs shall be used to properly direct bicyclists from the public right-of-way to the bicycle parking facilities.
C. Bicycle rack maintenance. The property owner of a site shall have a continuing obligation to properly maintain any bicycle parking facilities on their property. The City of Vancouver will maintain any bicycle parking facilities that are in the public right-of-way.
D. Parking in mixed-use projects. Bicycle parking for multiple uses may be clustered in one or several locations, and shall meet all other requirements for bicycle parking. For buildings with multiple entrances, bicycle racks should be distributed proportionately at and visible from the various public entrances. Bicycle parking lockers should be located adjacent to an employee entrance. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Parking structure dimensions and design shall be subject to review and approval by the Transportation Manager.
B. Ground-floor windows/wall openings. All above-grade parking structures shall provide ground-floor windows or wall openings along the street frontages. Blank walls are prohibited. Any wall facing the street shall contain windows, doors or display areas equal to at least 20% of the ground floor wall area facing the street excluding those portions of the face(s) devoted to driveway entrances and exits, stairwells, elevators and centralized payment booths. Required windows shall have a sill no more than 4' above grade. Where the interior floor level prohibits such placement, the sill may be raised to allow it to be no more than 2' above finished floor wall up to a maximum sill height of 6' above grade. These openings shall be glazed or grated.
C. Entrance/Exit Design. Adequate vision clearance shall be provided so that motorists leaving a parking structure have a clear view of the sidewalk on either side of the exit, and so that approaching pedestrians have a clear view of any approaching vehicle. Parking structure entrances and exits shall be designed to achieve travel speeds not to exceed 5 miles per hour, and shall require a vehicle stop directly prior to crossing the street sidewalk. Entrance and exit areas shall be designed so that vehicles approaching or leaving the parking structure can queue to enter/exit the traffic stream without blocking the sidewalk.
D. Parking Structure Internal Design and Pedestrian Circulation. Parking structure internal circulation design shall include provisions for the safe and convenient circulation of pedestrians. Design speed shall not exceed 10 miles per hour, and traffic control measures shall be provided at any location where vehicle circulation crosses a pedestrian walk way. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Parking requirements for unlisted uses.
1. The planning official may rule that a use not specifically listed in Table 20.945.070-2 below is a use similar to a listed use and that the same parking standards shall apply. If the applicant requests that the planning official’s decision be rendered in writing, it shall constitute an interpretation, as governed by Chapter 20.255 VMC; and
2. The planning official shall maintain a list of approved unlisted use parking requirements that have the same effect as an amendment to this chapter.
B. Choice of parking requirements. When a building or use is planned or constructed in such a manner that a choice of parking requirements could be made, the use which requires the greater number of parking spaces shall govern.
C. Measurements. The following measurements shall be used in calculating the total minimum number of vehicle parking spaces required in this chapter:
1. Fractions. Fractional space requirements of up to 0.5 shall be rounded down to the next whole number and 0.5 or greater rounded up to the next whole number.
2. Employees. Where employees are specified for the purpose of determining the minimum vehicle parking spaces required, the employees counted are those who work on the premises during the largest shift at the peak season.
3. Students. When students are specified for the purpose of determining the minimum vehicle parking spaces required, the students counted are those who are on the campus during the peak period of the day during a typical school term.
4. Space. Unless otherwise noted, where gross square feet (gsf) are specified, the area measured shall be gross floor area under the roof measured from the faces of the structure, excluding only space devoted to covered off-street parking or loading.
D. Exclusions to minimum vehicle parking requirements.
1. The following uses shall be exempt from minimum parking requirements outlined in Tables 20.945.070-1 and 20.945.070-2 below and their required off-street parking shall be zero for all residential units:
a. Any residential developments where the owner certifies and provides evidence that at least 50 percent of dwelling units are rented or sold at levels affordable to households earning 100 percent area median income or lower in accordance with the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development for a minimum of 10 consecutive years from final occupancy.
2. The following shall not be counted towards the computation of the minimum parking spaces as required in Table 20.945.070-2 below:
a. On-street parking. Parking spaces in the public street or alley shall not be eligible as fulfilling any part of the parking requirement except as provided elsewhere in this title;
b. Fleet parking. Required vehicle parking spaces may not be used for storage of fleet vehicles, except when a use can show that employee and fleet parking spaces are used interchangeably (e.g., the employee drives the fleet vehicle from home, or the spaces are used for fleet storage only at night and are available for employee use during the day). For the purposes of this title, space exclusively devoted to the storage of fleet vehicles will be considered as outdoor storage.
E. Reductions in minimum required vehicle parking.
1. The planning official may reduce the minimum off-street vehicle parking spaces required in Table 20.945.070-2 by up to 10 percent in new nonresidential developments by means of a Type I procedure, when an applicant for a development permit can demonstrate in a parking study prepared by a traffic consultant or in parking data from comparable sites that:
a. The requested reduction in parking will not have an adverse impact on uses in the immediate vicinity.
b. Use of transit, demand management programs, and/or special characteristics of the customer, client, employee or resident population will reduce expected vehicle use and parking space demand for this development, as compared with Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE) vehicle trip generation rates and minimum city parking requirements.
c. The city shall not be responsible for providing parking for a development should a reduction in required parking under this section result in a deficit in parking that is not desirable to the owner of the property or use.
2. The planning official may reduce the minimum off-street vehicle parking spaces required in Table 20.945.070-2 up to 20 percent if the required conditions detailed in subsections (E)(1) and (E)(2) of this section are met. Reductions in parking minimums shall be cumulative and inclusive of reductions allowed under any provision of this title.
a. For every five bicycle parking spaces provided which meet bicycle parking design standards or for each bicycle locker (two-bicycle capacity), the minimum motor vehicle parking requirement may be reduced by one space up to seven percent of total required vehicle parking spaces. Mixed-use developments using this provision shall provide bicycle parking indoors.
b. Sites where at least 20 parking spaces are required and where at least one street lot line abuts a designated arterial roadway, transit-supportive plazas may be substituted for up to five percent of required vehicle parking.
i. The plaza must be adjacent to the arterial street. If there is a bus stop along the site’s frontage, the plaza must be adjacent to the bus stop.
ii. The plaza must be at least 300 square feet in area and be shaped so that a 10-foot-by-10-foot square will fit entirely within the plaza.
iii. The plaza must be open to the public, contain a bench or other sitting area, contain a shelter or other weather protection covering at least 20 square feet, and shall have at least 10 percent and no more than 25 percent landscaping.
c. Building Orientation/Site Design Incentive. Developments which incorporate all of the following building orientation/site design characteristics into the site plan shall be eligible for a five percent reduction in required on-site parking:
i. Build to the Sidewalk. Buildings located as close as possible to the public street and sidewalk, preferably at the minimum required setback. Primary entrance shall be oriented toward the street.
ii. Provide public spaces. Commercial development should provide spaces for civic interaction. To make these more accessible and accommodating to the public, pedestrian plazas, street furniture and landscaped open spaces should be incorporated as site amenities.
iii. Build to the corner. Buildings on corner lots should be located on the street corner with building frontage on both streets with primary entrances oriented toward the intersection. If no buildings are located at street corners, pedestrian plazas and amenities should provide a focus for the area. Intersection vision clearance standards shall apply.
iv. Pad Development. Pad development should be located at the corners of a development or at the intersection created by the site driveway with the public street. The location and site design of pad development should integrate seamlessly with the on-site pedestrian circulation plan and all off-site pedestrian, bicycle and transit facilities.
3. A request to reduce the required minimum parking more than 20 percent is subject to a Type II variance procedure.
F. Parking in City Center (CX) Zone. The following minimum requirements shall apply, in accordance with VMC 20.630.060, Parking Control, in all areas zoned City Center (CX) district:
Table 20.945.070-1. CX District Parking Space Requirements
Land Use | Parking Requirements |
|---|---|
Multifamily housing | 0.75 space/dwelling unit |
Senior housing, and housing for persons with disabilities | 0 spaces for residential units 0.75 space per employee1 plus one visitor space per 10 residents |
All other residential uses | 1 space/dwelling unit |
Transient lodging | 1 space/living unit |
Congregate care facilities for nonsenior residents | 1 space/2 living units |
All other uses | 1 space/1,000 sq. ft. of floor area |
1The number of employees based on maximum number of employees present at any given time (i.e., during the largest shift of employees).
G. Parking in Transit Overlay District. Developments located within the Transit Overlay District may be subject to special parking standards contained in Chapter 20.550 VMC.
H. Application of Parking Requirements.
1. Notwithstanding any other requirement of this chapter, no parking shall be required for any commercial use located in an existing structure which abuts Main Street between Fifth Street and McLoughlin Boulevard, up to and including the first two floors above street level, and any basement levels. The requirements for uses in all floors of three stories or above shall be the same as that in all other areas in the City Center district (CX).
2. In addition, notwithstanding any other requirements of this chapter, requirements for off-street parking shall not apply within the Community Commercial (CC) district extending from McLoughlin Boulevard to Fourth Plain Boulevard in the event of a change in commercial occupancy of a building or of a remodeling of a commercial structure if the original floor area is not exceeded by 25 percent. This provision does not apply to conversion of residential occupancy to commercial occupancy. The requirements for off-street parking for the Community Commercial (CC) district within this area shall be based on the City Center (CX) district parking requirements of Table 20.945.070-1 and shall only be for the total area of additions in excess of 25 percent of the floor area in existence on July 19, 2010.
3. Commercial uses in the Neighborhood Commercial (CN) district may count available on-street parking spaces which are immediately adjacent to the development toward the minimum on-site parking requirement.
4. Parking stalls used for electric vehicle basic charging stations and rapid charging stations shall be counted toward the minimum number of required parking stalls in a development.
I. Use of Public Parking. The requirements for off-street parking can be satisfied by execution of a long-term lease for a segment of equivalent parking in an existing public or private parking facility. Lease fees in public facilities would be at market rates as established and adjusted by the Vancouver city council after considering the advice of the parking advisory committee. Continued leasing of such space shall be required, and failure to provide the required parking shall be cause for revocation of the occupancy permit for the structure involved.
J. Specific requirements for minimum parking. Parking shall be provided for uses as per Table 20.945.070-2 below:
Table 20.945.070-2. Minimum Off-Street Vehicle Parking Requirements
Use | Minimum |
|---|---|
RESIDENTIAL | |
Household Living | See Housing Types below |
Group Living | 1.0 space per 7 residents served under age 12 1.0 space per resident served ages 12 – 17 1.0 space per resident served age 18 or older |
Transitional Housing | 1.0:3 beds |
Home Occupations | None |
HOUSING TYPES | |
Single Dwellings, Attached | 1.0/DU1 |
Single Dwellings, Detached | 1.0/DU |
Accessory Dwelling Units | None |
Duplexes | 1.0/DU |
Market Rate Multifamily Dwelling Units | 0.75/DU if located within 0.25 mile of frequent transit line,6 1.0/DU if located 0.25 mile or further from a frequent transit line |
Housing for Low-Income Households Earning Under 60% Median Area Income | 0.75/DU |
Manufactured Home Subdivisions | 1.0/DU |
Manufactured Home Parks | 1.0/DU |
Senior Housing Facilities and Housing for People With Disabilities | 0 spaces for residential units 0.75 space per employee7 plus 1.0 visitor space per 10 residents |
CIVIC (Institutional) | |
Basic Utilities | None |
Community Centers | Per approved parking study |
Community Recreation | Per approved parking study |
Cultural Institutions | 1.0:400 sq. ft. |
Day Care | |
– Child Care | Family Day Care Home: none Institutional: 1.0/employee + 1.0/12 children served |
– Adult Day Care | Family Day Care Home: none Institutional: 1.0/employee + 1.0/12 clients served |
– Dog Day Care | 1.0/employee + |
Emergency Services | 1.0:300 |
Medical Centers | 1.0/4 beds (hospital, residential care center); 1.0/2 beds for patients or residents (convalescent hospital, nursing home, congregate care facility) |
Parks/Open Space | |
– Neighborhood Parks | Parks Department to determine |
– Community Parks | |
– Regional Parks | |
– Trails | |
Postal Service | 1.0:300 |
Religious Institutions | 1.0/6 seats or 12' of bench in main assembly area |
Social/Fraternal Clubs | 1.0/100 |
Transportation Facilities | None |
Schools | |
– Preschool | 2.0/classroom |
– Elementary and Middle | 1.0 space/4 seats or 8 feet of bench length in auditorium or assembly room, whichever is greater |
– High School | 1.0 space/employee, plus 1.0 space/each 6 students, or 1.0 space/4 seats or 8 feet of bench length in auditorium, whichever is greater |
– College* *Classrooms = 30 students. Lecture halls require additional parking of 12.0 spaces per 30 seats. Additional parking may be required as determined by planning official. | 1.0 space/3 seats in classrooms |
COMMERCIAL | |
Commercial and Transient Lodging | 1.0/lodging unit |
Eating/Drinking Establishments | 1.0/250 |
Entertainment-Oriented | |
– Adult Entertainment | Refer to specific use, i.e., theater, book or video store |
Indoor Entertainment | |
– Movie/Live Performance Theaters | 1.0/6 seats or 12' of bench |
– Skating Rinks/Arcades | 1.0/150 |
– Bowling Alleys | 5.0 spaces per lane |
– Shooting Ranges | 1.0 space per lane |
– Major Event Entertainment | 1.0/6 seats or 12' of bench |
General Retail | |
– Sales-Oriented | 1.0/300 |
– Personal Services | 1.0/400 |
– Repair-Oriented | 1.0/400 |
– Bulk Sales | (a) Properties with less than 10,000 square feet of open sales or rental area shall provide 1.0 space for each 1,000 square feet of gross floor area, plus 1.0 space for each 2,500 square feet of open sales or rental area. (b) Properties with 10,000 square feet or more of open sales or rental area shall provide 1.0 space for each 1,000 square feet of gross floor area, plus 4.0 spaces, plus 1.0 space for each 10,000 square feet of open sales or rental area in excess of 10,000 square feet. |
– Outdoor Sales | Same as Bulk Sales |
Animal Kennels/Shelters | 1.0/600 plus 1.0 per employee |
Motor Vehicle Related | |
– Motor Vehicle Sales/Rental | (a) Properties with less than 10,000 square feet of open sales or rental area shall provide 1.0 space for each 1,000 square feet of gross floor area, plus 1.0 space for each 2,500 square feet of open sales or rental area. (b) Properties with 10,000 square feet or more of open sales or rental area shall provide 1.0 space for each 1,000 square feet of gross floor area, plus 4.0 spaces, plus 1.0 space for each 10,000 square feet of open sales or rental area in excess of 10,000 square feet. |
– Motor Vehicle Servicing/Repair | 1.0/500 |
– Vehicle Fuel Sales3 | No less than 2.0 |
– Electric Vehicle Recharging Station | None |
Office | |
– General | 1.0/400 |
– Medical | 1.0/200 |
– Extended | 1.0/300 |
Nonaccessory Parking | N/A |
Self-Service Storage | Based on area of office |
Marinas | |
INDUSTRIAL | |
Industrial Services | 1.0/600 |
Manufacturing and Production | 1.0/800 |
Railroad Yards | None |
Research and Development | 1.0/600 |
Warehouses/Freight Movement | 1.0/5,000 |
Wholesale Sales | 1.0/1,250 |
Waste-Related | 1.0 space per 200 square feet of office space, plus 1.0 space per employee |
OTHER | |
Agriculture/Horticulture | None |
Airports/Airparks | None |
Cemeteries | 1.0/6 seats or 12' of bench in chapels |
Detention Facilities | 1.0/3 beds |
Heliports | None |
Mining | 1.0 per employee maximum shift |
Rail Lines/Utility Corridors | None |
Temporary Uses | None |
Wireless Communication Facilities | 1.0 |
1DU = dwelling unit.
2Does not include outpatient clinics or medical offices; see Medical/Dental Offices.
3Gasoline stations offering other retail goods for sale, in enclosed spaces accessible by the customer, shall also comply with the parking requirements for convenience stores. Gasoline stations providing vehicle repair or maintenance services shall also comply with the parking requirements for vehicle repair or service facilities.
4Senior multifamily housing project shall provide on-site parking at a minimum rate of one space per dwelling unit.
5(Reserved for future use)
6“Frequent transit service” means a bus rapid transit or other high capacity transit corridor, or transit corridors, with existing weekday peak service frequencies of 35 minutes or less, as indicated in the C-Tran 2018-2033 Transit Development Plan.
7The number of employees based on maximum number of employees present at any given time (i.e., during the largest shift of employees).
(Ord. M-4506 § 2 (Exh. B), 2025; Ord. M-4425 § 5, 2023; Ord. M-4377 § 2(c), 2022; Ord. M-4255 § 12, 2018; Ord. M-4254 § 3(QQ), 2018; Ord. M-4223 § 4, 2017; ACM dated 2/18/2014, Correction to E.3 Type III Variance changed to Type II; Ord. M-4002 § 12, 2011; Ord. M-3959 § 48, 2010; Ord. M-3931 § 33, 2009; Ord. M-3922 § 44, 2009; Ord. M-3847 § 16, 2007; Ord. M-3701 § 33, 2005; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Berths required. Except in the City Center (CX) and the Heights (HX) districts, new or substantially renovated buildings or structures that require receipt, delivery or distribution of materials and merchandise by trucks, shall provide and maintain off-street loading berths according to prescribed standards. The planning official may through a Type 1 procedure waive off-street loading requirements for uses that demonstrate a loading berth is not needed. The applicant shall demonstrate that either the proposed use does not require receipt, delivery or distribution of materials and merchandise by truck, that only small delivery trucks will access the site, or that large trucks will only access the site outside of normal business hours.
B. Off-street loading spaces.
1. With the exception of the uses listed in Subsection (2) below, commercial and industrial off-street loading requirements shall provide a minimum number of berths as indicated on Table 20.945.080-1
Table 20.945.080-1 Minimum Loading Berths | |
|---|---|
Number of Berths | Gross Floor Area |
1 | 5,000 sq. ft. up to 25,000 sq. ft. |
2 | 25,000 sq. ft. up to 50,000 sq. ft. |
3 | 50,000 sq. ft. up to 100,000 sq. ft. |
1 additional for each | 50,000 sq. ft. in excess of 100,000 sq. ft. |
2. Office buildings; hotels; restaurants; auditoriums and medical centers, colleges, residential care centers or other institutions that contain a structure or structures with a total area of 30,000 gsf or greater shall provide the minimum number of off-street loading spaces as indicated in Table 20.945.080-2.
Table 20.945.080-2 Minimum Loading Berths for Selected Uses | |
|---|---|
Number of Berths | Gross Floor Area |
1 | 30,000 sq. ft. up to 100,000 sq. ft. |
2 | 100,000 sq. ft. up to 100,000 sq. ft. |
1 additional for each | 50,000 sq. ft. in excess of 100,000 sq. ft. |
C. Size of berths. Berths required by preceding sections shall be a minimum of 10' wide, 45' long and 14' high.
D. On-site location. Required loading berths shall be located on the site of the primary use to which they are an accessory. When there is a campus development, e.g., medical center, college, business park, required loading berths may be aggregated on the site.
E. Design standards. Berths shall be provided in such a manner to avoid undue congestion and interference with public use of adjacent streets, sidewalks and alleys.
1. Access to such berths shall be from an alley when such exists unless the alley abuts a residential zone.
2. Off-street truck loading areas shall be separated from the off-street parking area.
3. The surface shall be paved with asphalt or concrete.
F. Relationship to residential uses. No berth shall be located closer than 50' to any other lot in any residential district unless entirely within a completely enclosed building. (Ord. M-4341 § 3 (Exh. B), 2021; Ord. M-3959 § 49, 2010; Ord. M-3931 § 34, 2009; Ord. M-3840 § 46, 2007; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
These standards are intended to allow groups of small-scale cottages around common areas in single or multifamily zoning districts in a manner promoting accessible housing and community interaction. The individual homes are smaller and shorter than what is allowed in the underlying zoning district, but they may be built at a higher density. (Ord. M-4517 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2025; Ord. M-4465 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2024; Ord. M-4455 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2024; Ord. M-4377 § 2(d), 2022)
A. Permitted Zones and Required Minimum Project Size. Cottage cluster housing developments shall be allowed on properties 10,000 square feet or larger in size in the R-17, R-9, R-6, R-4 and R-2 zoning districts. Lot size minimums of the underlying zone are not applicable to cottage cluster developments.
B. Permitted Uses. Cottage cluster development uses shall be limited to attached and detached single-family homes and associated outbuildings, public or private open space, and parking areas. Duplexes or attached single-family homes may constitute no more than 20 percent of the total number of units. Home occupations pursuant to Chapter 20.860 VMC shall be permitted only if there are no employees residing off site. Accessory dwelling units pursuant to Chapter 20.810 VMC shall be permitted only if located entirely within the single-family homes.
C. The narrow lot development standards in Chapter 20.927 VMC and R-17 zoning district standards of Chapter 20.410 VMC shall not apply to cottage housing developments. Minimum lot frontage and minimum lot sizes are not applicable to cottage housing developments. (Ord. M-4517 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2025; Ord. M-4465 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2024; Ord. M-4455 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2024; Ord. M-4438 § 4(L), 2023; Ord. M-4377 § 2(d), 2022)
A. General Standards.
1. Cottage housing developments may be allowed at up to two times the maximum density of the underlying zone, including any accessory dwelling units.
2. Cottage housing developments shall contain a minimum of four and a maximum of 12 units in a cluster; provided, that a cottage development may contain up to two clusters.
3. Each single-family cottage shall not exceed 1,600 square feet in total floor area, and each duplex cottage 3,000 square feet. Floor areas of attached or detached garages and outbuildings shall count towards these size limits, with the exception of the first 200 square feet of garage or outbuilding per single-family cottage, or 400 square feet per duplex. Existing single-family homes may remain on site but will be counted toward the total density.
4. Building heights may not exceed 25 feet within 50 feet of the project site perimeter, and 30 feet elsewhere in the site. Roofs higher than 18 feet shall be pitched at a ratio of at least 6:12.
5. Covered porches shall be at least 60 square feet, with no dimension less than five feet.
6. Buildings shall be set back at least 10 feet from the nearest public or private road, and at least five feet from other buildings. Building setbacks to exterior property lines shall be that of the underlying zoning district.
B. Cottage Orientation. Cottages must be clustered around a common courtyard and must meet the following standards:
1. At least 75 percent of the cottage units shall be located within 25 feet of a common courtyard, and shall have covered porches and main entries which face the common courtyard or an adjacent public street.
2. The planning official may at their discretion grant exceptions as needed to allow cottages abutting a public street at the site perimeter to face the street, and as needed in cases of very narrow or unusually configured project parcels may reduce the required percentage of lots located within 25 feet of the common courtyard to 50 percent.
C. Common Courtyard Design Standards. Each cottage cluster must share a common courtyard in order to provide a sense of openness and community of residents. Common courtyards must meet the following standards:
1. The common courtyard must contain a minimum of 200 square feet of usable open or congregating space per cottage unit within the associated cluster.
2. The common courtyard must be generally square or round, and no narrower than 15 feet wide at its narrowest dimension.
3. The common courtyard shall be developed with a mix of landscaping, lawn area, pedestrian paths, and/or paved courtyard area, and may also include recreational amenities. Impervious elements of the common courtyard shall not exceed 50 percent of the total common courtyard area.
4. Pedestrian paths must be included in a common courtyard. Parking areas, required setbacks, and driveways do not qualify as part of a common courtyard.
D. Required Parking and Parking Design.
1. Required spaces. Each dwelling unit shall include at least one parking space within the project area. On-street parking spaces abutting the project area may be counted towards this requirement.
2. Common Parking Areas. Parking may be located adjacent to an individual unit or in a common parking area. Common parking areas are subject to the following standards:
a. Cottage cluster projects with fewer than 12 cottages are permitted parking clusters of not more than five contiguous spaces.
b. Cottage cluster projects with 12 cottages or more are permitted parking clusters of not more than eight contiguous spaces.
c. Parking clusters must be separated from other spaces by at least four feet of landscaping.
d. Clustered parking areas may be covered.
3. Parking location, access and screening.
a. Off-street parking areas with five or more spaces shall not be located within 20 feet from any property line that abuts a street other than an alley.
b. No off-street parking space or vehicle maneuvering area is permitted between a property line that abuts a street (other than an alley) and the front façade of cottages located closest to that property line.
c. No off-street parking space is permitted within 10 feet of any other property line external to the cottage cluster, except property lines abutting an alley. Driveways and drive aisles are permitted within 10 feet of other external property lines.
d. Sight-obscuring landscaping, fencing, or walls at least three feet in height shall separate clustered parking areas and parking structures from common courtyards and property lines external to the cottage cluster.
E. Pedestrian Access.
1. A pedestrian path must be provided that connects the main entrance of each cottage to the following:
a. The common courtyard;
b. Shared parking or solid waste storage areas;
c. Community buildings; and
d. Sidewalks in public rights-of-way abutting the site or rights-of-way if there are no sidewalks.
2. The pedestrian path must be hard-surfaced and a minimum of three feet wide.
F. Community Buildings. Cottage cluster projects may include community buildings for the shared use of residents that provide space for accessory uses such as community meeting rooms, guest housing, exercise rooms, day care, community eating areas, community gardens, or picnic shelters. Community buildings must meet the following standards:
1. Each cottage cluster is permitted one community building.
2. The community building shall have a maximum floor area of 1,200 square feet.
G. Maintenance of Common Areas. The development application shall include a plan for ongoing maintenance of shared or common areas, including a mechanism for ensuring that the maintenance plan will be implemented.
H. Solid Waste and Recycling Access and Collection.
1. An access plan for solid waste and recycling collection service to all dwellings in the development shall be submitted with the application.
2. The access and collection plan shall show either a designated collection point for each lot or a common solid waste storage area for use by all lots and the ability of collection vehicles to maneuver safely to all points of collection. All circulation and turnaround designs must meet the requirements of VMC 11.80.070 and the Transportation Standard Details and be feasible using city-provided solid waste truck turning modeling templates and truck specifications. Collection vehicles shall be able to circulate the development and service receptacles with minimal backing required.
3. Collection points and common solid waste storage areas shall be accessible to collection vehicles without requiring backing out of a driveway onto a public street. If only a single access is available to the storage area, adequate turning radius shall be provided to allow collection vehicles to safely exit the site in a forward motion.
4. Where collection is not feasible on each lot, one or more designated common solid waste storage areas, located no further than 150 feet from any dwelling it serves, shall be provided.
a. Common outdoor solid waste storage areas must have a smaller gate, door or open walkway entrance for residents in addition to and separate from the service gate(s).
b. The dimensions of the common solid waste storage area shall accommodate receptacles consistent with current methods of local collection and allow for pedestrian (driver and residents) access between receptacles. Plans shall show footprints of all intended receptacles using dimensions from city-provided solid waste receptacle standards.
c. Outdoor common solid waste storage areas shall be enclosed by a screen comprised of a sight-obscuring wall, fence and/or vegetation. Service gate(s) shall allow access to haulers; they shall be capable of being secured in fully closed and open positions.
d. Solid waste storage receptacles shall be clearly labeled to indicate the type of materials accepted.
e. Common outdoor solid waste storage areas shall not be located in a side or rear yard setback that abuts property that is not within the same development; i.e., impacts of the location on neighboring properties is an important consideration. Every effort should be made to locate outdoor garbage and recycling areas so as to minimize their impacts on existing neighboring residential properties.
5. Designated collection points shall be located adjacent to alleys or streets but shall not obstruct sidewalks, bike lanes, or vision clearance triangles.
6. Maintenance of any private streets or alleys used for solid waste collection service shall be the responsibility of the property owners, and a maintenance agreement shall be recorded with the plat.
7. Each lot must have adequate storage space for carts when not set out for collection day. If lots do not have garages, driveways, or other suitable features for storing carts, individual or shared enclosure areas must be provided and shown on plans. Receptacles and common storage areas must be screened from view and not located in the right-of-way or adjacent to existing neighboring properties. (Ord. M-4517 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2025; Ord. M-4465 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2024; Ord. M-4455 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2024; Ord. M-4438 § 4(L), 2023; Ord. M-4402 § 3(CC), 2023; Ord. M-4377 § 2(d), 2022)
Cottage cluster housing projects shall be reviewed under Chapter 20.320 VMC, Subdivisions, where individual lots are proposed to be owned separately, or as a Type II review subject to Chapter 20.270 VMC, Site Plan Review, where common ownership of lots is proposed. (Ord. M-4517 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2025; Ord. M-4465 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2024; Ord. M-4455 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2024; Ord. M-4377 § 2(d), 2022)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
This chapter regulates signs which can be viewed from any public right-of-way by prescribing regulations and standards for such signs. It provides for administration, requires permits and prescribes fees therefore, and provides for enforcement and for appeals. This chapter is hereby found necessary as an exercise of the city’s police and legislative powers to protect and promote the public health and safety; to promote the convenience and the enjoyment of public travel; to protect the public investment in city streets and public places; and to attract visitors to the city by conserving its natural and man-made beauty. This chapter is intended to balance the need for a well-maintained and attractive community and the need for adequate business identification, advertising and communication. (Ord. M-3868 § 3, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. This chapter shall apply to all property and land within the jurisdiction of the city. It is unlawful for any person, firm, or corporation that owns, occupies, or controls property in the city to construct, maintain, display or alter or cause to be constructed, maintained, displayed or altered, a sign within the city except in conformance with this chapter.
B. It is not intended for this chapter to regulate public sector signing, political campaign signs, private noncommercial signs less than 6 square feet per face, doorway identification nameplates up to 4 square feet, and holiday decorations, as such terms are used and/or defined herein.
C. In addition to subsection B above, the following on-site nonilluminated signs are permitted without a sign permit and in addition to the maximum allowable number and maximum allowable area of signs, as follows:
1. One maximum 6 square feet per face sign, per frontage in all districts; or
2. One maximum 48 square feet per face sign, per frontage, on a lot in any nonresidential district.
3. Three maximum 48 square feet per face sign(s), per frontage on active construction sites in all districts. Active construction sites include properties where development permits are pending or have been issued but a final occupancy permit has not been issued.
4. Exception: This section shall not allow any sign otherwise prohibited by this title.
D. Vehicles Signs (including trailers). Vehicles used as part of the normal function of a business or organization are permitted to have signs relating to that business or organization, subject to the following limitations:
1. Not Permitted. Any sign attached to or placed on a parked vehicle or trailer used principally for advertising purposes, rather than transportation. A vehicle or trailer shall be considered principally used for advertising purposes based on the following criteria: a) a sign is attached or placed on the vehicle or trailer that is larger than 20 square feet in area; b) the sign is attached or placed on the vehicle or trailer for more than 12 hours in any 48-hour period; c) the vehicle or trailer is parked in the same location or within 300 feet of one location for more than four hours; and d) the sign attached or placed on the vehicle or trailer is parked in a public right-of-way or within 50 feet of a public right-of-way; and e) the sign attached to the vehicle or trailer can be read by a person with normal vision from inside the arterial right-of-way.
2. The provisions of the above section shall not apply where: a) the vehicle is temporarily parked at a loading dock, b) the vehicle is substantially hidden from view from any public street by buildings, fences, mature landscaping or similar objects such that the vehicle does not attract attention to or communicate information about the business or organization, c) the vehicle is legally parked at the residence of the driver, d) the vehicle is a contractor’s trailer at the site of an active construction project or e) the vehicle is available for rent as part of an equipment rental business and the content of the sign refers to the rental business only; or when such vehicle is parked at or near the site of the business or organization.
E. Window Signs. Window signs in conjunction with a permitted use are exempt, provided 50 percent or more of the window area is unobscured by signage. Such signs shall not be included in determining the number of signs nor permissible sign area. Sign permits are not required. (Ord. M-3868 § 4, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3701 § 34, 05/02/2005; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
The following types of signs are prohibited, except as otherwise provided by this chapter and in Section 20.960.090 Portable Signs in the Public Right-of-Way:
A. Off-premises signs. Off-premises signs are prohibited except as authorized in this chapter. For exception see Section 20.960.090 Portable Signs in the Public Right-of-Way.
B. Flashing signs. Except where permitted by section regulation for a special district or time/temperature or similar public service information signs. For the purpose of this title, EMC’s consistent with the standards of VMC 20.960.040 I, -.050 I, -.060 I or -.070 I shall not be considered flashing signs.
C. Free-standing signs. Individual free-standing signs are prohibited in any business complex where a business complex sign exists.
D. Billboards. Billboards are prohibited in all zones.
E. Signs that obstruct. Any sign that substantially obstructs free and clear vision of exit, traffic intersection entrance, traffic sign or signal, or constitutes a traffic hazard by reasons thereof.
F. Signs containing unwarranted content. Any sign which contains statements, words, and pictures of an obscene character.
G. Signs which do not conform in structure or material to uniform codes. Any sign which does not structurally or materially conform to the requirements of the City Adopted Building Code as to structure or material except for signs permitted under Section 20.960.090 Temporary Right-of-Way Signs.
H. Projecting signs. No projecting sign may extend into a 2-foot setback from a curb line.
I. Signs with angle iron cages. Any sign whose main structural support is comprised of a visible angle iron cage.
J. Signs in Public Areas. No sign shall be placed or permitted to be placed on public property or public right-of-way except as permitted under Section 20.960.090 Portable Signs in the Public Right-of-Way, or signs on public buildings determined to be in the public interest by the Planning Official.
K. Miscellaneous signs and posters. The tacking, pasting, or otherwise affixing of any sign or signs of a miscellaneous character, visible from a public right-of-way, located on exterior walls of any building, barn, shed, tree, pole, post, fence or other structure is prohibited unless otherwise permitted.
L. Lighting of signs. Any sign which is found by the Planning Official to utilize an inordinate light source such as beacons, strobe lights, or reflectors.
M. Signs emitting pollutants. Any sign that emits audible sound, odor, or visible matter.
N. Garage sale signs. Any sign or signs advertising a garage sale to be held at a given premises which is posted for more than 7 calendar days in any one calendar year.
O. Commercial signs advertising card room gambling or other games of chance prohibited by state law or city ordinance.
P. Banner Signs. Banners used for advertising are prohibited unless otherwise specified in this code.
Q. Signs associated with single family uses. Signs for uses allowed within single family homes are prohibited.
R. Rotating Signs. Rotating signs are prohibited in all zoning districts.
S. Rooftop Signs. Rooftop signs are prohibited in all zoning districts.
T. Any other sign. Any other sign that does not conform to all provisions of this code. (Ord. M-4034 § 33, 12/03/2012; Ord. M-3868 § 5, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004; Ord. M-3266 § 2, 1996)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
In the lower density residential districts, permitted signs include signs exempted by Section 20.960.020 Scope for uses within Central Park for which design guidelines apply, and for nonconforming uses with existing legal signs. Nonconforming signs advertising existing businesses may remain or be replaced in kind, as long as the business remains in operation, but may not be increased in size. In all Lower Density Residential Districts, the regulations of this section shall apply:
A. Billboards. Billboards are prohibited.
B. Off-premises signs. Not allowed except as provided in 20.960.090.
C. Free-standing signs.
1. Allowable Area: 32 square feet per face.
2. Number of Signs: 1 (There shall be no more than one free-standing sign per frontage, and no more than one fascia sign. If both are used, they must be on different frontages).
3. Height of Sign: Maximum 8 feet to be measured from grade.
4. Encroachment: No part of the freestanding sign shall project into any public right-of-way.
5. No freestanding sign shall project or extend into any vision clearance area unless approved by the Planning Official.
6. Any freestanding sign must be integrated. That is, all supports or sign elements shall be an integral part of the design. Auxiliary projections or attachments not a part of a single design are prohibited.
D. Fascia signs.
1. Allowable Area: 5 percent of buildings’ elevation with a maximum of 32 square feet.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per business. (There shall be no more than one free-standing sign per frontage, and no more than one fascia sign. If both are used, they must be on different frontages).
3. Height of Sign: Not to extend above parapet or eave line.
E. Projecting signs. Projecting signs are prohibited.
F. Rooftop signs. Rooftop signs are prohibited.
G. For sale/lease/rent signs. As specified in Section 20.960.090.
1. Allowable Area: Maximum 6 square feet per face side and as specified in Section 20.960.020.C.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per frontage.
3. Encroachment: For sale/lease/rent signs may not encroach on the property line of the subject property.
H. Rotating signs. Rotating signs are prohibited.
I. Electronic Message Center signs. Allowed subject to the following standards:
1. Allowed in association with nonresidential uses only which meet the following criteria:
a. The site has frontage on a major or minor arterial; or
b. The site has frontage on a collector arterial and is at least 2 acres in size
2. Number of signs: 1 per use
3. Type: Fascia or monument-style sign only
4. Maximum size: 16 square feet (50% of allowed area of fascia or monument sign); such sign shall not be in addition to allowable area of fascia or monument sign
5. Maximum height: 8 feet measured from grade if monument sign; fascia signs shall not extend above the parapet or eave line
6. Location: The EMC sign shall either face or be located adjacent to the arterial street
7. Hours of operation: The EMC sign shall be completely turned off between the hours of 9:00 pm and 7:00 am, seven days a week
8. Additional performance standards of VMC 20.960.060, I, 2-9 shall apply to EMC signs in residential districts
9. Signs with an electronic message center which meet all of the above standards may also provide internal illumination to the remainder of the sign.
J. Directional signs. Are regulated as specified in Section 20.960.090.
K. Business complex signs (free-standing signs only). Free standing business complex signs are prohibited. .
L. Allowable combinations of sign types. No combination of sign types is allowed. .
M. Lighting of signs. Only indirect lighting is allowed, except as otherwise allowed by VMC 20.960.040, subsection I, 9. (Ord. M-3868 § 6, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3730 § 33, 12/19/2005; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
In all Higher Density Residential Districts, the regulations of this Section shall apply:
A. Billboards. Not allowed.
B. Off-premises signs. Not allowed except as provided in 20.960.090.
C. Free-standing signs.
1. Allowable Area: 32 square feet per face.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per frontage.
3. Height of Sign: Maximum 8 feet to be measured from grade.
4. Encroachment: No part of the freestanding sign shall project into any public right-of-way.
5. No freestanding sign shall project or extend into any vision clearance area unless approved by the Planning Official.
6. Any freestanding sign must be integrated. That is, all supports or sign elements shall be an integral part of the design. Auxiliary projections or attachments not a part of a single design are prohibited.
D. Fascia signs.
1. Allowable Area: 5 percent of buildings’ elevation with a maximum of 32 square feet.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per business. (There shall be no more than one free-standing sign per frontage, and no more than one fascia sign. If both are used, they must be on different frontages).
3. Height of Sign: Not to extend above parapet or eave line.
E. Projecting signs. Not allowed.
F. Rooftop signs. Not allowed.
G. For sale/lease/rent signs. As specified in Section 20.960.090.
1. Allowable Area: Maximum 6 square feet per face and as specified in Section 20.960.020(C).
2. Number of Signs: 1 per frontage.
3. Encroachment: Not allowed.
H. Rotating signs. Rotating signs are prohibited.
I. Electronic Message Center signs. Allowed subject to the following standards:
1. Allowed in association with nonresidential uses only which meet the following criteria:
a. The site has frontage on a major or minor arterial; or
b. The site has frontage on a collector arterial and is at least 2 acres in size
2. Number of signs: 1 per use
3. Type: Fascia or monument-style sign only
4. Maximum size: 16 square feet (50% of allowed area of fascia or monument sign); such sign shall not be in addition to allowable area of fascia or monument sign
5. Maximum height: 8 feet measured from grade if monument sign; fascia signs shall not extend above the parapet or eave line
6. Location: The EMC sign shall either face or be located adjacent to the arterial street
7. Hours of operation: The EMC sign shall be completely turned off between the hours of 9:00 pm and 7:00 am, seven days a week
8. Additional performance standards of VMC 20.960.060, I, 2-9 shall apply to EMC signs in residential districts
9. Signs with an electronic message center which meet all of the above standards may also provide internal illumination to the remainder of the sign.
J. Directional signs.
1. Allowable Area. Maximum 6 square feet per face per sign.
2. Number of Signs. 1 per function per frontage.
K. Business complex signs (free-standing signs only)
1. Allowable Area: 2 square feet per business or professional tenant per face for tenant identification, and 15 square feet per face for business complex identification.
2. Height of Sign: Maximum height of 10 feet to be measured from grade. (It is recommended that the design be compatible with character of the neighborhood and the profile of the sign be as low as possible.)
3. Number of Signs: 1 per business complex.
L. Allowable combinations of sign types.
1. There shall be no combinations of permanent sign types on a single street frontage.
2. Business Complex Signs are required for any business in a business complex desiring a Free-Standing Sign. The use of a Business Complex Sign shall replace all other Free-Standing Signs on the premises, except temporary or directional signs.
M. Lighting of signs.
1. No neon may be used as a light source.
2. For internally illuminated signs, the background must be opaque and the illuminated portion of the sign face must not exceed 40 percent of the sign face area.
3. For Business Complex Signs, only that portion of the sign identifying the complex may be illuminated. (Ord. M-3868 § 7, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3730, Amended, 12/19/2005; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
In all commercial districts as defined in this Title, the following regulations and standards shall apply:
A. Billboards. Not allowed.
B. Off-premises signs. Not allowed except as provided in 20.960.090.
C. Free-standing signs.
1. Allowable Area: One (1) square foot per face per lineal foot of frontage up to a maximum of 250 square feet per face. Provided that premises with less than thirty-two (32) lineal feet of frontage shall be allowed a maximum thirty-two (32) square foot sign per face.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per frontage.
3. Height of Sign: Maximum 25 feet to be measured from grade to top of sign.
4. Encroachment Above Public Right-of-Way: No part of the freestanding sign shall project into any public right-of-way.
5. No freestanding sign shall project or extend into any vision clearance area unless approved by the Planning Official.
6. Any freestanding sign must be integrated. That is, all supports or sign elements shall be an integral part of the design. Auxiliary projections or attachments not a part of a single design are prohibited.
D. Fascia signs.
1. Allowable Area: Maximum 12 percent of building’s elevation on which the sign is erected with a guaranteed minimum of 32 square feet. Total of all sign face areas shall not exceed 250 square feet.
2. Number of Signs: No maximum number provided the total area of all signs complies with D1 above.
3. Height of Sign: No sign shall extend above parapet or eave line.
4. Fascia Signs: Fascia Signs may not encroach into right-of-way if less than 8 feet above grade.
E. Projecting signs.
1. Allowable Area: Maximum 15 percent of a building elevation on which the sign is erected. Total of all sign face areas shall not exceed 250 square feet.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per elevation per business.
3. Height of Sign: No sign shall extend above parapet or eave line.
4. Encroachment Above Public Right-of-Way. No encroachment allowed for signs less than 8 feet above grade; 3 feet encroachment allowed for signs greater than 8 feet but less than or equal to 10 feet above grade; 4 feet encroachment allowed for signs greater than 10 feet and less than or equal to 12 feet above grade, and 6 feet for signs more than 12 feet above grade.
F. Rooftop signs. Rooftops signs are prohibited.
G. Temporary signs. Not allowed, except for portable signs in the right-of-way under Section 20.960.090.
H. Rotating signs. Rotating signs are prohibited.
I. Electronic Message Center signs. (Not permitted in CN).
1. The area of the electronic message center shall not exceed 20 percent of the area of the sign; provided the area limitation shall not apply if the sign is solely limited to time and temperature.
2. All messages displayed on an electronic message center shall be directly related to the business for which the sign was constructed. No off-premises signage is permitted.
3. All electronic message centers signs shall be constructed as an integral part of a permanent sign constructed on-site. Integral shall be considered to be incorporated into the framework and architectural design of the permanent sign.
4. The display shall be limited to text and static images only and shall not appear to flash, portray blinking or chasing lights, or otherwise create continuously changing images. However, scrolling of text (horizontal or vertical) is permitted. The rate of change for sign copy from one message to another shall be no more frequent than every eight seconds and the actual copy change shall be accomplished in four seconds or less. Once changed, the copy shall remain static until the next change.
5. All electronic message center signs shall have installed ambient light monitors and shall at all times allow such monitors to automatically adjust the brightness level of the electronic message center sign based on ambient light conditions.
6. Electronic message center signs shall not be associated with any dwelling or home occupation in any residential zone.
7. Electronic message center sign permit applications must include a copy of the manufacturer’s operating manual, which includes the manufacturer’s recommended standards for brightness, scrolling or traveling speed, and other display operations.
8. Electronic message center signs which create a source of glare shall be adjusted or removed as directed by the Planning Official. No electronic message center sign may be illuminated to a degree of brightness that is greater than necessary for adequate visibility. In no case may the brightness exceed eight thousand nits (8,000) or equivalent candelas during daylight hours, or one thousand (1,000) nits or equivalent candelas between dusk and dawn.
9. Electronic message center sign permit applications must also include a certification from the owner or operator of the sign stating that the sign shall at all times be operated in accordance with City codes and that the owner or operator shall provide proof of such conformance upon request of the City.
J. Directional signs.
1. Allowable Areas: Maximum 6 square feet per face per sign.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per function per frontage.
K. Business complex signs (free-standing signs).
1. Allowable Area: 1.5 square feet per face per lineal foot of frontage up to a maximum of 250 square feet per face. Provided that a premises with less than thirty-two (32) lineal feet of frontage shall be allowed a maximum thirty-two (32) square foot sign per face.
2. Height of Sign: Maximum 25 feet from grade to top of sign.
3. Number of Signs: 1 per frontage. A secondary sign is allowable if any single frontage exceeds 300 feet. Total square footage of all signage must fall within above formula.
L. Allowable combinations of sign types.
1. Signs attached to a given building elevation will not exceed a total of 15 percent of that elevation.
2. On any street frontage, these combinations are allowable:
a. Fascia and Free-Standing Signs.
b. Fascia and Projecting Signs
c. No other combinations allowed.
3. Business Complex Signs are required for any business in a business complex desiring a Free-Standing Sign. The use of a Business Complex Sign shall replace all other Free-Standing Signs on the premises, except temporary or directional signs.
M. Weather protection. Where a building frontage in the City Center District (CX) is provided with weather protection, said building shall be entitled to the following additional signage; and said additional signage shall not be included in the figuring of the total sign area on the building.
1. A projecting sign suspended from the weather protection structure not exceeding 6 square feet in area per face. Each business shall be allowed 1 such sign per public entry. The bottom of any sign of this type shall be at least 8 feet above the sidewalk.
2. A fascia sign attached to the building but below the weather protection device. Each business shall be allowed one such sign per public entry. (Ord. M-3868 § 7, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3868 § 8, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
In the industrial districts, the regulations and standards of this Section shall apply:
A. Billboards. Not allowed.
B. Off-premises signs in Industrial Parks.
1. Type of Sign: Monument sign.
2. Allowable Areas: Maximum 32 square feet per face per sign. Maximum of 64 square feet total all sign faces.
3. Number of Signs: 1 per business and copy must be related to the resident manufacturers or industries, and for directional purposes only (not allowed in the Industrial Districts along Lincoln Avenue, south of Fourth Plain Boulevard and east of the railroad tracks).
4. Height of Sign: Maximum 15 feet.
5. Encroachment: Not allowed.
6. Portable signs in the right-of-way as per 20.960.090.
C. Free-standing signs (on-site monument sign only).
1. Allowable Area: One (1) square foot per face per lineal foot of frontage up to a maximum of 250 square feet per face. Provided that premises with less than thirty-two (32) lineal feet of frontage shall be allowed a maximum thirty-two (32) square foot sign per face.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per frontage.
3. Height of Sign: Maximum 15 feet.
4. Encroachment: No part of the freestanding sign shall project into any public right-of-way.
5. No freestanding sign shall project or extend into any vision clearance area unless approved by the Planning Official.
6. Any freestanding sign must be integrated. That is, all supports or sign elements shall be an integral part of the design. Auxiliary projections or attachments not a part of a single design are prohibited.
D. Fascia signs.
1. Allowable Area: Maximum 12 percent of the building’s elevation on which the sign is erected with a guaranteed minimum of 32 square feet. Total of all sign areas shall not exceed 250 square feet.
2. Number of Signs: No maximum number, provided the total area of all signs complies with D1 above.
3. Height of Sign: No sign shall extend above parapet or eave line.
4. Fascia Signs: Fascia Signs may not encroach into right-of-way if less than 8 feet above grade.
E. Projecting signs.
1. Allowable Area: Maximum 15 percent of a building elevation on which the sign is erected. Total of all sign face areas shall not exceed 250 square feet.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per elevation per business.
3. Height of Sign: No sign shall extend above parapet or eave line.
4. Encroachment: Above Public Right-of-Way: No encroachment allowed for signs less than 8 feet above grade; 3 feet encroachment allowed for signs greater than 8 feet but less than or equal to 10 feet above grade; 4 feet encroachment allowed for signs greater than 10 feet and less than or equal to 12 feet above grade, and 6 feet for signs more than 12 feet above grade.
F. Rooftop signs. Not allowed.
G. Temporary signs. Not allowed except as provided in 20.960.090.
H. Rotating signs. Not allowed.
I. Electronic message centers signs.
1. The area of the electronic message center shall not exceed 20 percent of the area of the sign; provided the area limitation shall not apply if the sign is solely limited to time and temperature.
2. All messages displayed on an electronic message center shall be directly related to the business for which the sign was constructed. No off-premises signage is permitted.
3. All electronic message centers signs shall be constructed as an integral part of a permanent sign constructed on site. Integral shall be considered to be incorporated into the framework and architectural design of the permanent sign.
4. The display shall be limited to text and static images only and shall not appear to flash, portray blinking or chasing lights, or otherwise create continuously changing images. However, scrolling of text (horizontal or vertical) is permitted. The rate of change for sign copy from one message to another shall be no more frequent than every eight seconds and the actual copy change shall be accomplished in four seconds or less. Once changed, the copy shall remain static until the next change.
5. All electronic message center signs shall have installed ambient light monitors and shall at all times allow such monitors to automatically adjust the brightness level of the electronic message center sign based on ambient light conditions.
6. Electronic message center signs shall not be associated with any dwelling or home occupation in any residential zone.
7. Electronic message center signs which create a source of glare shall be adjusted or removed as directed by the Planning Official. No electronic message center sign may be illuminated to a degree of brightness that is greater than necessary for adequate visibility. In no case may the brightness exceed eight thousand nits (8,000) or equivalent candelas during daylight hours, or one thousand (1,000) nits or equivalent candelas between dusk and dawn.
8. Electronic message center sign permit applications must also include a certification from the owner or operator of the sign stating that the sign shall at all times be operated in accordance with City codes and that the owner or operator shall provide proof of such conformance upon request of the City.
J. Directional signs.
1. Allowable Area: Maximum 10 square feet per face per sign.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per function per frontage.
K. Industrial complex signs (free-standing signs).
1. Allowable Area: 1.5 square foot per face per lineal foot of industrial complex frontage up to a maximum of 250 square feet per face. Provided that an industrial complex with less than thirty-two (32) lineal feet of frontage shall be allowed a maximum thirty-two (32) square foot sign per face.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per complex frontage.
3. Height of Sign: Maximum 25 feet.
L. Allowable combinations of sign types.
1. No signs attached to the building will exceed a total of 15 percent of said building elevation.
2. On any frontage, these combinations are allowable:
a. Fascia and Free-Standing Signs.
b. Fascia and Projecting Signs
c. No other combinations allowed. (Ord. M-4147, 2015; Ord. M-3868 § 9, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Code reviser’s note: Ord. M-4147, Amended, 12/07/2015, Effective 01/07/2016 ACM Correction.
Signs allowed in the Open Space District shall be governed by chapter 20.450 Open Space Zoning Districts (Ord. M-3868 § 10, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Definitions.
1. Permanent Portable Signs shall be defined as “onsite” signs placed in the right-of-way along the business frontage and on the same side of the street of the building or establishment which it advertises. Permanent portable signs shall be meant for continuous display during the hours the business is open and shall have the primary purpose of identifying the business.
2. Temporary Portable Signs shall be defined as “off-site” signs placed in the right-of-way advertising an approved business or use. Temporary portable signs shall be displayed during the hours the business is open and shall have the sole purpose of identifying the business or providing directions.
B. General.
1. Portable signs in the public right-of-way shall be allowed for approved uses in all zones except in areas designated as parks, open space or greenway, and subject to the standards in Section 20.960.090. They may include off-site signs that advertise and are associated with an approved business or use or direct persons to premises different from where the sign is located.
2. Portable signs shall not be allowed as part of home occupations or uses located within residential districts. Portable signs shall be permitted as part of a home occupation in all nonresidential district:
C. Design standards.
1. Portable right-of-way sign structures shall be in the shape of an inverted V, with two sign boards attached to each other at the top of the sign (also known as a sandwich board or A-frame sign).
2. Signs shall be constructed of weather-resistant materials, such as wood, plastic, or metal. Signs constructed of impermanent materials, including but not limited to cardboard and paper are prohibited.
3. No materials such as paper, balloons, windsocks, etc., may be attached to the sign.
4. No sign shall contain foil, mirrors, bare metal, or other reflective materials which could create hazardous conditions to motorists, bicyclists or pedestrians.
5. No sign may contain lights of any kind.
D. Size and number of signs allowed.
1. Maximum size of sign shall be nine (9) square feet per sign face, with a maximum of two sign faces per sign.
2. Maximum of one (1) on-site sign per approved business or use on right-of-way abutting the business or use including businesses having more than one street frontage.
3. Maximum of three (3) off-site signs per approved business or use.
4. Maximum height of sign shall be 36 inches above the sidewalk, walkway, or plaza upon which it is placed. The height of such signs may not be artificially increased above the allowed maximum by the placement of other materials.
E. Location of signs.
1. One portable sign allowed per business to be placed in the right-of-way along the business frontage (front or side street) and on the same side of the street of the building or establishment which it advertises.
2. Off-site temporary signs advertising an approved business or use shall be located within a one (1) mile (driving) radius from where the business or use is being advertised.
3. No sign may be placed in such a way as to reduce the continuous unobstructed width of a sidewalk or walkway to less than five (5) feet.
4. Sign placement may not obstruct an entrance to a building, steps or driveway access.
5. No sign may be placed within a sight vision clearance triangle as (required by Section 20.985) or within twenty (20) feet of a wheelchair ramp.
6. No sign shall be placed within the roadway, traffic island, median or circle.
F. Duration.
1. Permanent portable signs may be displayed in the right-of-way during the hours the business is open.
2. Temporary portable signs may be displayed in the right-of-way during the hours the business is open on Friday 10 a.m.-6 p.m., Saturday 10 a.m.-6 p.m. and Sunday 10 a.m.-6 p.m.
G. Additional Standards.
1. Owners are responsible for the removal of their portable signs following business hours and during periods of strong winds.
2. Off- site portable signs may be placed in the right-of-way abutting private property only with the written consent of the owner(s) of the property abutting the right-of-way and/or their authorized representative.
3. A portable sign placed in the right-of-way shall bear the name and address of the person/organization placing the sign.
H. Enforcement.
1. All new portable signs shall comply immediately with the above standards. All temporary signs (conforming and nonconforming) in existence prior to January 26, 2004, shall comply with the above standards within forty-five (45) calendar days after January 26, 2004.
2. The enforcement of this section shall be governed by the provisions of Title 22 of the Vancouver Municipal Code.
I. Permit. Portable signs in the right-of-way shall be exempt from the permit and fee requirements of this chapter. (Ord. M-3701 § 35, 05/02/2005; Ord. M-3663, Amended, 08/02/2004; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Persons occupying 70 percent or more of the linear street frontage of properties on both sides of the street in any area, may petition the City Council for the formation of a Special Sign District. This might be done for such reasons as to create or maintain an area with a particular ethnic atmosphere, to stimulate a historic period, theater or entertainment area, or other similar purpose. A group of property owners or persons in the right of possession will be chosen by such property owners to comprise an advisory body of the Sign District. This body will draw up the criteria for signs in the District and submit such criteria to the Planning Official for his/her review and recommendation, and for review and recommendation by the Planning Commission prior to the submittal to Council for approval. Council will instruct the City Clerk to notify all owners or persons in the right of possession within the District, after which the Council may approve the Special Sign District by ordinance. If the criteria for the Special Sign District are approved and become effective, the City shall adopt them by ordinance as regulations of the Sign District. (Ord. M-3868 § 13, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
A. Except as otherwise provided in this chapter, it shall be unlawful for any person to erect, construct, enlarge, move, or convert any sign in the City or cause the same to be done, without first obtaining a sign permit for each such sign from the Planning Official. This shall not be construed to require any permit for a change of copy of any reader board sign, nor for the repainting, cleaning, and other normal maintenance or repair of a sign or sign structure for which a permit has been previously issued, so long as the sign or sign structure is not modified in any way. No new permit is required for signs which have permits and which conform with the requirements of this Code on the date of its adoption, unless and until the sign cabinet or profile is altered or the sign is relocated.
B. Every sign permit issued by the Planning Official shall become null and void if work is not commenced within 180 calendar days after the date of such permit. If work authorized by such permit is suspended or abandoned for 180 calendar days any time after the work is commenced, a new permit shall be first obtained to do so, and the fee will be one-half the amount required for a new permit for such work, provided that no changes have been made in the original plans.
C. In emergency repair situations, work may be initiated and completed without first applying for a permit. However, a permit shall be applied for within 48 hours after the first working day when work commenced on the sign. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Application for a sign permit shall be made in writing upon forms provided by the City, and shall state the following information:
A. Name, address, and telephone number of the applicant.
B. Name, address, and telephone number of the sign owner.
C. Location by street number of the building, structure, or lot to which or upon which the sign is to be installed or affixed.
D. A drawing to scale showing the design of the sign, including dimensions, sign size, method of attachment, source of illumination, and showing the relationship to any building or structure to which it is, or is proposed to be, installed or affixed, or to which it relates.
E. A plot plan, approximately to scale, indicates the location of the sign relative to property lines, rights-of-way, streets, sidewalks, and other buildings or structures on the premises.
F. The maximum and minimum heights of the sign.
G. The number, size, and location of all existing signs on the same building, lot or premises. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
No person shall erect or hang a sign upon any property or building without the consent of the owner or person entitled to possession of the property or building, if any, or their authorized representatives. (Ord. M-3701 § 36, 05/02/2005; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
A. The Planning Official shall issue a permit for the erection, alteration or relocation of a sign within the City when an application therefore has been properly made and the sign complies with all appropriate laws and regulations of the City and all procedures required by City Ordinance have been complied with and completed.
B. The Planning Official may, in writing, suspend or revoke a permit issued under provisions of this chapter whenever the permit is issued on the basis of a misstatement of fact or fraud. When a sign permit is denied by the Administrator, he shall give written notice of the denial to the applicant, together with a brief written statement of the reasons for the denial. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
No permit for a sign issued hereunder shall be deemed to constitute permission or authorization to maintain an unlawful sign nor shall any permit issued hereunder constitute a defense in an action to abate an unlawful sign. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A fee shall be paid to the City at the time of issuance in accordance with the provisions of the City fee schedule. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
In order to obtain a permit for the erection of a sign in the City (except painted wall graphics), the applicant must have a Washington State Contractors’ license under Chapter 18.27 RCW, unless he is going to install a sign upon his own property and is exempted from such requirement by such statute. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
No license shall be transferable and no holder of any license issued under this chapter shall allow his name to be used by any other party, either for the purpose of doing work or obtaining a permit under the penalty of forfeiting his license in addition to any fine levied, and the Planning Official is authorized to refuse to issue permits to the holder of any license violating this provision. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
The Planning Official is hereby authorized and directed to enforce and carry out all provisions of this chapter, both in letter and spirit, with vigilance and with all due speed. The Planning Official is authorized to promulgate regulations and procedures consistent with the purpose of this chapter. The Planning Official is further empowered to delegate the duties and powers granted to and imposed upon him/her within this chapter. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
The Planning Official is hereby empowered to enter or inspect any building, structure, or premises in the City upon which, or in connection with which a sign, as defined by this chapter, is located, for the purpose of inspection of the sign, its structural and electrical connections, and to ensure compliance with the provisions of this chapter. Such inspections shall be carried out during business hours, unless an emergency exists. In the case of a residential use, the Superintendent shall secure assistance from the City Attorney, who may apply to a court for any necessary process to allow such inspection.
A. Maintenance. Every sign in the City, including but not limited to those signs for which permit fees are required, shall be maintained in good structural conditions at all times.
B. Signs declared unlawful. The Administrator shall declare any sign unlawful and order its removal if he finds in writing that it endangers public safety by reasons of inadequate maintenance, dilapidation or abandonment. Any such declaration shall state the reasons of the Administrator for stating that the sign constitutes a safety hazard to the general public, and must direct that it be corrected immediately or within a time to be set in such order.
C. Any sign owned, kept, displayed, or maintained by any person within the City, which is unlawful under the provisions of this chapter, is hereby declared to be in violation of this chapter. The Administrator may declare any such sign to be unlawful, and such declaration shall state in writing the reason or reasons why such sign and the keeping, owning, maintenance, construction, and display of this chapter, and shall require its removal or repair within a time to be stated in such order. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
In enforcing this chapter, the Administrator may accept a written Assurance of Discontinuance of any act or practice deemed in violation of this chapter, or of any rule or regulation adopted pursuant hereto, from any person engaging in, or who has engaged in such act or practice. Any such assurance shall specify a time limit during which such discontinuance is to be accomplished. Failure to perform any such assurance shall constitute prima facie proof of a violation of this chapter or any rule or regulation adopted pursuant hereto order issued pursuant thereto. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Any advertising structure or sign which prior to the effective date (12/19/79) of the sign code ordinance (M-2035) codified in this chapter has been lawfully erected, or for which a permit to erect it had been issued prior to the effective date of the sign code ordinance codified in this chapter and which is rendered nonconforming by this chapter may continue to exist but not to be increased in size. Provided, however, this section shall not apply to signs prohibited under subsection 20.960.030 of this chapter. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
The provisions of this chapter shall not be construed as relieving or limiting in any way the responsibility or liability of any person erecting or owning any sign for personal injury or property damage resulting from the placement of a sign, or resulting from the negligence or willful acts of such person, its agents, employees, or workmen in the construction, maintenance, repair or removal of any sign erected in accordance with a permit issued hereunder. Nor shall it be construed as imposing upon the City or its officers or employees any responsibility or liability by reason of the approval or disapproval of any signs, materials, or devices under the provisions of this chapter. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
All existing legally erected signs which are rendered nonconforming by the adoption of this chapter must comply with structural and material Code requirements of the Uniform Sign Code and the City Adopted Building Code at the time of any replacement, an alteration, or modification over and above routine maintenance. (Ord. M-4034, Added, 12/03/2012, Sec 37)
All decisions by the Building Official concerning signs which involve questions of methods of construction or suitability of materials shall be subject to appeal to the Building-Fire Codes Board of Appeals pursuant to the provisions of VMC 17.08.040. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
See Section 20.985 Vision Clearance. (Ord. M-4034, Renumbered, 12/03/2012, Sec 39; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Repealed by Ord. M-4289.
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
Purpose. It is the intent and purpose of these provisions to implement the recycling and waste management policies of the city and to support the goals, priorities, and strategies of the Clark County and State of Washington Solid Waste Management Plans. Additionally, the purpose of these regulations is to facilitate the delivery of efficient, safe and convenient refuse and recycling services to facility occupants using collection receptacles, vehicles and technologies offered through the city’s contracted or licensed service providers. Facility designs must incorporate adequate storage space for both solid waste and recyclables and shall provide for a serviceable and accessible on-site location(s) and/or enclosures to temporarily store these materials between scheduled collection days. (Ord. M-4402 § 3(DD), 2023; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Chapter applicability. This chapter shall apply to new multifamily residential buildings containing five or more units and nonresidential construction projects that are subject to site plan review, as governed by Chapter 20.270 VMC. (Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Storage area criteria. The amount of solid waste and recyclable storage area required is based on the predominant use(s) of the building, i.e., residential, office, retail, educational/institutional, commercial/industrial or other. If a building has more than one of the uses listed in this section, and that use occupies 20 percent or less of the gross floor area of the building, the floor area occupied by that use shall be counted toward the floor area of the predominant use(s). If a building has more than one of the uses listed in this section, and that use occupies more than 20 percent of the gross floor area of the building, then the storage area requirement for the whole building shall be the sum of the requirement for the area of each use.
B. For multiple uses. Storage areas for multiple uses on a single site may be combined and shared.
C. Storage standards. Storage shall be provided consistent with the following:
1. Multi-unit residential buildings containing five or more units shall provide a minimum storage area using this formula:
Number of units × 32 gallons = Total weekly storage volume for garbage
Number of units × 48 gallons = Total weekly storage volume for recycling
Number of units × 8 gallons = Total weekly storage volume for glass
Depending on the number of units, the total volume needed for each stream of waste can be calculated and the number and size of carts or containers determined. Mixed recycling is collected in 95-gallon recycling carts. Glass is collected in 64-gallon carts. Each storage area must provide for collection of both garbage and recycling with space to walk between the containers.
Mixed recycling or cardboard containers and cages, with a standard size of three or four cubic yards (606 gallons), can be planned for accommodating a portion of the required recycling storage for these commodities.
For recycling, determine the number of mixed carts needed by dividing total weekly storage requirements by 95; determine the number of glass recycling carts needed by dividing total weekly storage requirements by 64.
Complexes with less than 20 units are encouraged to include space for a recycling container large enough to accommodate flattened cardboard boxes (typically a three-yard or four-yard container). Complexes larger than 20 units are required to include space for a three- or four-yard recycling container large enough to accommodate flattened cardboard boxes.
Large apartment complexes sometimes utilize a centralized garbage compactor(s) instead of or in coordination with more distributed garbage containers. Compactors are intended for commercial and industrial use by trained personnel and should not be the container that residents use directly for disposal of their household garbage.
Property owners/managers must still provide convenient recycling locations accessible to residents.
Recycling roll carts are normally co-located with the garbage collection containers, rather than with the compactor, to improve recycling convenience and participation. Containers larger than four cubic yards do not have wheels, so it is necessary to allow sufficient space so they can be emptied without being rolled out. No solid waste or recyclables collecting shall be done in any residential zone before 6:30 a.m. or after 6:30 p.m. (VMC 6.12.130).
Maximum distance from residential unit to closest garbage/recycling enclosure shall be no more than 150 feet.
2. Nonresidential buildings shall provide a minimum storage area of 100 square feet plus:
a. Office: four square feet per 1,000 square feet of gross floor area (GFA);
b. Retail: 10 square feet per 1,000 square feet of GFA;
c. Educational/institutional: four square feet per 1,000 square feet of GFA; or
d. Other: four square feet per 1,000 square feet of GFA.
3. Large developments or single buildings utilizing a compactor for garbage shall plan for the size of concrete pad appropriate for the equipment being installed and the volume of waste and recycling to be generated, plus allocate additional space for containers for materials not compacted.
4. Storage area space size and area configuration needs shall be determined based on an assessment of how similar facilities meet their waste disposal and recycling needs.
5. Service agreements between the building owner and the service provider may be required if proposed methods or technologies used to manage waste are atypical or unproven. (Ord. M-4402 § 3(DD), 2023; Ord. M-4147 § 4, 2015; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Location. Required storage areas for solid waste and recyclable materials shall comply with the following standards:
1. The storage area(s) for source-separated recyclable materials in multi-unit residential complexes shall be at the same locations(s) as storage areas for residential mixed solid waste.
2. Indoor and outdoor storage shall comply with city adopted building and uniform fire code requirements.
3. Storage area space requirements can be satisfied with a single location or multiple locations, and can combine both interior and exterior locations. Storage areas shall be no farther than 150 feet from each unit and be easily accessed by users and maintenance personnel.
4. Outdoor storage areas can be located within interior side yard or rear yard areas. Outdoor storage areas shall not be located within a required front yard setback or in a yard adjacent to a public right-of-way or private street easement, except alleys, unless no alternative location is possible. Outdoor storage areas shall not be located in a side or rear yard setback that abuts property that is not within the same development; i.e., impacts of the location on neighboring properties is an important consideration. Every effort should be made to locate outdoor garbage and recycling areas so as to minimize their impacts on neighboring properties. When a single-family home is converted to an office, the business owners are encouraged to continue roll cart garbage service instead of container service to minimize the noise impacts on their neighbors.
5. Exterior storage areas shall address both user safety/security and aesthetic considerations.
6. Exterior storage areas can be located in a parking area if the proposed use provides at least the minimum number of parking spaces required per the requirements of Chapter 20.945 VMC, Parking and Loading, after deducting the area used for storage and access.
7. The storage area shall be accessible for collection vehicles and located so it will not obstruct pedestrian or vehicle traffic movement on the site or on public streets or sidewalks adjacent to the site.
B. Design standards.
1. The dimensions of the storage area shall accommodate containers consistent with current methods of local collection and allow for pedestrian (driver and residents) access between containers. Plans shall show footprints of all intended receptacles using dimensions from city-provided solid waste receptacle standards. The preferred recycling receptacles for resident use are roll carts versus recycling containers. Roll carts are more easily accessed by residents and help to prevent confusion/contamination with garbage.
2. Repealed by Ord. M-4402.
3. Exterior storage areas shall be enclosed by a screen comprised of a sight-obscuring wall, fence and/or vegetation. For multifamily tenant access, a person door, gate, or walkway separate from the service gate or door is required. Service gate(s) for haulers shall be capable of being secured in closed and open positions of 90 degrees or greater.
4. Storage containers shall be clearly labeled to indicate the type of materials accepted.
5. Where electrical connections or engineered structures and surfaces are required to support the utilization of compactors or other storage and handling equipment, these shall be designed according to the applicable codes.
C. Access standards.
1. Access to storage areas can be limited for security reasons. However, the storage area shall be accessible to users at convenient times of the day, and to collection service personnel on the day and approximate time they are scheduled to provide collection service.
2. Storage areas shall be designed to be easily accessible to collection trucks and equipment, considering paving, grade and vehicle access. Where direct truck access to a storage area is not possible, the grade and ramp design shall consider the weights and size of containers that can reasonably and safely be managed for roll-out to an accessible truck loading position. If the collector is expected to move compacted containers larger than two cubic yards, mechanized equipment such as motorized pushcart must be provided for efficient transferring of receptacles and to promote worker safety.
3. Storage areas shall be accessible to collection vehicles without requiring backing out of a driveway onto a public street. If only a single access is available to the storage area, adequate turning radius shall be provided to allow collection vehicles to safely exit the site in a forward motion. All circulation and turnaround designs must meet the requirements of VMC 11.80.070 and the Transportation Standard Details and be feasible using city-provided solid waste truck turning modeling templates and truck specifications. Collection vehicles shall be able to circulate the development and service receptacles with minimal backing required. (Ord. M-4402 § 3(DD), 2023; Ord. M-4147 § 4, 2015; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that development or redevelopment on a site will not impede visibility of operators of motor vehicles using the City’ s street system. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Conditional sight obstructions. Nothing in this title shall be deemed to permit a sight obstruction at a street intersection or service drive interfering with the view of the operation of motor vehicles on the streets to such an extent as to constitute a traffic hazard.
B. Provisions with precedence. The provisions of this Section shall take precedence over any building and parking setbacks, except in the City Center (CX) and the Heights (HX) districts where the city transportation manager may authorize lesser requirements upon a finding that the public health, safety and welfare will not be adversely impacted.
C. Provisions for established vision area. There shall be no sight obstruction between 30" and 10' above the street grade within the triangular vision clearance area established as follows:
1. Street Intersection. In the case of a street intersection, or street and alley intersection, two sides of this triangle are lot lines measured 20' from their intersection, and the third side is a line across the corner of the lot joining the extremities of the other two sides. See Figure 20.985-1.
2. Commercial Driveways and Private Streets. In the case of service drives, a triangle whose base extends 30' along the street right-of-way line in both directions from the centerline of the service drive with the apex of the triangle 30' into the property on the centerline of said service drive. See Figure 20.985-2.
3. Residential Driveways. In the case of a private driveway, two sides of the triangle are measured 7' from the intersection of the right-of-way line and edge of the driveway, one side extending up the driveway and the other along the public right-of-way. The third side of the triangle is a line connecting the extremities of the other two sides. See Figure 20.985-3.
a. Residential Driveways on Alleys. In the case of private driveways on an alley, this section shall not apply.
Figure 20.985-1. Street Intersection

Figure 20.985-2. Commercial Driveways and Private Streets

Figure 20.985-3. Residential Driveways

(Ord. M-4341 § 3 (Exh. B), 2021; Ord. M-3922 § 45, 2009; Ord. M-3840 § 47, 2007; Ord. M-3701 § 37, 2005; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Development Standards
* Editor's Note: Because a work plan for related studies has been developed, interim zoning ordinance M-4517 shall be in effect for one year following October 13, 2025, or as otherwise renewed in accordance with RCW 36.70A.390.
* Editor's Note: Because a work plan for related studies has been developed, interim zoning ordinance M-4517 shall be in effect for one year following October 13, 2025, or as otherwise renewed in accordance with RCW 36.70A.390.
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
Purpose. The purpose of this chapter is to provide the development standards by which accessory structures are regulated to assure (1) that these clearly remain subordinate and incidental to the primary use and buildings on the same lot; and (2) in combination with primary buildings do not result in undue crowding, restriction of access, or other adverse impacts on the site and surrounding property. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Detached accessory buildings. A detached building, accessory to a single family or duplex residence, may be constructed under one of the following criteria:
1. Overall A detached building, accessory to a single family or duplex residence, may be constructed according to the requirements and regulations for a principal building in the zone which it is located, e.g., total lot coverage, setbacks, building height, etc., except the accessory structure shall be located behind the front elevation of the primary structure.
2. Additional Provisions for smaller buildings within setbacks. A detached building, accessory to a single family or duplex residence, may be constructed within the rear and/or side setbacks provided:
a. The detached accessory structure does not exceed 120 square feet in floor area and used for tool and storage sheds, play houses, or greenhouse and hothouses, and similar uses.
b. No portion of the detached accessory building shall exceed 8' in height above grade, to roof peak.
c. The detached accessory building shall not cover more than 50% of a required rear and/or side yard setback area.
d. The nearest wall of the detached accessory building must be located a minimum of 6' from the wall of any building. Eaves of adjacent buildings must be at least 4' apart.
e. Detached accessory buildings, are subject to the Building Code provisions of Title 17.
f. The detached accessory structure shall be located behind the front elevation of the primary structure.
B. Prior to primary structure completion. Accessory buildings shall not be permitted prior to the completion of the primary building/structure and/or permitted use on the same lot, or in the event that the primary building/structure/use ceases to exist. (Ord. M-4066 § 3, 12/16/2013; Effective 01/16/2014; Ord. M-3840 § 39, 08/06/2007; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
Purpose. To provide flexibility in the construction of certain private improvements associated with approved developments, this chapter establishes the circumstances under which the Planning Official may allow a delay in construction of certain required private improvements by use of an escrow or other form of security acceptable to the City to assure that such private improvements are constructed within a specified timeline and in accordance with approved standards. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. The Planning Official may delay construction of certain required private improvements beyond certificate of occupancy provided it is determined that good cause has been shown by the applicant. Where mitigation for environmental impacts has not been completed prior to the City final permit approval (such as final plat approval or final building inspection) and is therefore required as a condition of final permit approval, good cause shall be deemed to exist.
B. Guarantee for provision of private improvements. On all projects where private improvements are required, the Planning Official may require an escrow or other form of security acceptable to the City in an amount not less than 100% of the cost of the improvements that secures and provides for the actual construction and installation of the improvements required as condition(s) of approval for the development. The use of escrow or other form of security shall be limited to:
1. Approved private transportation system improvements, including sidewalks and streetlights, provided emergency access improvements are constructed on-site as needed;
2. Approved private stormwater collection and management facilities;
3. Approved landscaping and trees to meet minimum on-site tree density or landscaping requirements, including installation and maintenance costs.
4. Approved fences and walls.
5. Approved mitigation for environmental impacts, including but not limited to, construction, maintenance, and monitoring to ensure that mitigation is fully functional.
C. Requirements.
1. The applicant shall request approval of an extension on the construction of private improvements listed in Subsection B above by means of a Type I permit, pursuant to Chapter 20.210.040. Such request shall state the remaining improvements not yet constructed, the reasons for a requested delay, and requested timeline for improvements to be made. The request shall be accompanied by a draft escrow agreement or other security acceptable to the City.
2. Each escrow or other form of security acceptable to the City request shall include the following:
a. A scheduled cost breakdown for project work to be completed presented as Exhibit A, an escrow agreement shall not be accepted without an approved unit cost breakdown for the remaining improvements.
b. The draft escrow agreement in a form provided by the City.
c. An irrevocable license signed by the owner of subject property to run with the property which provides the City with the right to allow the employees, agents or contractors of the City to go on the subject property for the purpose of inspecting and, if necessary, doing the work or making the improvements covered by the escrow or other form of security acceptable to the City.
d. Any other documents deemed necessary by the City.
e. Applicable processing fee as contained in Chapter 20.180 VMC Fees.
4. Failure to carry out agreement. In the event the applicant fails to carry out provisions of the agreement and the City has un-reimbursed costs or expenses resulting from such failure, the escrow or other form of security acceptable to the City shall be forfeited and the money shall be paid to the City to defray its costs. If the amount of the escrow or other form of security acceptable to the City exceeds the cost and expense incurred by the City, the City shall release the remainder, and if the amount of the escrow or other form of security acceptable to the City is less than the cost and expense incurred by the City, the applicant shall be liable to the City for the difference.
D. Release of escrow or security. Upon completion of required improvements, the applicant shall request in writing that the Planning Official release all or a portion of the funds held in escrow. Such improvements shall be inspected and accepted as complete by the City prior to the release of any such escrow funds, or portion thereof. (Ord. M-3931 § 29, 11/02/2009; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
Purpose. The Planning Official has the authority to make exceptions to and interpretations of the provisions in this Title per the process outlined in Chapter 20.255 VMC. From time to time, the Planning Official is directed to codify those exceptions and interpretations that have broad applicability. The purpose of this chapter is to provide a place where these interpretations can be codified. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Pre-existing legal lots. If any lot, legally platted at the time of its creation, or the aggregate of such contiguous lots or land parcels held in single ownership has an area or dimension less than required for the zoning district in which the property is located, the lot or aggregate holdings may be occupied by any permitted use in the district subject to compliance with all other requirements of the district including the minimum setbacks thereof; provided, however, that the use of a lot in a residential district which has an area deficiency shall be limited to one single-family dwelling. All lots shall have a minimum of 20 feet of access to a public or private street, or access easement. Single ownership of abutting parcels shall not affect the right of the Planning Official to approve development of the single lot that has an area deficiency. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
Exceptions. Except for the Vision and Airport Height Overlay District, height limitations set forth elsewhere in this Title shall not apply to the following:
A. Barns, silos, water towers and tanks, or other farm buildings and structures, provided they are not less than 50 feet from every lot line; and
B. Chimneys, church spires, belfries, cupolas, domes, smokestacks, flagpoles, grain elevators, cooling towers, solar energy collectors, monuments, fire house towers, masts, aerials, elevator shafts, street lights, power or communication distribution lines, and other similar projections; (Ord. M-4034 § 28, 12/03/2012; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Projections into required yards. Certain architectural features may project into required yards or courts as follows:
1. Cornices, canopies, eaves, belt courses, bay windows, sills or other similar architectural features, or fireplaces not including floor extensions may extend no more than 24 inches into any required yard area.
2. Fire escapes, open-uncovered porches, balconies, or outside stairways may extend no more than 18 inches into any required side, side street, or rear yard setback, and no more than six feet into any required front yard setback. Open porches, decks or stoops not exceeding 18 inches in height may extend no closer than 18 inches to any lot line.
B. Exceptions to front yard requirements.
1. If there are legally established structures on both abutting lots with front yards less than the required depth for the district, the front yard for the lot need not exceed the average front yard of the abutting structures.
2. If there is a legally established structure on one abutting lot with a front yard less than the required depth for the district, the front yard need not exceed a depth of halfway between the depth of the front yard on the abutting lot and the required front yard depth.
C. Flag lots. The setbacks for flag lots may be reduced upon review and approval of the planning official; provided, that no setback is less than five feet, and the dwelling is not less than 25 feet from any other dwelling.
D. Exception for existing setbacks. Additions to legally established building floor area may be continued along existing setback lines so long as a minimum setback of three feet is maintained. This provision does not allow additional building height. (Ord. M-4105 § 3, 11/17/2014; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Conditions under which permitted. The following conditions shall exist before any building permit is issued for zero lot line development:
A. Side-yard setbacks. The setback on the adjacent lot to the zero setback side yard lot shall be either zero or at least 5 feet; for exceptions, see Section 20.902.020 VMC.
B. Covenants. Covenants running with the land, approved by the City Attorney, which guarantee that the opposite side yard setback of not less than 5 feet shall be kept perpetually free of permanent obstructions (for exception, see Section 20.902.020), shall be filed with the deed(s) or noted on a plat.
C. Building Walls.
1. The building wall on the zero-foot yard setback shall be constructed of window-free, fire resistive construction per the Building Code standards of Title 17, no portion of which shall project over any property line. The construction shall be subject to review by the Building Official.
2. Covenants running with the land, approved by the City Attorney, shall convey a 4-four-foot maintenance easement with a 1-1/2-foot encroachment into the easement provision, in order to permit variations in design from the adjoining lot. No windows shall be allowed along this wall in any case.
3. Zero lot line (common-wall) construction may be permitted, provided adjoining walls are fire- resistive and constructed according to the standards of sound transmission, per the Building Code standards of Title 17. Common walls must be attached a minimum 60% of the length of the entire building wall.
D. Exception. Zero lot line development standards do not apply to free-standing fences and/or walls that are not directly connected to a roof structure. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Purpose. The purpose of this chapter is to establish standards for fences, walls and sound walls constructed in the City of Vancouver. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Applicability. This section applies to all fences and walls not a part of a building, including retaining walls and sound walls constructed in the City of Vancouver. Special standards are established for gated access communities in Chapter 20.914. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Land Use Permits. Type I site plan approval is required for any sound wall. No land use permit is required for other wall or fence; however the standards of this chapter shall apply, unless exempted by VMC 20.912.040.
B. Building Permit. Building permits are required for all fences over 6' in height. Building permits are also required for walls 4' or over and for walls which support additional weight from a building or parking area. (Ord. M-4354 § 3(H), 2021; Ord. M-4034 § 29, 2012; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. This chapter does not apply to fences or walls 30" or less in height, measured from grade, unless such a wall is structurally supporting additional weight from a building or parking area.
B. Hedges located in a vision clearance triangle must be maintained at a height of 30" or less measured from street grade. All other hedges within private property are not regulated by this title. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Fences and walls must be wholly contained on the applicant’s property, or located on a property line when both abutting property owners are in agreement.
B. Fences and walls must not be placed in any manner to hinder access to an easement.
C. In residential zones, fences that are streetward of the front wall of the house shall be limited to 5' in height, so long as the top 1' is constructed to be at least 80% open to views (e.g., wrought iron, chainlink, etc.). In other required side, street side and rear yard setbacks areas, solid fences shall be limited to 6' in height. See Exception for sound walls at 20.912.080.
D. In commercial and industrial zones, fences within the required setback area are limited to 6' in height. See Exception for sound walls at 20.912.080.
E. Land Use Permits cannot be issued for fences or walls that are in the public right-of-way.
F. Fences and walls shall not interfere with vision clearance at an intersection of roads or driveways. Fences and walls under 30" in height are generally allowed in a vision clearance triangle unless the topography causes a restriction of clear vision. Fences that are 80% open (such as wrought iron and chain link) are allowed in a vision clearance triangle when maintained in a manner that is clear of vegetation that could restrict clear vision. (Ord. M-4147 § 4, 12/07/2015; Ord. M-4105 § 3, 11/17/2014-Effective 12/17/14; Ord. M-3959 § 44, 07/19/2010; Ord. M-3922 § 43, 07/06/2009; Ord. M-3847 § 13, 11/19/2007; Ord. M-3840 § 40, 08/06/2007; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Barbed wire, razor wire and electrically charged fences are not permitted as accessory to residential uses.
B. Within commercial and industrial or other nonresidential properties, barbed wire and razor wire are only allowed as the top to a security fence accessory to permitted uses. In these cases, 2' of such wire can be attached to the top of a 6' wall or fence, as long as it is vertical or angled in toward the enclosure.
C. Barbed wire, razor wire, and electrically charged fences are prohibited in the City Center (CX) District. (Ord. M-3701 § 30, 05/02/2005; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
A. The city’s planning official or the city’s hearings examiner has the authority to approve walls and fences on the perimeters of developments that are incorporated as a design element that is part of a planned development or subdivision design. The planning official and hearing examiner can exceed the standards of this chapter, except those standards for vision clearance. In all cases the planning official and hearing examiner shall require the recording of appropriate provisions (covenants or similar methods) for maintenance to be assumed by the property owners or association of owners. (Ord. M-4354 § 3(I), 2021; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
When sound walls are required to mitigate sound impacts for properties located adjacent to a railroad right-of-way, state highway, or where residential abuts commercial or industrial properties, the Planning Official may approve a sound wall which exceeds the height limit of 20.912.050(C) up to maximum of 8' if the following criteria are met:
A. Landscaping. Exterior walls facing a street or highway shall be landscaped with groundcover, shrubs, vines, mounds and trees such that at least 50% of the height of the wall shall be screened from the adjacent public street within 2 years.
B. Type of Wall. Walls shall be constructed of graffiti-resistant solid brick or other material that requires minimum maintenance. A textured surface treatment that is compatible with and appropriate to the area for which it is proposed shall be provided.
C. Walls between properties. All property owners shall agree on the height and type of wall prior to approval from the City.
D. Height of Walls. Walls may exceed 8' in height, to a maximum of 12', provided they are adjacent to a public right-of-way as outlined above, and based on an approved noise study prepared by a licensed acoustical engineer that demonstrates the additional height is necessary in order to reduce noise levels at the property line to 65 dBA. An approved noise study shall include an analysis of potential impacts of sound transfer as a result of construction of a proposed wall.
E. The Planning Official may deny a request for a sound wall if it is determined that the proposed height and/or materials of the wall would not be in keeping with the visual character of surrounding properties, or that such placement would create a threat to public health and safety. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
Purpose. The standards for Gated Access are provided here as a Type I review as authorized at 20.210.020(B)(1). These standards are intended to implement safe ingress and egress while promoting visual attractiveness and site security. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Land use permit required. A land use permit is required for any gate across access a driveway, unless exempted by 20.914.020B.
Exemptions. The permit and development standards of 20.914 shall not apply for the following: any commercial or industrial development where the gate will remain open during business hours, or any residential gate for secondary driveway to be used exclusively for access to RV, boat or similar vehicle parking area.
Development standards. A detailed site plan shall be submitted with the Type I application which depicts the access point(s) and demonstrates all of the following required elements:
1. Stacking area. Each access point shall show an area of sufficient length and width to safely stack traffic coming onto the property from the adjacent roadway. Transportation Services shall determine the length of the stacking area based on the adjacent roadway type and design configuration. A parking area shall be provided to the right of the entry lane to accommodate visitors not able to open the gate.
2. Entrance/Exit Design. Adequate vision clearance shall be provided so that motorists leaving a gated community have a clear view of the sidewalk on either side of the exit, and so that approaching pedestrians have a clear view of any approaching vehicle. Gated community entrances and exits shall be designed to achieve travel speeds not to exceed 5 miles per hour, and shall require a vehicle stop directly prior to crossing the street sidewalk. Entrance and exit areas shall be designed so that vehicles approaching or leaving the gated community can queue to enter/exit the traffic stream without blocking the sidewalk.
3. Turnaround feature. Each gate access point shall have an area that allows traffic to safely maneuver a turnaround when the gate is in closed position.
4. Lane width inside the gate. Fire and emergency access vehicles require passing room within the development. Twenty feet of unobstructed driving surface is required on the interior side of the access point and gate.
5. Emergency vehicle access required. Each project will require the applicant to produce a confirmation of approval from the Fire Marshal that indicates that the design of the gate(s) meets the Fire Marshal’s requirements for emergency entry. The Fire Marshal’s written approval shall be submitted with this application.
6. No encroachment into publicly owned right-of-way. The gates, operating equipment and fencing shall be located wholly within the private portion of the property. The property line shall be clearly indicated on the site plan. Swing gates are not allowed to encroach into the public right-of-way. The drives, streets and lanes inside a gated community are to remain private.
7. Pedestrian Access. Separate pedestrian access from driving lanes. Each access point shall have a pedestrian access and walkway that is separate from the driving lanes and links directly to the public sidewalk. Pedestrian walkways shall meet all standards for accessibility required by the Americans with Disabilities Act.
8. Lighting. Lighting fixtures shall be established and maintained at the access points to provide vehicle and pedestrian safety. The required lighting shall be automatically controlled to turn on during the hours of darkness.
9. Vision Clearance. Each access point shall demonstrate vision clearance as per 20.985 VMC.
10. Gate Material. The moving portion of the gate shall be constructed of material that is at least 80 percent open. Typically, wrought iron or other decorative material is used.
11. Gate opening width. Each gate must open to a minimum width of 15 feet or as required by the Fire Marshal. (Ord. M-4034 § 30, 12/03/2012; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
Reasons for impact fees. It is the purpose of this chapter to ensure that adequate facilities are available to serve new growth and development, and to promote orderly growth and development by requiring that new development pay a proportionate share of the cost of new facilities needed to serve growth. In addition, it is also the purpose of this chapter to ensure that impact fees are imposed through established procedures and criteria so that specific developments do not pay arbitrary fees or duplicate fees for the same impact. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Uniform applicability. This chapter shall be uniformly applicable to development that occurs within a designated service area or overlay service areas.
B. For pre-development permit issuance. No building permit shall be issued for a development in a designated service area or overlay service area as defined in this chapter unless the impact fee is calculated and paid pursuant to this chapter.
C. For new development requiring a building permit the impact fee(s) shall be calculated at the time of building permit application. Impact fees shall be due and payable at the time of the building permit issuance unless deferred, as provided in VMC 20.915.075 and 20.915.076. Notwithstanding the foregoing, all impact fees shall be recalculated for building permit applications that have not been issued within one year.
D. For development not requiring a building permit. For development not requiring a building permit (e.g., approval of a change in use of a building or land), the impact fee shall be calculated and imposed at the time of the associated development approval.
E. For manufactured home parks. For manufactured home parks, the impact fee shall be calculated and imposed at the time of site plan approval.
F. All impact fees shall be calculated using the impact fee rates in effect at the time of calculation. (Ord. M-4512 § 2, 2025; Ord. M-4340 § 2, 2021; Ord. M-4325 § 3, 2020; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. General. Service areas, which may vary by type of public facility, are established as shown on the Park Impact Fee Technical Document and Vancouver Transportation Impact Fees Program Technical Document, which are incorporated herein by reference.
B. Service areas and fees. Such areas will provide a nexus between those paying the fees and receiving the benefits to ensure that those developments paying impact fees receive substantial benefits.
C. Establishment of overlay service areas. Overlay service areas may be established for system improvements identified in the capital facilities plan which are:
1. Designed to serve geographic areas whose boundaries are not generally contiguous with established service areas; or
2. Designed to serve more than one established service area; or
3. Where a system improvement is designed to serve an established service area, or service areas, but is located partly or entirely outside of the city or urban growth area, and provides a substantial benefit to the assigned service area. Properties within this type of overlay service area are not subject to city impact fees to the extent those properties are outside the city.
D. Factors affecting service areas. Additional or revised service areas may be designated by the city council upon consideration of the following factors:
1. The Comprehensive Plan;
2. Standards for adequate public facilities incorporated in the capital facilities plan;
3. The projections for full development as permitted by land use ordinances and timing of development;
4. The need for and cost of un-programmed capital improvements necessary to support projected development; and
5. Such other factors as the city council may deem relevant.
E. Service areas and urban growth boundaries. Service areas adjoining an urban growth boundary shall automatically be adjusted to conform to any change in such boundary. (Ord. M-4274 § 1, 2019; Ord. M-4181 § 1, 2016; Ord. M-4107 § 2, 2014; Ord. M-3933 § 3, 2009; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Formula. The impact fee component for roads shall be calculated using the following formula:
TIF = FxTxA
1. "TIF" means the traffic impact component of the total development impact fee.
2. "F" means the traffic impact fee rate per vehicle trip in dollar amounts, for each service area. Such rate shall be established in the Traffic Impact Fee Program Technical Document, incorporated herein by this reference, for each service area by estimating the cost of anticipated growth-related roadway projects divided by the projected number of growth-related trips within that service area. Between major program updates, the calculated per trip fee will be adjusted annually to account for inflation using the Engineering News Record Construction Cost Index for Seattle, and as outlined in the Traffic Impact Fee Program Technical Document.
3. "T" means the trips generated by a proposed development and calculated according to the Traffic Impact Fee Program Technical Document. The calculation of “T” described in the Traffic Impact Fee Program Technical Document includes, for some retail commercial land uses, a “business enhancement factor (BEF)” adjustment. Refer to the Traffic Impact Fee Program Technical Document for land uses eligible for the BEF. In the absence of a land use code precisely fitting the development proposal, the director of public works or designee shall select the most similar code and may make appropriate adjustments to the trip equation applicable thereto. In selecting the appropriate land use code and in making adjustments thereto, the Review Authority shall be guided by the most recent edition of the Trip Generation Manual, Institute of Transportation Engineers.
4. "A" means an adjustment for the portion of anticipated additional tax revenues resulting from a development which is prorated to system improvements contained in the capital facilities plan. Such adjustment for traffic impacts is determined to be 15%, so that "A" equals 85%. (Ord. M-4107 § 3, 2014; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Formula. The impact fee component for parks shall be calculated using the following formula:
PIF = F × U
1. “PIF” means the parks impact component of the total development impact fee.
2. “F” means the parks impact fee rate per unit of housing, either single-family or multifamily residential, as applicable, for each service area. Such rate shall be established in the parks impact fee program technical document, incorporated herein by this reference, for each service area by estimating the cost of anticipated growth-related parks projects. Between major program updates, the calculated per unit fee will be adjusted annually pursuant to the methodology set forth in VMC 3.08.100 and as outlined in the parks impact fee program technical document.
3. “U” means the number of units, either single-family or multifamily, whichever is applicable, consistent with a proposed development.
B. Current park impact fee rates shall be as set forth in Table 20.915.050-1:
Table 20.915.050-1.
Year | Park District | Single-Family (SF) | Multifamily (MF) |
|---|---|---|---|
January 1, 2023 | A, B, C | $4,757 | $3,476 |
January 1, 2024 | A, B, C | $5,232 | $3,824 |
January 1, 2025 | A, B, C | $5,756 | $4,206 |
January 1, 2026 | A, B, C | $6,130 | $4,480 |
C. At least one copy of the park impact fee technical document adopted by the city council, including the current park impact fee schedule as calculated thereunder, shall be filed in the office of the city clerk for use and examination by the public. (Ord. M-4388 § 2, 2022; Ord. M-4376 § 10, 2022; Ord. M-4363 § 9, 2022; Ord. M-4319 § 3, 2020; Ord. M-4274 § 2, 2019; Ord. M-4181 § 2, 2016; Ord. M-3933 § 4, 2009; Ord. M-3663 § 22, 2004; Ord. M-3653 §§ 3, 5, 2004; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Plan adoption. In order for the city to collect school impact fees on behalf of a school district, said school district’s capital facilities plan shall be adopted as a portion of the city of Vancouver’s comprehensive plan in accordance with the provisions of this section.
B. Plan submittal. In conjunction with mandated comprehensive plan updates, a school district requesting impact fees shall submit to the city planning commission a capital facilities plan adopted by the school board and consisting of the following elements:
1. A standard of service which identifies the program year, class size by grade span, number of classrooms, types of facilities, and other factors identified by the school district.
2. The district’s capacity over the next six years based upon an inventory of the district’s facilities either existing or under construction and the district’s standard of service.
3. A forecast of future needs for school facilities based upon the district’s enrollment projections.
4. At least a six-year financing plan component, updated as necessary to maintain at least a six-year forecast period, for financing needed school facilities within projected funding levels.
5. Application of the formula set out in subsection F of this section based upon information contained in the capital facilities plan. Separate fees shall be calculated for single-family and multifamily types of dwelling units, based upon the student generation rates determined by the district for each type of dwelling unit. If insufficient information is available for a district to calculate a multifamily student generation rate, a county-wide average shall be utilized. For purposes of this chapter, manufactured homes and each unit of a duplex shall be treated as single-family dwellings.
C. Planning Commission review. The planning commission shall review a school district’s capital facilities plan or plan update in accordance with the provisions of this subsection.
1. Factors. The planning commission shall consider:
a. Whether the district’s forecasting system for enrollment projections appears reasonable and reliable;
b. Whether the anticipated level of state and voter-approved funding appears reasonable and historically reliable;
c. Whether the district appropriately applied the formula set out in subsection F of this section.
2. Public hearing. In the event the district or the planning commission on its own motion proposes to modify the school impact fee, the planning commission shall not make its recommendation until holding a duly advertised public hearing on the proposal.
3. Recommendation. The planning commission may request a school district to review and to resubmit its capital facilities plan or update consistent with the provisions of this section. The planning commission shall submit an annual report to the board for each school district for which school impact fees are collected.
D. Council action. No new or revised school impact fees shall be effective until adopted by the council following a duly advertised public hearing to consider the school district’s capital facilities plan or plan update.
E. Interlocal agreement. School impact fees shall not become effective until the school district has entered into an interlocal agreement provided for in VMC 20.915.100.
F. Formula. The impact fee component for schools shall be separately calculated for each participating school district using the following formula:
SIF = { (CS × SF) − (SM) − (TC) − (FC) } × A
1. SIF means the school component of the total development impact fee.
2. CS means the cost of the improvements for each type of facility listed in the school district’s capital facilities plan less the cost to cure existing overcapacity divided by the capacity of the improvement. Type of facility means elementary school, middle school and high school. The development cost by service area is shown in Table 20.915.060-1.
3. SF means student factor. The student factor is the number of students typically generated from one residential unit for each type of school facility.
4. SM means state match. State match is the amount received from the state toward school construction costs. The state match component of the formula is that amount representing the per student amount of state matching funds. This is calculated for each type of facility as: student factor times Boeckh Index (average annual construction cost of a school facility per square foot) times square-foot standard per student established by the Superintendent of Public Instruction times state match percentage (that percentage of the total cost of a school facility funded by state funds). The state match for each school district shall be calculated annually.
5. TC means tax credit. This is calculated as:
TC = ((1 + i)10 − 1) / (i(1 + i)10) × (AAV) × (SPTL)
a. AAV means the average assessed value for the dwelling per single family unit.
b. SPTL means the current school district capital property tax levy rate.
c. i means the current interest rate as stated in the Bond Buyer Twenty Bond General Obligation Bond index.
6. FC means facilities credit. This is the value of any improvements listed in a school district’s capital facilities plan provided by the developer.
7. A means an adjustment for the portion of anticipated additional tax revenues resulting from a development that is prorated to system improvements contained in the capital facilities plan. The adjustment for school impacts is determined to be 85 percent.
Table 20.915.060-1. School District Impact Fees
School District | Single-Family | Multifamily |
|---|---|---|
Battle Ground | $10,760 | $3,845 |
Camas | $6,650 | $6,650 |
Evergreen | $6,432 | $3,753 |
Vancouver | $2,786 | $2,486 |
(Ord. M-4402 § 3(Y), 2023; Ord. M-4289 § 4, 2019; Ord. M-4223 § 4, 2017; Ord. M-4147 § 4, 2015; Ord. M-3994 § 5, 2011; Ord. M-3959 § 45, 2010; Ord. M-3952 § 1, 2010; Ord. M-3951 § 1, 2010; Ord. M-3909 § 1, 2008; Ord. M-3854 § 1, 2007; Ord. M-3785 § 2, 2006; Ord. M-3736 § 1, 2006; Ord. M-3730 § 34, 2005; Ord. M-3663 § 23, 2004; Ord. M-3653 § 2, 2004; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. For residential and nonresidential development. The impact fee for a nonresidential development shall be computed by applying the traffic impact fee formula set out in VMC 20.915.040. The impact fee for a residential development shall be computed by applying the traffic impact fee, park impact fee and school impact fee formulae set out in VMC 20.915.050 and 20.915.060, combining the results; provided, that the school impact fee component shall not apply to housing which by restrictive covenant is exclusively for persons 62 years of age or older.
B. For mixed uses. If the development for which approval is sought contains a mix of uses, the impact fee must be separately calculated for each type of use.
C. Criteria to reduce or eliminate impact fees. An administrative appeal may be considered by the director of community development to reduce or eliminate impact fees by submittal of an application prior to the payment of fees. Appeals shall be reserved for unusual circumstances which make the standard impact fee as applied to the development unreasonable. Upon receipt of an application for any such appeal, the city shall distribute a written notice of appeal and a copy of the supporting studies and data required below to the office, department, or school district responsible for the applicable capital facilities for which the impact fee is imposed. The appeal must be supported by reasonable studies and data provided by the applicant showing that:
1. The formulae or method contained in VMC 20.915.040, 20.915.050 or 20.915.060 to calculate the fees do not accurately reflect the cost of system improvements that are reasonably related to the service demands and needs of a particular development; or
2. Such facility improvements will not reasonably benefit the proposed development.
3. The current development proposal implements a concomitant rezone agreement, development agreement or other development approval pursuant to which public facilities identified in the capital facilities plan were dedicated or constructed, and which are of benefit to the community at large and which fall within the definition of system improvements. The appellant shall have the burden of producing and presenting studies and data that clearly show the basis and substantiation of the appeal upon submittal. Appeals shall be reviewed by means of a Type I procedure, pursuant to VMC 20.210.020. Impact fees may be paid under protest in order to obtain a permit or approval of development activity. (Ord. M-4402 § 3(Y), 2023; Ord. M-4340 § 3, 2021; Ord. M-4172 § 1, 2016; Ord. M-4107 § 5, 2014; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Prior to issuance of single-family detached or attached residential building permits, an application may be submitted for deferral of payment of full impact fees until scheduling of final building inspection by the City. For these purposes “attached single-family” shall be limited to common-wall housing with no more than one unit per legal lot.
B. The amount of impact fees deferred shall be determined by the fees in effect at the time the applicant applies for a deferral. “Applicant” as defined in this section shall include an entity that controls the applicant, that is controlled by the applicant, or is under common control with the applicant.
C. An impact fee deferral application must be submitted for each parcel to be developed. This application shall include:
1. Administrative fees as specified under VMC 20.180.
2. A locally recorded impact fee deferral lien against the property involved, granted to the City of Vancouver in the amount of the deferral. The deed shall be signed by all owners of the property, with signatures acknowledged as required for a deed. The deed shall be binding on all successors, and subordinate to one mortgage for construction of the property granted by the impact fee deferral applicant.
3. The deferral period shall not exceed a period of 18 months from issuance of the building permit, at which time any deferred impact fees shall be due.
4. Upon receipt of all deferred impact fees, the City of Vancouver shall execute release of the lien for the property. The property owner at that time shall be responsible for recording the release, at their expense.
5. The City of Vancouver may institute foreclosure proceedings for unpaid impact fees due. For unpaid School Impact Fees, School Districts may also institute foreclosure proceedings if the City of Vancouver has not done so within 45 days after receiving notice from the District requesting initiation of such proceedings. (Ord. M-4172, Added, 08/15/2016, Sec 2)
A. Concurrent with the application for multi-family residential building permit, an application may be submitted for deferral of payment of traffic and park impact fees. If approved, eligible impact fees may be deferred until the payment deadline criteria provided in subsection C of this section. For these purposes “multi-family” shall be defined as a building or portion designed or used as a residence by three or more households and containing three or more dwelling units.
B. The amount of impact fees deferred shall be determined by the fees in effect at the time the applicant applies for a deferral subject to annual recalculation as provided in VMC 20.915.020(C). “Applicant” as defined in this title shall include an entity that controls the applicant, that is controlled by the applicant or is under common control with the applicant.
C. The impact fee payment deferral period shall terminate on the date that an application for inspection for temporary certificate occupancy, or final certificate occupancy (if no temporary certificate required), is submitted, or 36 months from issuance of the building permit, whichever event occurs first at which time any deferred impact fee shall be due. An application for deferral of impact fees under this section, or a deferral that has been approved prior to the issuance of a building permit, shall terminate upon expiration or denial of the concurrently submitted building permit application. The city may deny an application for temporary building occupancy inspection and withhold issuance of any building certificate occupancy permits until all deferred impact fees have been paid.
D. An impact fee deferral application must be submitted for each parcel to be developed. The deferral application shall include an impact fee deferral agreement and lien on forms provided by the city. The lien shall be recorded against the property, granted to the city of Vancouver in the amount of the deferral and shall be signed by all owners of the property, with signatures acknowledged as required for a property deed. The lien shall be binding on all successors, and subordinate to one deed of trust securing a mortgage for construction of the property granted by the impact fee deferral applicant.
E. Upon receipt of all deferred impact fees, the city of Vancouver shall execute release of the lien for the property. The property owner at that time shall be responsible for recording the release, at their expense.
F. The city of Vancouver may institute foreclosure proceedings for unpaid impact fees due.
G. School impact fees are excluded from this provision and are not eligible for deferral of payment. (Ord. M-4512 § 3, 2025)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Exemptions from impact fees. The following developments shall be exempt from the requirement for payment of impact fees: publicly operated elementary, middle, junior high and senior high schools, and administrative, maintenance and other facilities of a school district and facilities of an Educational Service District.
B. Exemption or waiver from impact fees for low-income housing pursuant to RCW 82.02.060(2). Pursuant to RCW 82.02.060(2), the review authority may grant a total or partial exemption or waiver from impact fees for housing developments containing up to three dwelling units and qualifying as low-income housing as defined in this chapter, to be owned and occupied by, or leased to, low-income persons. Requests for exemption and/or waiver for four or more dwelling units must be approved by the city council. No such impact fee exemption and/or waiver shall be granted for any low-income housing that has been granted a property tax exemption pursuant to Chapter 3.22 VMC, Multi-Family Tax Abatement. Any such exemption or waiver shall be subject to:
1. Provision being made for payment of the impact fee from public funds other than impact fee accounts; and
2. Adequate documentation that the housing meets appropriate standards regarding household income, rent levels, sales price, location, and number of units;
C. Alternative exemption from impact fees for low-income housing pursuant to RCW 82.02.060(3). Pursuant to RCW 82.02.060(3), the city council may grant an alternative exemption for low-income housing under this subsection. No such impact fee exemption and/or waiver shall be granted for any low income housing that has been granted a property tax exemption pursuant to Chapter 3.22 VMC, Multi-Family Tax Abatement
1. The city council may either:
a. Grant a partial exemption of not more than 80 percent of impact fees, in which case there is no requirement to pay the exempted portion of the fee from public funds other than impact fee accounts; or
b. Provide a full waiver, in which case the remaining percentage of the exempted fee must be paid from public funds other than impact fee accounts; and
2. Compliance with all of the requirements of subsection D of this section is required.
D. An exemption for low-income housing granted under subsection B or C of this section must comply with all of the following conditions:
1. The developer shall record a covenant with the Clark County auditor. The covenant must:
a. Prohibit using the property for any purpose other than for low-income housing.
b. Require that if the property is converted to a use other than for low-income housing, the property owner must pay the applicable impact fees in effect at the time of conversion.
c. Define low-income housing as housing for which the monthly housing expense is no greater than 30 percent of 80 percent of the median-family income adjusted for family size for Clark County, Washington, as reported by the United States Department of Housing and Urban Development.
2. When the city grants an exemption for low-income housing granted under subsection B or C of this section, it may not collect revenue lost through the granting of the exemption by increasing impact fees unrelated to the exemption.
3. A school district that receives school impact fees collected by the city must consent in writing prior to city approval of any exemption from school impact fees granted under subsection B or C of this section. Failure of a school district to provide consent in writing to the city within 30 days of the school district’s receipt of written request for approval from the city shall constitute disapproval of the requested exemption.
E. Reduction in traffic impact fees for qualifying businesses. To promote business development, the review authority may grant a reduction of traffic impact fees as specified in Table 20.915.080-1 below for businesses which meet all of the following requirements:
1. The business owner shall commit, through a development agreement approved by city council, to locate a number of new employees that coincides with the TIF incentive in Table 20.915.080-1. Such new employees shall locate to the city within the first year of the business obtaining an occupancy permit; and
2. The median salary of all company employees to be located shall, at a minimum, coincide with the specified percent of median individual income in Table 20.915.080-1. Median individual income shall be based on the most recent available information from U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development for the Portland-Vancouver MSA at the time of the development agreement approval; and
3. If the owner or developer of the property or building is not the business locating within the city, documentation shall be submitted to the city that satisfactorily demonstrates that the business received the benefit of the fee reduction rather than the owner or developer; and
4. The business shall provide the city with such documentation and access to records as needed to verify satisfaction of the foregoing requirements. In the event that the business fails to satisfy any of the requirements criteria, the business shall pay to the city the amount of the fee reduction together with interest at the statutory rate provided for at RCW 19.52.010 upon demand.
The city shall make provision for payment of the impact fee reduction to the transportation impact fee account from public funds other than impact fee accounts.
Table 20.915.080-1 Business Development TIF Incentive | |||
|---|---|---|---|
Median Salary of All Business Employees | Minimum Employees | TIF Benefit | |
1. | 200% of Median Individual Income | 200 | 25% TIF reduction, up to $100,000 |
2. | 150% of Median Individual Income | 250 | 25% TIF reduction, up to $100,000 |
3. | 125% of Median Individual Income | 300 | 25% TIF reduction, up to $100,000 |
4. | 200% of Median Individual Income | 400 | 50% TIF reduction, up to $200,000 |
5. | 150% of Median Individual Income | 500 | 50% TIF reduction, up to $200,000 |
6. | 125% of Median Individual Income | 600 | 50% TIF reduction, up to $200,000 |
This provision shall be operative until December 31, 2020, unless renewed by city council.
F. Criteria for calculating impact fees. The impact fee for an exempt or waived development shall be calculated as provided for in this chapter and paid with public funds; except that there is no requirement to pay the exempted portion of the fee from public funds other than impact fee account for a partial exemption of not more than 80 percent of impact fees that has been approved under subsection C of this section. Such payment may be made by including such amount(s) in the public share of system improvements undertaken within the applicable service area. If an impact fee(s) is waived, the review authority, pursuant to VMC 20.915.070, or state law may determine whether a public share-contribution or a reduced public-share contribution is required. (Ord. M-4340 § 4, 2021; Ord. M-4154 § 3, 2016; Ord. M-4108 § 1, 2014; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. For the developer. The developer shall be entitled to a credit against the applicable impact fee as follows:
1. The developer shall be entitled to a credit against the applicable impact fee for the fair market value of any dedication of land for and reasonable documented construction costs acceptable to the City associated with the improvement to, or new construction of any system improvements provided by the developer that are identified in the capital facilities plan and that are required by the City as a condition of approval to the development proposal against which the impact fee is assessed.
2. No credit shall be given for project improvements as defined under VMC 20.150.
3. Traffic Impact Fee Credit. Effective June 3, 2015 (effective date of ordinance), the maximum traffic impact credit shall be in the amount of the impact fee applicable to the development proposal against which the impact fee is assessed. The credit shall be applied to the impact fee as calculated for the development proposal against which the impact fee is assessed and shall not exceed the impact fee due.
4. Street Project Assessment Reimbursement Contract for Excess Costs. If a developer has incurred costs for street project system improvements in excess of the amount of the traffic impact fee applicable to the development proposal against which the impact fee is assessed, the developer may apply to the City for a street project assessment reimbursement contract pursuant to VMC Chapter 11.10.
5. Existing traffic impact fee credits. TIF credits that existed prior to June 3, 2015 (effective date of ordinance) shall be utilized consistent with the provisions of the TIF Program Technical Document. The value and ownership of such TIF credits as of June 3, 2015 (effective date of ordinance) shall be documented by a list thereof published by the City and distributed by US mail to the last known addresses of said owners on June 3, 2015 (effective date of ordinance).
B. Traffic Impact Fee reduction. The developer may be provided a TIF reduction pursuant to Section 20.550.050(A) VMC.
C. Traffic Impact Fee Credit for the developer. Additionally, the developer may be provided a credit against the impact fee in an amount up to 10% of the traffic component to account for contributions of mass transit facilities that are approved by the City and made a condition of approval for the development.
D. Impact fee reduction. Where impact fees are owing prior to completion of a system improvement undertaken by the developer, the impact fee shall be reduced by 85% from the Director of Public Works estimate of the credit to be due upon dedication and completion of the required work, provided, if the same has been assured by a bond or other guarantee, as governed by Chapter 20.909 VMC, to be completed no later than the date of occupancy for commercial/industrial/multi-family structures or the final building inspection for single-family and other uses. Upon completion of the required system improvement, appropriate refunds shall be made and credits recognized up to but not to exceed the amount of the impact fee applicable to the development proposal against which the impact fee is assessed based upon the Director of Public Works’ determination of the value of dedication and reasonable construction costs.
E. City credit utilization. Traffic impact fee credits issued by the City after June 3, 2015, (effective date of adopted ordinance) may be utilized in lieu of cash payment only for traffic impact fees for the development proposal against which the impact fee is assessed, as provided in subsection A.3 above. Other impact fee credits recognized by the City may be utilized in lieu of cash payment of impact fees for the subject development and/or any other development within the same service area. (Ord. M-4107 § 6, 12/01/2014; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Process for revision of traffic impact fees. Traffic impact fee rates shall be adjusted periodically to reflect changes in costs of land acquisition and construction, facility plan projects and anticipated growth. Traffic Impact Fee Program Technical Document may contain provision for automatic revision of traffic impact fee rate no more than once annually to reflect the change in a generally recognized and applicable inflation/deflation index.
B. Park impact fee rates may be revised. Rates may be revised using the following process:
1. The adopted Park Impact Fee Technical Document may be revised periodically by the city council when financial analysis establishes that there is a need for a major program update, but no less than every three years to evaluate the status of the rate of collection and the projected need to serve future residents. Such adjustments shall only become effective upon adoption by the city council.
C. Process for revision of school impact fees. School impact fee rates shall be adjusted periodically to reflect changes in costs of land acquisition and construction, facility plan projects and anticipated growth. Such adjustments shall only become effective upon adoption by the city council of a modification to the capital facilities plan.
D. Operation of impact fee fund. The city has created and established a special purpose, nonlapse impact fee fund. The city finance director shall establish separate accounts within such fund and maintain records for each such account whereby impact fees collected can be segregated by type of facility and by service area:
1. Collected interest. All interest shall be retained in the account and expended for the intended purposes that the impact fees were imposed.
2. Impact fee fund annual report. By April of each year, the finance director shall provide a report for the previous calendar year on each impact fee account showing the source and amount of moneys collected, earned or received and system improvements that were financed in whole or in part by impact fees.
E. Inter-local agreements and fees. The city of Vancouver may enter into an inter-local agreement with Clark County to establish a coordinated program for the imposition, collection, administration and expenditure of traffic and park impact fees.
F. School impact fees. School impact fees shall not be collected on behalf of any school district until such district enters into an inter-local agreement with city of Vancouver providing for submittal of capital facilities plans, fund administration, report of expenditure, allocation of risk, and other appropriate matters. Where Clark County adopts a substantially similar school impact fee for a district whose boundaries include portions of the city of Vancouver, such an inter-local agreement may include the county. The inter-local agreement may include a fee to cover the city’s cost of administering the school impact fee program.
G. Imposition of impact fees for costs previously incurred. The Review Authority may impose an impact fee for system improvements costs previously incurred by the city of Vancouver to the extent that new growth and development will be served by the previously constructed improvements, provided such fee shall not be imposed to make up for any system improvement deficiencies.
H. Expenditures for system improvements with impact fees. Impact fees for system improvements shall be expended only in conformance with the capital facilities plan. Impact fees shall be expended or encumbered for a permissible use within 10 years of receipt, unless an extraordinary and compelling reason exists for fees to be held longer than 10 years. Such extraordinary or compelling reasons shall be identified in written findings by the city council.
I. Refunds for the current owner. The current owner of property on which an impact fee has been paid may receive a refund of such fee if the city fails to expend or encumber the impact fees within 10 years of when the fees were paid, or such other period of time established pursuant to this subsection, on public facilities intended to benefit the development activity for which the impact fees were paid. In determining whether impact fees have been encumbered, impact fees shall be considered encumbered on a first-in, first-out basis. The current owner likewise may receive a proportionate refund where the public funding of applicable service area projects by the end of such 10-year period has been insufficient to satisfy the ratio of public-to-private funding for such service area as established in the capital facilities plan. The city shall notify potential claimants by first-class mail deposited with the United States Postal Service at the last known address of claimants.
1. Refund time period. The request for refund money must be submitted to the Vancouver city council in writing within one year of the date the right to claim the refund arises or the date the notice is given, whichever is later. Any impact fees that are not expended within these time limitations, and for which no application for refund has been made within this one-year period, shall be retained and expended on the indicated capital facilities. Refunds of impact fees under this subsection shall include interest earned on the impact fees.
2. Criteria for a refund with interest. A developer may request and shall receive a refund, including interest earned on the impact fees, when the building permit for which the impact fee has been paid has lapsed for noncommencement of construction. A partial refund shall be provided where the project for which a building permit has been issued has been altered resulting in a decrease in the amount of the impact fee due.
J. Impact fees as additional and supplemental requirements. The impact fee is additional and supplemental to, and not in substitution of, any other requirements imposed by the city on the development of land or the issuance of building permits. This is provided that any other such city development regulation which would require the developer to undertake dedication or construction of a facility contained within the city capital facility plan shall be imposed only if the developer is given a credit against impact fees as provided for in Section 20.915.090 VMC. (Ord. M-4319 § 4, 2020; Ord. M-4181 § 3, 2016; Ord. M-4107 § 7, 2014; Ord. M-4034 § 31, 2012; Ord. M-3959 § 46, 2010; Ord. M-3952 § 2, 2010; Ord. M-3951 § 2, 2010; Ord. M-3933 § 5, 2009; Ord. M-3909 § 2, 2008; Ord. M-3854 § 2, 2007; Ord. M-3785 § 2, 2006; Ord. M-3653 § 1, 2004; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
The intent of the infill ordinance is to encourage the development of underutilized and challenged parcels in the R-9, R-6, R-4, and R-2 zoning districts. The infill ordinance accommodates a variety of housing types including single-family detached and single-family attached. (Ord. M-4517 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2025; Ord. M-4465 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2024; Ord. M-4455 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2024; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Eligibility Criteria. This chapter may be applied to parcels created prior to the adoption date of the ordinance codified in this chapter that meet all of the following criteria:
1. The parcel is within the R-9, R-6, R-4, R-2 zoning district; and
2. The net developable area (excluding any critical areas) of the parcel is two and one-half acres or smaller in area. An infill parent parcel size may be increased by five percent with approval from the planning official; and
3. The proposed development can and will be served by urban services at the time of final plat or development approval. For the purposes of this chapter, “urban services” shall mean public water and sewer service as described in VMC Title 14; and
4. There is urban development abutting the subject site on at least 50 percent of its nonstreet perimeter. For the purposes of this section, “nonstreet perimeter” shall mean that portion of the perimeter of the parcel that is not abutting a public street. Where there is no abutting public street, the entire perimeter is used for measurement.
a. For the purposes of this chapter, “urban development” shall mean a parcel that meets at least one of the following criteria:
1. All parcels with existing nonresidential or multifamily structures that are currently receiving urban services (e.g. public sewer and water); or
2. Tax exempt parcels, regardless of development status; or
3. All plats which have received final or preliminary approval within the last five years; or
4. Parcels two and one-half acres (net developable area) or smaller in area which have existing residential structures; or

5. Parcels that are designated on the city of Vancouver comprehensive plan for multifamily, commercial, or industrial development; or
6. Parcels that are not developable based on a prior development review determination (e.g., park lands, environmentally sensitive lands, properties with utility easements).
B. Applicability of the Standards. All infill parcels created as a result of the application of this chapter and the subsequent infill development on those parcels shall be subject to the standards of this chapter. For the purposes of this chapter, the following definitions apply:
1. An “infill parent parcel” is the larger parcel of land from which infill parcels are divided.
2. “Infill land division” is the division of an infill parent parcel using some or all of the standards of this chapter.
3. “Infill parcels” are either parcels that meet the eligibility criteria of this chapter or those parcels created by the land division of an infill parent parcel through the application of the standards in this chapter.
4. “Infill development” is the subsequent residential development on infill parcels.
5. Repealed by M-4465.
6. “Infill development plan” is a plan that is required to be submitted with infill development which identifies the existing and proposed lot characteristics, including applicable standards and incentives.
7. “Predominant” shall mean the most frequently occurring residential design characteristic along both sides of the road frontage from intersection to intersection (or block face). (Ord. M-3840 § 41, 08/06/2007; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
A. All of the provisions of this code that would apply to a non-infill project shall apply to infill projects except as specifically modified by this chapter. If there is a conflict between the standards of this chapter and the provisions of any applicable overlay districts or plan districts, the overlay district or plan district standards shall supersede the standards of this chapter.
B. Development applications which meet the eligibility criteria for infill development, as outlined in this chapter, must comply with additional transportation standards as provided for in VMC 11.80.060, Infill Streets. (Ord. M-4517 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2025; Ord. M-4465 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2024; Ord. M-4455 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2024; Ord. M-4354 § 3(J), 2021; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Infill Land Divisions. The subdivisions and short subdivision of an infill parent parcel into nine or fewer parcels shall be subject to Type II review. The subdivision of an infill parent parcel into more than nine parcels shall be subject to Type III review. The proposed development shall comply with all applicable land division procedures and standards unless specifically modified pursuant to this chapter.
B. Development on Infill Parcels. All development on infill parcels created pursuant to this chapter shall be subject to the standards for infill development. The applicable infill development standards shall be recorded as a plat note on the final plat as a condition of approval.
C. Pre-application Meeting. The pre-application conference required pursuant to VMC 20.210.080, Pre-application Conference, may not be waived for infill lot development. In addition to the notice requirements of Chapter 20.210 VMC, Decision Making Procedures, the planning official or designee shall also mail written notice to all owners of record of property as shown on the most recent property tax assessment roll, located adjacent to and across the street from the subject property. The city shall also notify the appropriate neighborhood association(s) board members. This mailing shall be concurrent with that required by Chapter 20.210, Decision Making Procedures. Members of the public shall be provided with an opportunity to comment on the proposed project at a specific time during the meeting set aside for public comments. The notice must provide a brief description of the proposed development and a preliminary development plan. (Ord. M-4517 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2025; Ord. M-4465 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2024; Ord. M-4455 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2024; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Minimum Parcel Area. Within an infill land division for single-family development, no parcel shall be smaller than the minimum parcel area identified in Table 20.920.050-1, provided no lot shall exceed the maximum required by the underlying zoning district.
B. Additional Dwelling Types Allowed. In addition to the uses allowed by VMC Table 20.410.030-1 (Lower Density Residential Districts Use Table), single-family attached dwellings are allowed on infill parcels subject to the standards of this chapter.
1. Procedures for Single-Family Attached Dwellings. Development proposals for single-family attached dwellings utilizing the provisions of this chapter shall be subject to the following procedures:
a. Land divisions shall be reviewed according to Chapter 20.320 VMC. In addition, if the land is subdivided, development proposals must receive approval of a development plan that demonstrates how the proposal complies with this chapter and all other applicable requirements. The development plan shall be submitted and reviewed in conjunction with the land division application.
b. Preliminary plats may not be approved without approval of the submitted development plan. Both the development plan and preliminary plat must be fully consistent with standards of this and all other applicable provisions of this code.
c. Preliminary plats may be approved only where conditions of approval are established to ensure that subsequent or existing development on the resultant parcels shall occur consistent with the approved development plan.
d. Building permits may only be approved if consistent with the approved development plan and land division for all units with common walls.
2. Building Mass Supplemental Standard. The maximum number of consecutively attached single-family units (i.e., with attached walls at property line) shall not exceed four units.
3. Existing Public Alley Access. Single-family attached subdivisions (creation of 10 or more parcels for single-family attached dwellings) shall receive primary vehicle access from a rear alley if a public alley exists within or adjacent to the subdivision.
4. Pedestrian Pathways. City may require dedication of right-of-way or easements and construction of pathways between single-family attached parcels (e.g., between building breaks) to provide for pedestrian connectivity between groupings of single-family attached units and from one side of the parcel to another.
C. Minimum Parcel Size.
1. Infill parcels for single-family development (attached, detached) shall meet minimum parcel area requirements as shown in Table 20.920.050-1.
Table 20.920.050-1. Minimum Parcel Area for Single-Family Dwellings
Zoning District | Minimum Parcel Area Single-Family Detached (sq. feet) | Minimum Parcel Area Single-Family Attached (sq. feet) |
|---|---|---|
R-9 | 2,000 sf | 1,500 sf |
R-6 | 3,000 sf | 2,000 sf |
R-4 | 4,000 sf | 2,500 sf |
R-2 | 8,000 sf | 5,000 sf |
2. Parcel area may be varied by the planning official upon request. The planning official may grant a variance for up to one percent for proposed lots.
D. Minimum Parcel Width and Depth. Within an infill land division, the minimum parcel width and minimum parcel depth standards of Table 20.410.050-1 (Development Standards in Lower-Density Residential Zones) may be reduced by up to 50 percent. However, subsequent development on infill parcels that were created with less than the minimum width and depth required by Table 20.410.050-1 (Development Standards in Lower-Density Residential Zones), shall not be eligible for a variance to the minimum setback or frontage requirements.
E. Maximum Lot Coverage. Maximum lot coverage may be increased 30 percent over the standard for the applicable zone as shown in Table 20.920.050-2.
Table 20.920.050-2. Maximum Building Coverage
Zoning | Current Building | Building Coverage Standard |
|---|---|---|
R-9 | 50% | 65% |
R-6 | 50% | 65% |
R-4 | 50% | 65% |
R-2 | 50% | 65% |
F. Setbacks. Infill parcels developed under provisions of this chapter shall comply with setback requirements of Table 20.410.050-1 (Development Standards in Lower-Density Residential Zones); except that minimum front and side setbacks shall be as follows:
1. Minimum Front Yard.
a. Eighteen feet for garage or carport structures or other similar vehicular shelter.
b. Ten feet for other buildings.
2. Minimum Side Yard.
a. Single-family attached dwellings – interior side yard between attached buildings may be zero feet.
b. All other uses shall comply with the standard side setbacks of the applicable zoning district.
G. Expedited Development Review Process. An applicant may request an expedited review process for infill projects. An expedited infill project shall be contingent upon city staffing and other resource availability. Community development department will endeavor to complete review of an infill project within a 60-day time period from fully complete (FC) to issuance of the land use decision for projects that do not require a hearing; and 80 days for projects that require a hearing. (Ord. M-4517 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2025; Ord. M-4465 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2024; Ord. M-4455 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2024; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Repealed by Ord. M-4517. (Ord. M-4465 § 3(B) (Att. B), 2024)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Purpose. The intent of this chapter is to ensure that all new or substantially remodeled buildings, accessory uses and parking lots are provided with landscaping to ameliorate air and noise pollution; to afford protection from wind and inclement weather protection; and to regulate open storage to protect and enhance property values and make the City a more aesthetically pleasing place to live and work.
B. The City recognizes the aesthetic, ecological and economic values of landscaping to:
Establish and protect vegetation in urban areas for aesthetic, health (e.g. improved air quality, reduction in atmospheric carbon dioxide, etc.) and urban wildlife reasons;
Reduce stormwater runoff pollution, temperature, and rate and volume of flow;
Promote compatibility between land uses by reducing the visual, noise and lighting impacts of specific development on users of the site and abutting uses;
Aid in energy conservation by providing shade from the sun and shelter from the wind; and
Restore natural communities through reestablishment of native plants. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
Applicability. The provisions of this chapter shall apply to all development including the construction of new structures, the remodeling of existing structures where the landscaping is nonconforming, as outlined in Chapter 20.930 VMC, Nonconforming Situations, and to any changes of use which result in the need for increased on-site parking or loading requirements or otherwise change the access requirements.
Landscape plan. A landscape plan prepared in accordance with Section 20.925.110 VMC and 20.770 VMC shall be submitted to the Planning Official for review and approval. The plan shall be drawn to scale and shall be approved prior to land use approval.
Review procedures. Landscape plans shall be reviewed in conjunction with the associated land use application. In the event that the landscape plan is proposed as a separate action, the Planning Official shall approve, approve with conditions, or deny a plan submitted under the provisions of this chapter by means of a Type I procedure, per Chapter 20.210 VMC, Decision-Making Procedures. (Ord. M-4179 § 89, 2016; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Landscaping requirements. Landscaping shall be provided and maintained per Tables 20.925.030-1 and 20.925.030-2.
Table 20.925.030-1. Minimum Landscaping and Buffer Setback Standards
Zoning of Proposed Development (Buffer width is the setback for the commercial and industrial zoning districts) | |||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Required street trees and parking area landscaping do not count towards these requirements except as allowed by the street tree and parking code sections. | Lower-Density Residential3 | Higher-Density Residential3 | Commercial and Mixed Use1 | Industrial1 | |||||||||
R-2, R-4, R-6, R-9, R-17 | R-18, R-22, R-30, R-35, R-50 | CN, CC, CG, HX and MX only | OCI | IL A | IH | ||||||||
Zoning of Land Abutting Development Site | Separated from site by a street | Not separated by a street | Separated from site by a street | Not separated by a street | Separated from site by a street | Not separated by a street | Separated from site by a street | Not separated by a street | Separated from site by a street | Not separated by a street | Separated from site by a street | Not separated by a street | |
Lower-Density Residential | R-2, R-4, | None | None | L2 10 ft | L3 5 ft6 | L2 10 ft | L4 10 ft | L2 10 ft | L4 10 ft | L3 20 ft | L4 in 40 ft5 L5 in 50 ft5 | L3 20 ft | L4 in 40 ft5 L5 in 50 ft5 |
Higher-Density Residential | R-18, R-22, | None | L3 5 ft6 | L1 10 ft | L1 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L4 10 ft | L2 5 ft | L2 5 ft | L3 20 ft | L4 in 40 ft5 L5 in 50 ft5 | L3 20 ft | L4 in 40 ft5 L5 in 50 ft5 |
Commercial and Mixed Use | CN, CC, CG, MX | L1 10 ft | L3 5 ft6 | L2 10 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L12 0 – 5 ft | L2 5 ft | L12 0 – 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 10 ft |
Industrial | OCI | L1 10 ft | L3 5 ft | L1 10 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L12 0 – 5 ft | L2 5 ft | L12 0 – 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 10 ft |
IL, A, | L1 10 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L2 5 ft | L2 5 ft | L12 0 – 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L1 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 10 ft | |
IH | L1 10 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 5 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 5 ft | L3 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 10 ft | L2 10 ft | L12 0 – 5 ft | |
Resource (County) | FR-80, FR-40, AG-20, AG-WL, Park/WL | L1 10 ft | L3 50 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 50 ft | L2 10 ft | L2 5 ft | L2 5 ft | L3 10 ft | L2 10 ft | L1 5 ft | L2 10 ft | L3 10 ft |
1Zero lot line developments shall comply with the standards and requirements of VMC 20.910.050.
2If building is to be built on the property line there is no required buffer for that portion of the site.
3Applies to multifamily site plan applications and the perimeter of land divisions, not to individual single-family lot developments.
4In case of conflict with yard, setback, landscape, screening, or buffer standards specified in other sections of this title, the stricter standard shall apply, except for plan districts where the district standards shall always apply even if less strict than the standards of this table.
5Buffer widths abutting parking areas that are landscaped in accordance with the requirements of VMC 20.945.040(I) can be reduced to 25 feet.
6Where a directly abutting site not separated by a street is currently developed with a single-story residential structure, the minimum setback is five feet plus one additional foot for each three feet of proposed building height above 35 feet, up to a maximum setback of 15 feet. The additional setback for buildings above 35 feet in height applies only to the portions of those buildings above 35 feet.
Table 20.925.030-2. Landscaping and Screening Design Standards1
Type | Name | Description | Minimum Shrubs Based on Buffer Depth | Minimum Trees | Wall or Berm or Fence Required – Standards |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
L1 | General (for open areas) | Used where distance is primary means of separating uses or development, and landscaping enhances area between them | a. 10 ft or less = None b. Over 10 ft = 2 high or 3 low shrubs per 400 sq. ft. landscaped area | a. One tree per 30 lineal ft. b. One tree per 800 sq. ft. | None |
L2 | Low Screen | Distance and low-level screening intended to separate uses or development. Applied where low-level screening sufficiently reduces the impact of a use or development, or where visibility between areas is more important than a greater visual screen. | Continuous screen 3 ft. high, 95% opaque year-round. 3+-gallon containers or equivalent with spread 18+ inches | One tree per 30 lineal ft. of landscaped area or as needed to provide a tree canopy over the landscaped area | 3-ft.-high masonry wall or F2 fence or a berm may substitute for shrubs |
L3 | High Screen | Physical and visual separation between uses or development principally using screening. Used where full separation is warranted by impacts of proposed development, notwithstanding loss of direct views. | Enough shrubs to form a 6-ft.-high buffer screen 95% opaque year-round; 5+-gallon containers or equivalent with spread of 30+ inches | 6-ft. F1 or F2 high wall or fence with or without berm may substitute for shrubs | |
L4 | High Wall | Used where extensive screening of visual and noise impacts is needed to protect abutting sensitive uses and/or there is little space for separation between uses. | Four high shrubs required per 30 lineal ft. of wall | 6-ft. F2 high wall required | |
L5 | High Berm | Used instead of L4 where extensive screening is warranted and more space is available for separation between uses. | L2 low shrubs on top of berm so total screen height = 6 ft. | 4 – 6 ft. high berm required. If under 6 ft. high, plant L2 low shrubs on top of berm so overall screen height is 6 ft. | |
F1 | Partially Sight-Obscuring Fence | Partial visual separation applied where a proposed use or development has little impact, or where visibility between areas is more important than a total visual screen. | 6 ft. high – at least 50% sight-obscuring – wood, metal, chain link with slats, bricks, masonry or other permanent materials. | ||
F2 | Fully Sight-Obscuring Fence | Full visual separation where complete screening is needed to protect abutting uses, and landscaping alone cannot provide that separation. | 6 ft. high – 100% sight-obscuring – made of wood, metal, bricks, masonry or other permanent materials – no chain link fences with slats or similar construction. |
1 Additional Requirements:
L1, L2, L3, L4, L5 – Groundcover plants, grass lawn or approved flowers must fully cover the landscaped area not in shrubs or trees.
L2, L3 – When applied along street lot lines, the screen or wall is to be placed along the interior side of the landscaped area.
L4 – When abutting another property, the wall shall abut the property line. When abutting a street or road right-of-way, the wall shall be on the interior side of the landscaped area.
L1 – Within the commercial districts where a building is to be placed at the buffer line for a front setback, concrete or brick pavers may be used in place of the required groundcover for the length of the building for the front setback only, provided the required trees are still supplied, the paved area is connected to the public sidewalk, and pedestrian amenities are provided such as benches or pedestrian plazas. Building need not be placed at the required buffer line to utilize this section if the area between the buffer line and the building is devoted entirely to pedestrian-only areas.
L1, L2, L3, L4, L5 – Groundcover plants to be placed not more than 30 inches on center and 30 inches between rows. Rows of plants shall be staggered for a more effective covering. Groundcover shall be supplied in a minimum four-inch-size container or a two-and-one-quarter-inch container or equivalent if planted 18 inches on center.
Figure 20.925.030-1.

B. Obligation to maintain. Unless otherwise provided by the lease agreement, the owner, tenant and his agent, if any, shall be jointly and severally responsible for the maintenance of all landscaping and screening, which shall be maintained in good condition so as to present a healthy, neat and orderly appearance, shall be replaced or repaired as necessary, and shall be kept free from refuse and debris.
C. Pruning required. All plant growth in landscaped areas of developments shall be controlled by pruning, trimming or otherwise so that:
1. It will not interfere with the maintenance or repair of any public utility;
2. It will not restrict pedestrian or vehicular access;
3. It will not constitute a traffic hazard because of reduced visibility; and
4. Trees shall be pruned to provide at least eight feet of clearance above sidewalks and 13 feet above a local street, 15 feet above a collector street, and 18 feet above an arterial street roadway surfaces.
D. Installation requirements. The installation of all landscaping shall be as follows:
1. All landscaping shall be installed according to accepted planting procedures;
2. The plant materials shall be of high grade, and shall meet the quality and size standards of the American Standards for Nursery Stock (ANSI Z60, 1-1986, as updated); and
3. Landscaping shall be installed in accordance with VMC 20.925.050.
4. All landscaped areas shall be provided with an irrigation system or a readily available water supply with at least one outlet located within 50 feet of all plant material.
5. All landscaped areas shall be provided with a six-inch curb which could include curb cuts, wheel stops or other protective measure to allow for stormwater flow as part of LID.
6. Landscaped areas shall have a minimum length or width dimension of five feet in order to count toward the minimum required landscaped area.
E. Certificate of Occupancy. Certificates of occupancy shall not be issued unless the landscaping requirements have been met or other arrangements have been made and approved by the city such as described in VMC 20.909.020(B).
F. Care of landscaping along public rights-of-way. Appropriate methods for the care and maintenance of street trees and landscaping materials shall be provided by the owner of the property abutting the rights-of-way, unless otherwise required for emergency conditions and the safety of the general public.
G. Conditions of approval of existing vegetation. The review procedures and standards for required landscaping and screening shall be specified in the conditions of approval during development review and in no instance shall be less than that required for site development.
H. Height restrictions abutting public rights-of-way. No trees, shrubs or plantings more than 18 inches in height shall be planted in the public right-of-way abutting roadways having no established curb and gutter.
I. Sight visibility. Sight visibility requirements of Chapter 20.985 VMC, Vision Clearance, shall be met. (Ord. M-4377 § 2(e), 2022; Ord. M-4341 § 3 (Exh. B), 2021; Ord. M-4179 § 90, 2016; Ord. M-3931 § 30, 2009; Ord. M-3840 § 43, 2007; Ord. M-3701 § 31, 2005; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
Protection of existing vegetation. Existing vegetation on a site shall be protected as much as possible, and the protection of existing vegetation during development activities shall whenever possible, include open field or nontreed areas. Chapter 20.770 Tree, Vegetation, and Soil Conservation Ordinance contains additional standards for protection and retention of trees, vegetation, and soil.
Methods of protection. The developer shall provide methods for the protection of existing vegetation to be retained, such as protective fencing to remain during the construction process.
Remaining plants and undisturbed areas. Plants to be saved and areas not to be disturbed shall be noted on the landscape plans. The plan shall locate fencing used to protect vegetation and soils from damage during construction. (Ord. M-4179 § 91, 2016; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Minimum plant specifications.
1. All required trees shall be at least 2" in caliper and shrubs at least 1 gallon.
2. Trees shall optimize tree diversity; include native species and at last 60% conifers; utilize insect and disease resistant trees unless determined by the Planning Official as not appropriate for the site conditions.
3. Trees, shrubs, perennials, perennial grasses, and groundcovers shall be located and spaced to accommodate their mature size on the site.
B. Soils, soil conditioning and mulching.
1. A minimum of 12" depth of non-mechanically compacted soil shall be available for water absorption and root growth in planted areas.
2. A minimum of a 4" layer of porous mulch shall be applied to all exposed soil surfaces of nonturf areas within the landscape area. Plant types that are intolerant of mulch shall be exempt from this requirement. Non-porous material, such as plastic sheeting, shall not be placed under the mulch. However, porous landscape fabric is permitted.
3. Areas that have been cleared, graded, or compacted and that have not been covered by impervious surface, incorporated into a drainage facility or engineered as structural fill or slope shall be amended with organic matter. (Ord. M-4179 § 92, 2016; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Street trees required. All development projects fronting on a public street or a private street approved after the adoption of this Title shall be required to plant street trees in accordance with the standards in VMC 20.925.060(C).
B. Street tree planting list. Approval of any planting list shall be subject to review by the Planning Official, since certain tree species can damage utilities, streets and sidewalks.
C. Size, and spacing and placement of street trees. The specific spacing of street trees by size of tree shall be as follows:
1. One 2" caliper deciduous tree shall be provided for every 30' of frontage on a public or private street., provided that the Planning Official may adjust the spacing to accommodate access points or other obstructions;
2. The species selection and spacing of trees to be planted shall be such that it provides for the eventual mature size of the trees. Soil type, soil conditions and other site constraints shall be considered when selection species for planting;
3. No new utility pole location shall be established closer than 5' to any existing street tree;
4. Tree pits shall be located so as not to include utilities (e.g., water and gas meters) in the tree well;
5. On-premises utilities (e.g., water and gas meters) shall not be installed within existing tree well areas;
6. Street trees shall not be planted closer than 20' to light standards;
7. New light standards shall not be positioned closer than 20' to existing street trees except when public safety dictates, then they may be positioned no closer than 10';
8. Where there are overhead power lines, the street tree species selected shall be of a type which, at full maturity, will not interfere with the lines;
9. Trees shall not be planted closer than 2' from the face of the curb; and
10. Trees shall not be planted closer than 2' from any permanent hard surface paving or walkway:
a. Space between the tree and the hard surface may be covered by a nonpermanent hard surface such as bricks on sand, paved blocks and cobblestones; and
b. Sidewalk cuts in concrete for tree planting shall be at least 4' x 6' or 6' x 9', or larger depending on the space constraints and the mature size of the tree, to allow for air and water into the root area.
D. Cut and fill around existing trees. Existing trees may be used as street trees if no cutting or filling takes place within the drip-line of the tree unless an adjustment is approved by the Planning Official by means of a Type I procedure, per Chapter 20.210 VMC Decision-Making Procedures.
E. Replacement of street trees. Existing street trees removed by development projects or other construction shall be replaced by the developer with those types of trees approved by the Planning Official. The replacement trees shall be of a size and species similar to the trees that are being removed unless lesser sized alternatives are approved by the Planning Official.
F. Granting of adjustments. Adjustments to the street tree requirements may be granted by the Planning Official by means of a Type I procedure, as regulated in Chapter 20.210 VMC Decision-Making Procedures. (Ord. M-3847 § 14, 2007; Ord. M-3663 § 25, 2004; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Buffering and screening of parking, solid waste containers, and open storage shall be required as follows:
A. Parking lots. All parking, loading and maneuvering areas including driveways and drive-through lanes shall be screened from view per the standards of VMC 20.945.040(I)(2).
B. Screening of service facilities. Except for one-family and two-family dwellings, any solid waste container or recycling or disposal area and ground-level service facilities such as gas meters and air conditioners which would be visible from a public street, parking area, or any residentially-zoned property shall be screened from view per the standards of Chapter 20.970 VMC by placement of a solid wood fence, evergreen hedge or masonry wall. All refuse materials shall be contained within the screened area.
C. Open Storage. Open storage, or storage not wholly within an enclosed building, shall be required to meet the following requirements of Table 20.925.070-1:
Table 20.925.070-1. Open Storage Standards
District | Open Storage Requirement |
|---|---|
R-2, R-4, R-6, R-9, R-17 | Not allowed |
R-18, R-22, R-30, R-35, R-50 | Storage no higher than 5', screened by site-obscuring fence or evergreen hedge 6' in height |
City Center District (CX) | Storage no higher than 5', screened on all sides by a site-obscuring fence or evergreen hedge 6' in height |
OCI | Not allowed |
All Other Commercial Districts | Same as for R-18, R-22, R-30, R-35 |
IL, IH | Open storage facing a street shall be screened |
Open Space Districts | Not allowed except for agricultural implements |
(Ord. M-4377 § 2(e), 2022; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
New developments and redevelopments shall provide interior parking lot landscaping per the standards of 20.945.040(I)(3). (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
When revegetation is required. Where natural vegetation has been removed through grading in areas not affected by the landscaping requirements and that are not to be occupied by structures, such areas are to be replanted as set forth in this Section to prevent erosion after construction activities are completed.
Preparation for re-vegetation. Topsoil removed from the surface in preparation for grading and construction is to be stored on or near the sites and protected from erosion while grading operations are underway.
1. Such storage may not be located where it would cause suffocation of root systems of trees intended to be preserved; and
2. After completion of such grading, the topsoil is to be restored to exposed cut and fill embankments or building pads and amended with compost to provide a suitable base for seeding and planting.
Methods of revegetation.
1. Acceptable methods of re-vegetation include replanting with native trees, shrubs, and groundcover and hydro-mulching or the planting of rye grass, barley, or other seed with equivalent germination rates;
a. The use of native trees, shrubs and groundcovers plant materials is encourages to reduce irrigation and maintenance demands;
b. The use of lawn and turf should be minimal. Where lawn or turf grass is to be established, lawn grass seed or other appropriate landscape cover is to be sown at not less than 4 pounds to each 1,000 sq. ft. of land area;
c. Other revegetation methods offering equivalent protection may be approved by the approval authority;
d. Plant materials are to be watered at intervals sufficient to ensure survival and growth; and
e. Employ other erosion control techniques as required in Chapter 14.24 VMC Erosion Control. (Ord. M-4179 § 93, 2016; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Water conservation standards.
1. Applicability. In order to ensure efficient water use in landscaped areas, the following standards shall be applied to all landscaping associated with office, commercial, industrial, institutional, parks and greenways, multiple family residential projects, and commonly-owned and/or maintained areas of single family residential projects.
2. Exemptions. These standards do not apply to landscaping in private areas of single-family projects. Parks, playgrounds, sports fields, golf courses, schools, and cemeteries are exempt from specified turf area limitations where a functional need for turf is established. All other requirements are applicable.
3. Plant selection and use limitation.
a. Minimize the amount of irrigated turf.
b. Turf, high-water-use plantings (e.g. annuals, container plants) and water features (e.g. fountains, pools) shall be considered high-water-uses and shall be limited to not more than 40% of the projects landscaped area if nondrought resistant grass is used, and no more than 50% of the landscaped area if drought resistant grass is used.
c. Plants selected in all areas not identified for turf or high-water-use plantings shall include native vegetation or be well suited to the climate, soils, and topographic conditions of the site, and shall be low water use plants once established.
d. Plants having similar water use shall be grouped together in distinct hydrozones and shall be irrigated with separate irrigation circuits.
e. No turf or high-water-use plants shall be allowed on slopes. Slopes shall be revegetated with native trees, shrubs, and groundcover.
f. No turf or high-water-use plants shall be allowed in areas 8' wide or less except public right-of-way planter strips.
g. No turf shall be installed with Tree, Vegetation, and Soil Protection Areas VMC 20.770.
B. Water efficient landscape (xeriscape) standards.
1. As an alternative to traditional landscaping, the City encourages the use of xeriscape practices, which minimize the need for watering or irrigation. Xeriscape principles can be summarized as follows:
a. Using plants with low moisture requirements;
b. Selecting plants for specific site microclimates that vary according to slope, aspect, soil, and exposure to sun and moisture;
c. Using native, noninvasive, adapted plant species;
d. Minimizing the amount of irrigated turf;
e. Planting and designing slopes to minimize storm water runoff;
f. Use of separate irrigation zones adjusted to plant water requirements and use of drip or trickle irrigation systems.
g. Using mulch in planted areas to control weeds, cool the soil and reduce evaporation; and
h. Emphasizing soil improvement, such as deep tilling, adding organic matter and other amendments based on soil tests.
2. Appropriate plant species. Trees and plants used in xeriscape plantings pursuant to this Section shall:
a. Appropriate for the ecological setting in which they are to be planted;
b. Have noninvasive growth habits;
c. Encourage low maintenance and sustainable landscape design
d. Be commercially available;
e. Shall not be plant material that was collected in the wild; and
f. Be consistent with the purpose and intent of this Section.
3. Native vegetation. Within xeriscape areas, a minimum of 50% native plants shall be used.
4. Prohibited species. The City shall maintain a list of prohibited species, which are invasive or noxious. Where such species already exist, their removal shall be a condition of development approval.
5. Additional planting standards.
a. For xeriscape areas, soil samples shall be analyzed to determine what soil conditioning or soil amendments should be used at the time of planting. Soil conditioning measures shall be adequate for the plant species selected.
b. Trees, shrubs, perennials, perennial grasses and groundcovers shall be located and spaced to accommodate their mature size on the site.
6. Plant replacement. The developer shall maintain xeriscape plantings for a two-year period from the date of planting. Within the two-year period, the developer shall replace or otherwise guarantee any failed plantings:
a. Dead or dying trees or shrubs shall be replaced; and
b. Plantings of perennials, perennial grasses or groundcovers shall be replanted to maintain a maximum 20% mortality rate from the date of planting.
C. Stormwater. Applicants are encouraged to incorporate landscaping into the on-site stormwater treatment system to the greatest extent practicable. (Ord. M-4179 § 94, 2016; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. General. Any development, except individual lots for single family or duplex structures, requiring landscape installation shall require the submission of a landscape development plan. The landscape development plan shall become part of the Site Plan required elsewhere in this Title for the purposes of review, approval, and compliance for any land use development permit, building permit and / or certificate of occupancy.
B. Information Required. Landscape plans shall contain the following information:
1. North arrow, scale, date, title, and name of owner;
2. Accurate site plan (at a scale of 1" = 20' or larger, or as appropriate for the scale of development) showing the location of property lines and their dimensions;
3. Existing and proposed water courses, drainage features, streets, sidewalks, utility lines and easements, and other public or semi-public improvements within or adjacent to the site;
4. Delineation of existing residential structures, if any, on adjacent properties;
5. All existing plant material to be removed or retained and delineation and specification of protection methods for plant materials to be retained;
6. Existing and proposed elevations at sufficient locations of the site to show drainage patterns;
7. Contour lines when the slope exceeds 6%;
8. Existing and proposed buildings and other structures, paved areas, curbs, walks, light standards, signs, fences and screen walls, and other permanent features to be added and/or retained on the site;
9. Calculation of total site area, setback areas, required buffer areas, paved vehicular use areas, required proportional landscape areas, and required plant quantities and types;
10. Location, type, and quantity of any soil amendments;
11. The location, approximate mature size, and type of all plant materials graphically depicted on the plan;
12. Complete description of plant materials shown on the plan, including common and botanical names, quantities, spacing, container or caliper size at installation, and mature height and spread;
13. Irrigation plans showing location and type of all outlets (spray, bubbler, drip, etc.); location and size of water meter or other connection; location, type, and installation details of backflow prevention device; and delineation of each watering zone or circuit; and
14. Landscape areas where xeriscape principles are to be applied shall be clearly delineated in the plan submittal; and native and nonnative species plants should be clearly distinguished. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A certificate from a licensed landscape architect shall be provided verifying that landscaping indicated on the final landscape plan has been installed. (Ord. M-4187 § 4, 2016)
The purpose of this chapter is to provide additional approval criteria and development standards for land divisions with narrow lots in order to: 1) eliminate conflicts between the design and location of driveways with public and private utilities, on-street parking and other common features such as street trees, street lights and signs, fire hydrants, common mailboxes, etc.; 2) provide for adequate guest parking; 3) ensure adequate access for solid waste and recycling collection vehicles; 4) minimize the dominance of garages on narrow lots; and 5) provide incentives for lots which utilize alleys for access. (Ord. M-3778, Added, 12/04/2006, Sec 2)
The approval criteria and development standards of this chapter shall apply to any residential short subdivision or subdivision, including infill development, which has one or more narrow lots, defined as a lot with less than 40 feet in width, exclusive of flag lots. Compliance with applicable standards shall be determined at the time of preliminary plat approval, in accordance with VMC 20.320, Subdivisions. (Ord. M-3778, Added, 12/04/2006, Sec 2)
Approval criteria. In order for the City to grant approval of a preliminary short subdivision or subdivision, the applicant shall demonstrate compliance with the following criteria, which shall be in addition to the preliminary subdivision approval criteria of VMC 20.320.040 A-G:
A. Conflicts on narrow lots shall be eliminated. The development has been designed to eliminate conflicts between on-site and off-site improvements and features associated with narrow lots. Specifically, the location, size, and design of features including driveways, public and private utilities (water, fire hydrants, sewer, roof infiltration, gas, cable, phone, electricity, etc.), on-street parking spaces, street trees, existing trees, light poles, common mailboxes, street signs, etc., shall be considered in the design of the development and coordinated to eliminate conflicts with one another and meet minimum spacing requirements.
B. Adequate guest parking shall be provided. The development has been designed to provide for at least one guest parking space for every three narrow lots in the development. Such spaces may be located on-street (on local access or loop classification roadways only) or in common parking areas subject to the development standards of 20.927.040A2.
C. Solid waste and recycling collection and access shall be provided. The development shall be designed to provide for safe access and maneuvering by solid waste and recycling collection vehicles to designated collection points for each lot. (Ord. M-3778, Added, 12/04/2006, Sec 2)
A. Implementation of Performance Standards. Various design options may be proposed to address the approval criteria of VMC 20.927.030(A) through (C). For example, the use of alleys, narrow driveways, or shared driveways – either separately or in combination – are considered to be effective solutions to many identified conflicts. In addressing the above criteria, the following development standards shall apply:
1. On-site and off-site improvements plan required. A development plan that demonstrates that utilities, driveways, street trees, etc., have been located and designed to minimize conflicts with one another shall be submitted with the preliminary land division application and incorporated into the civil engineering plan set. Such plan shall, at a minimum, show all of the following features:
a. Proposed location and width of streets, sidewalks, and landscape strips;
b. Proposed location, species, and size of required street trees;
c. Proposed guest parking spaces as required by VMC 20.927.030(B) and subsection (A)(2) of this section;
d. Proposed location of other infrastructure including light poles, fire hydrants, and community mailboxes (may be reserved areas) and existing overhead lines;
e. Proposed location and width of driveways (narrow lots only);
f. Proposed location of public water line, water meter, and sewer line to serve each narrow lot;
g. Proposed location and dimensions of areas reserved on each narrow lot for private utilities (phone, cable, gas, electric, etc.) and roof infiltration systems;
2. Standards for guest parking in common areas.
a. Common areas reserved for guest parking shall have no more than five parking stalls in each area unless applicant demonstrates required parking cannot otherwise be provided.
b. Common guest parking areas shall be improved to city parking lot standards including a permanent surface, striping, curbing, three-foot-tall screening, and treatment of stormwater runoff. Use of pervious paving is encouraged.
c. Such spaces may be designed to allow for backing movements directly into local access or loop streets only.
d. Common parking areas shall be maintained by a homeowners’ association according to a maintenance agreement to be recorded with the plat.
3. Standards for solid waste and recycling access and collection.
a. An access plan for solid waste and recycling collection service to all lots in the development shall be submitted with the land division application.
b. The access and collection plan shall show a designated collection point for each lot or solid waste enclosure areas and the ability of collection vehicles to maneuver safely to all points of collection.
c. All circulation and turnaround designs must meet the requirements of VMC 11.80.070 and the Transportation Standard Details and be feasible using city-provided solid waste truck turning modeling templates and truck specifications. Collection vehicles shall be able to circulate the development and service receptacles with minimal backing required.
d. Where collection is not feasible on each lot, a designated common collection point to serve up to four lots, located no further than 150 feet from any lot it serves, may be provided. Common collection points shall be shown on the solid waste and recycling plan, and sized to accommodate the carts and bins associated with the city’s garbage, yard debris and recycling collection system. System specifics may be obtained from the city’s solid waste services department.
e. Collection vehicle turnaround must be provided in cases where more than four lots are sharing a grouped set-out or if the distance from the grouped set-out to a lot is greater than 150 feet.
f. Designated collection points shall be located adjacent to alleys or streets but shall not obstruct sidewalks, bike lanes, or vision clearance triangles.
g. Collection points shall be illustrated on plans and show footprints of all intended carts using dimensions from city-provided solid waste receptacle standards.
h. Each lot must have storage space outside of the right-of-way for carts when not set out for collection day.
4. Standards for alleys and lots with alley access. Lots with access from side or rear alleys are highly effective in addressing conflicts at the front street. Where provided, alleys and lots served by alleys shall meet the following standards:
a. Alleys shall consist of 16 feet paved width within a 20-foot public right-of-way or private easement, and shall be constructed in accordance with approved city standards. Width of alleys designated as fire apparatus access lanes shall be as approved by the fire marshal.
b. All lots adjacent to an alley, existing or proposed, shall provide access to the garage or parking space from the alley, not the adjacent street. Residences with access from alleys shall be oriented to face the public or private street, not the alley.
c. Alleys shall connect with a public or private street at both ends, unless otherwise approved by the transportation manager.
d. Maintenance of private alleys shall be the responsibility of the homeowner’s association, and a maintenance agreement shall be recorded with the plat.
e. Subdivisions which provide access from alleys to at least 50 percent of lots shall be eligible for modifications to certain development standards, as specified in VMC 20.927.050.
5. Shared driveways. Where provided for narrow lots, shared driveways shall meet the following requirements:
a. Shared driveways serving two adjacent lots shall be no wider than 30 feet, measured at the driveway throat, unless the applicant demonstrates on the development plan that a wider driveway will not result in conflicts.
b. Shared driveways which provide access to more than two lots shall be no wider than 18 feet, measured at the driveway throat, and shall be within a 20-foot minimum wide easement.
c. Only one curb cut is permitted per shared driveway.
d. Shared driveways shall be constructed in accordance with approved shared driveway standards.
e. Garages accessed from shared driveways shall be either single-car width and located no closer to the street than the front wall (not porch) of the residence or, if wider than a single-car garage, set back at least five feet from the front wall (not porch) of the residence.
6. Narrow driveways. Where provided for a narrow lot, narrow driveways shall meet the following requirements:
a. Narrow driveways shall be no wider than 10 feet measured at the driveway throat, unless the applicant demonstrates on the development plan that a wider driveway will not result in conflicts.
b. Where possible, narrow driveways on adjoining lots shall be grouped in close proximity to create space along the frontage for parking, trees, utilities, etc.
c. Narrow driveways shall be constructed in accordance with adopted narrow driveway standards.
d. Garages accessed from narrow driveways shall be either single-car width and located no closer to the street than the front wall (not porch) of the residence or, if wider than a single-car garage, set back at least five feet from the front wall (not porch) of the residence. (Ord. M-4402 § 3(BB), 2023; Ord. M-3778 § 2, 2006)
Any development subject to this chapter which provides alley access to at least 50 percent of the total number of lots shall qualify for the following modifications to development standards:
A. The development plan required by Section 20.927.040A1 is not required to include items d-g.
B. The maximum lot coverage may be increased as follows:
1. In lower density residential districts, maximum lot coverage shall be 55%.
2. In higher density residential districts, maximum lot coverage shall be 65%.
C. If an alley is to be privately-owned within a public easement, the area which extends across individual lots may be included in the minimum required lot area and counted when calculating maximum lot coverage.
D. For lots which obtain access from a rear alley, decks constructed above the driveway shall not be counted toward the maximum lot coverage.
E. If an alley is to be publicly-owned, the alley area may be subtracted from the overall area used to calculate required on-site tree density.
F. Minimum setbacks may be reduced as follows:
1. No additional side or rear setback is required for increase in building height above 20'.
2. Minimum rear yard setback from edge of alley pavement to garage or carport may be either 4' or at least 18'. Uncovered parking spaces may be set back 4' from the edge of the alley pavement.
3. Covered porches which consume at least 40% of the front width of the residence may encroach up to 6 feet into the required front setback.
G. Large species street trees (trees maturing at 45' in height listed on the City’s Street Tree Selection List) may substitute for a portion of required on-site tree density. If the minimum on-site tree density pursuant to VMC 20.770.080 cannot be met either on individual lots or in a common tract, the Planning Official may allow a .5 tree unit credit for every large street tree if provided within 8-foot wide minimum landscape strips or planter areas throughout the development.
H. Deciduous trees of 2" minimum caliper that are planted in an alley right-of-way or alley easement may be counted toward the minimum required on-site tree density.
I. Alternative surface water treatment. The Public Works Director may approve alternative methods for treatment and disposal of surface water from alleys, as appropriate, including: the use of pervious paving, or other BMP’s approved by the Western Washington Stormwater Manual.
J. Streets may be constructed to one of the approved narrow lot neighborhood street standards of VMC Title 11, as approved by the Transportation Manager. (Ord. M-3778, Added, 12/04/2006, Sec 2)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. It is the purpose and intent of this chapter to permit legal nonconforming lots, structures and uses to continue but to prohibit or limit the enlargement, expansion or extension of such uses. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Planning Official’s determination. The Planning Official shall make a determination regarding the legal status of a nonconforming use by means of a Type I procedure using the following criteria:
1. Proof that the use was permitted at the time it was established, by any of the following:
a. Copies of building and/or land use permits issued at the time the use was established;
b. Copies of zoning code provisions and/or maps in force at the time the use was established;
c. Demonstration that the use was established before the first development code for the community was adopted.
2. Proof that the use has been maintained over time. This includes copies of one or more of the following for every year from the time the use was established until the current year. Standard evidence that the use has been maintained over time includes:
a. Utility bills;
b. Income tax records;
c. Business licenses;
d. Listings in telephone, business and Polk directories;
e. Advertisements in dated publications, e.g., trade magazines; and/or
f. Building, land use or development permits.
B. Other regulations affecting nonconforming uses. The following regulations apply to all nonconforming uses described in this chapter:
1. Ownership: The status of a nonconforming use is not affected by changes in ownership.
2. Change to a conforming use: A nonconforming use may be changed to a conforming use upon review and approval by the Planning Official. Once a conforming use occupies the site, the nonconforming rights are lost and the nonconforming use may not be re-established.
3. Change to a conditional use: A nonconforming use may be changed to a conditional use permitted in the underlying zone if approved through a conditional use review. Once a conditional use occupies the site, the nonconforming rights are lost and a nonconforming use may not be re-established.
C. Uses or structures caused to be nonconforming through adoption of a master plan or subarea pursuant to this title may be considered as conforming if they are explicitly so designated as conforming in the approved master or subarea plan. (Ord. M-4103 § 4, 11/14/2014; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Development of nonconforming lots of record. If on the effective date of this title, a lot does not meet the lot size requirements of the applicable zoning district in which the property is located, the lot may:
1. Be occupied by any use permitted outright in a commercial zoning district, if the lot is located within a commercial zoning district; or
2. Be occupied by a single-family residential unit and accessory structures if the lot is located in a residential zoning district.
B. Nonconforming development. Where a lawful structure and/or improvement exists at the effective date of this chapter that could not be built under the terms of this title, such structure and/or improvement may be continued so long as it remains otherwise lawful, subject to the following provisions:
1. The nonconforming structure and/or improvement may not be enlarged or altered in a way which increases its nonconformity. However, any structure and/or improvement or portion thereof may be enlarged or altered in a way that complies with the requirements of this title or will decrease its nonconformity; or
2. The nonconforming structure and/or improvement may be rebuilt within its original footprint if it is destroyed by fire or other calamity, provided that an application to rebuild the structure must be filed within one year of the destruction.
3. Should such a structure and/or improvement be moved for any reason for any distance whatever, it shall thereafter conform to the regulations for the zoning district in which it is located after it is moved.
4. Exception: Legally-established detached accessory structures containing conforming uses in a single family residential districts may be structurally altered provided all of the following criteria are met:
a. Such addition shall not increase the gross floor area of the original accessory structure by more than 25%;
b. The addition shall not increase the structure’s nonconformity as it relates to setbacks or distance from main structure (e.g. structure may not encroach into noncompliant setback areas further);
c. The height of the structure shall not be increased;
d. The addition shall meet minimum building and fire codes.
e. The addition shall be in conformance with all other development requirements.
C. Nonconforming uses. A nonconforming use may be continued so long as it remains otherwise lawful, subject to the following provisions:
1. Any nonconforming use may be extended throughout any existing parts of a building which were designed for such use at the time of adoption or amendment of this title, but no such use shall be extended to occupy any land outside such building;
2. When a nonconforming use is discontinued or abandoned for one year, the use shall not thereafter be used except in full conformity with all regulations of the zoning district in which it is located. For purposes of this section, a use shall be deemed to be discontinued or abandoned upon the occurrence of the first of any of the following events:
a. On the date when the structure or premises is vacated;
b. On the date the use ceases to be actively involved in the sale of merchandise or the provision of services;
c. On the date of termination of any lease or contract under which the nonconforming use has occupied the premises; or
d. On the date a request for final reading of water and power meters is made to the applicable utility districts.
D. Where a nonconforming use is discontinued or abandoned for one year, the nonconforming use status of the land shall be eliminated.
E. Provisions of subsection (2)(a) above shall not be interpreted as granting an owner of a nonconforming use a vested right. (Ord. M-4066 § 6, 12/16/2013; Effective 01/16/2014; Ord. M-3840 § 44, 08/06/2007; Ord. M-3701 § 32, 05/02/2005; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
A. Routine repairs and maintenance permitted. On any nonconforming structure or portion of a structure containing a nonconforming situation, normal repairs, or replacement of roofs, nonbearing walls, fixtures, wiring or plumbing may be performed in a manner that does not conflict with the other provisions of this chapter.
B. Restoration to safe condition permitted. Nothing in this Title prevents the strengthening or restoring to a safe condition of any building or part thereof declared to be unsafe by any official charged with protecting the public safety, upon order of such official. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that any development, redevelopment, or use of a property will have minimal adverse off-site impacts, both during and after construction. This is accomplished by ensuring that property owners comply with existing federal, state or city rules and regulations, where applicable, and, in the absence of such regulations, establishing clear and objective standards to govern the acceptable level of these impacts as measured at the property line. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Compliance with applicable state and federal regulations. In addition to the regulations adopted in this chapter, each use, activity or operation within the City of Vancouver shall comply with the applicable federal and state regulations pertaining to noise, odor and discharge of matter into the atmosphere, or ground, sewer system, water bodies, or onto properties.
B. Evidence of compliance. In the case of new developments or modifications to existing developments, Planning Official may require submission of evidence demonstrating compliance with federal, state and local regulations and copies of necessary permits, and may impose conditions as necessary to ensure compliance with this chapter. In the case of existing uses, the Code Enforcement Official, upon receipt of a complaint and following an investigation into the complaint which confirms a violation, may impose conditions as necessary to ensure compliance with such regulations.
C. Continuing obligation. Continued compliance with this chapter, as well as federal, state and local regulations shall be the responsibility of the property owner and operator. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Environmental Noise. Unless otherwise exempted by WAC 173-60-050, no development or use may create noise impacts, measured at the property line of the receiving property that exceed the maximum environmental noise levels established by WAC 173-60-050 listed in Table 20.935.030-1 below:
Table 20.935.030-1. Maximum Permissible Noise Levels
Noise Source | Receiving Property | ||
Residential | Commercial | Industrial | |
Residential | 55 dBA1 | 57 dBA | 60 dBA |
Commercial | 57 | 60 | 65 |
Industrial | 60 | 65 | 70 |
1Applicable to Home Occupation related activities only.
1. The above maximum noise levels shall be reduced by 10 dBAs between the hours of 10 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. for the receiving property. Also, at any hour of the day or night the applicable noise limitations above may be exceeded for any receiving property by no more than 5 dBA for a total of 15 minutes in any one-hour period, or 10 dBA for a total of 5 minutes in any one-hour period, or 15 dBA for a total of 1.5 minutes in any one-hour period.
2. Where potential noise impacts to adjacent uses from a proposed land use or development activity are identified, measures to mitigate such impacts may be imposed upon the land use or activity through the applicable review process, and may include: construction of a sound wall or fence; reorientation of buildings, parking and loading areas; and/or placement of berms and landscaping.
3. Sound walls shall meet the design standards of VMC 20.912.080 Fences and Walls.
4. Outdoor construction activity, including construction staging, shall occur no earlier than 7 a.m. and no later than 8 p.m., seven days a week.
5. Due to the negative effect excessive levels of environmental noise have upon the public health, safety and welfare, the noise standards set out in Table 20.935-1 are intended to apply to all uses in existence on the date of adoption of this ordinance and no right to maintain a use not in conformance with those standards shall exist.
B. Off-site drainage. No property may be graded, filled, or otherwise altered in a way that allows stormwater runoff to flow onto another property. All stormwater runoff shall be contained on-site and directed to an approved stormwater facility (such as an infiltration system) unless otherwise approved by the City, and such facility shall be maintained in proper working condition.
C. Smoke and particulate matter. No development or use may create air emissions that exceed the legal limits established by the Southwest Clean Air Agency(SWCAA).
D. Light and glare. No development or use shall create off-site glare impacts from direct or reflected light sources. For new developments, the Planning Official may impose conditions which minimize potential off-site light and glare impacts, such as placement of light sources away from adjacent properties, requiring shields on lights, or reducing the number of lights to the minimum needed for safety and security. For existing sources of glare, the Code Enforcement Supervisor may require sources of glare to be shielded or redirected to minimize off-site glare. Due to the negative effect off-site light and glare have upon the public health, safety and welfare, the prohibition on off-site light and glare is intended to apply to all uses in existence on the date of adoption of this ordinance and no right to maintain a use creating off-site light and glare impacts shall exist.
E. Vibration. No development or use shall create off-site vibration impacts, discernible without instruments at the property line of the affected use. (Ord. M-3931 § 31, 11/02/2009; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
The purpose of on-site density transfer regulations is to provide an incentive to property owners for encouraging the protection, preservation and enhancement of significant sensitive lands and cultural resources, while maintaining the overall density of an underlying zoning district. The provisions of this chapter provide that sensitive resource areas may be set aside from development, while allowing a portion of the density, otherwise allowed upon the sensitive or cultural area, to be transferred to the developable (nonsensitive) portion of the site. Parcels where sensitive resources consist of more than 50% of the gross parcel area may have such areas deducted from the minimum required density calculations. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Applicability of provisions. The provisions of this chapter are discretionary, and may be applied where the Planning Official determines that such application to a particular land division will provide protection, preservation or enhancement of significant sensitive or cultural resources. The provisions of this chapter will not be applied where such application is inconsistent with these purposes, or presents a threat to health or safety. The provisions of this chapter shall not be construed to create a vested right or interest.
B. For sensitive resources. On-Site Density Transfer may be applied to land divisions pursuant to Chapters 20.320 VMC, Subdivisions, upon properties within the Low-Density Residential Zoning Districts, as governed by Chapter 20.410 VMC, where the presence of sensitive resources, as defined in Chapter 20.150 VMC, Definitions, limit the area available for development. For purposes of the density transfer, the sensitive resource area(s) set aside pursuant to this chapter must be equal to or greater than the minimum lot size for the underlying zone, and the nonsensitive portion of the property must be able to accommodate more dense development. For example, if the subject property is zoned R-6, then the amount of sensitive resource area must be 7,500 square feet or more.
C. Provisions and land divisions. When the provisions of this chapter are applied concurrently with land division pursuant to Chapter 20.320 VMC, Subdivisions, the minimum lot size provisions of Section 20.410.050(B) VMC are not applicable, and are replaced by the provisions of this chapter. The maximum density of the development, as applied to the entire subject property, shall not be increased beyond that of the underlying zone.
D. Exemption. The provisions in this chapter do not apply to planned developments that are regulated by Chapter 20.260 VMC. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Required pre-application conference. Requests for on-site density transfer shall require a pre-application conference, as governed by Section 20.210.080 VMC.
B. Requirements for a subdivision application. Requests for on-site density transfer shall accompany a subdivision application, and the informational requirements listed below must be submitted in addition to those required under Chapters 20.320 VMC, Subdivisions, to consider the application technically complete:
1. A delineation of all sensitive resource areas to be used in the calculation of density credit, summed in square feet, and indicated on the preliminary plat map.
2. The preliminary plat shall indicate the area in square feet of each lot proposed.
3. The preliminary plat shall indicate the amount of adjustment requested to the dimensional requirements of the road standards, setbacks, or lot configuration and indicate which lots require adjustment.
4. Calculations of total developable land (TDL); and gross density, used to determine the maximum number of lots allowed.
5. A written narrative, which describes how the use of on-site density transfer will protect, preserve or enhance sensitive or cultural resource areas and achieve density. The narrative shall include proposed methods for protection of sensitive resources, and cite the development regulations that support the request.
C. Review for completeness. The determination whether to apply the provisions of this chapter will be issued concurrent with the determination that an application is fully-complete, as governed by Section 20.210.100 VMC.
D. Determination of compliance. Compliance with this chapter shall be considered as findings in the determination whether a plat application complies with the State Subdivision Statute 58.17 RCW, City of Vancouver’s Comprehensive Plan, and Chapter 30.320 VMC Subdivisions. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. For sensitive or cultural resources. Where the provisions of this chapter apply, the boundaries of the sensitive or cultural resource(s) area must be delineated, calculated in square feet, and shown on the plat map submitted with the application for land division. The delineation must be adequately marked in the field, so that it may be verified by Planning Official
B. For density adjustments. The extent of any density adjustment requested under the provisions of this chapter, including minimum lot size, dimensional standards, minimum number of lots, and modification to the street standards, shall be accurately described in the preliminary plat application.
C. Guarantees. When the provisions of this chapter are applied concurrent with land division pursuant to Chapters 20.320 VMC, Subdivisions, the property owner will be required to grant to the City adequate guarantees to assure the protection, preservation or enhancement of the identified sensitive or cultural resource areas. Such guarantees may include, but are not limited to: conservation covenants or easements; mitigation plans; designation of open space areas to be held in common ownership; public dedications or easements; and, special setbacks from protected resources. Any protection measures proposed or required as conditions of the preliminary plat shall be recorded with the final plat.
D. Minimum lot size and dimensions. The application of this chapter shall not result in the creation of any single lot with a gross area that is less than 80% of the minimum lot size of the underlying zoning designation, nor shall any lot dimension (width, depth) be created that is less than 80% of the minimum required dimension.
E. For road modifications. Road standard modifications and reductions to setbacks or dimensional standards may be applied concurrent with application of this chapter, and do not require a separate development application. Provided that, such adjustment to development standards will be limited to the extent that such adjustments are available pursuant to street standard modifications, as governed by Section 20.950.180(K) VMC and Minor A Variances, as regulated by Chapter 20.270 VMC, Variances. Further provided that reductions to setback or dimensional standards resulting from the application of the provisions of this chapter shall not be used in conjunction with other provisions of this Code for the purposes of cumulative reduction in setback or dimensional standards that exceeds the reduction limitation set forth in Section (D) above.
F. Exception to Density Transfer Requirement. Where parcels contain sensitive resource areas equal to or greater than 50% of the gross parcel area, the minimum required density may, at the applicant’s option, be based on the net buildable area instead of the gross parcel area. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Required calculations for transfer. In applying On-Site Density Transfer, the gross density of the site’s sensitive resource area may be transferred to the developable portion of the property, or, for parcels with over 50% in sensitive resource area, deducted from the minimum required density, as allowed in Section 20.940.040(F) above. The minimum area for those lots proposed on the developable portion may be reduced to no less than 80% of the minimum lot size for the underlying zone. For example, proposed lots in the R-6 Zoning District, where the minimum lot size is 7,500 square feet minimum area, could be reduced to 6,000 square feet.
1. The total acreage of the subject property shall be divided by the minimum lot size of the underlying zoning district, and the result shall be the gross density. The gross density figure shall then be rounded down to the nearest whole number. The rounded gross density calculation shall be the maximum number of lots that may be located on the Total Developable Land (TDL), except as limited by the reduction in lot area as described above.
2. The applicant may use lot size reduction, adjustment to lot size dimensions or other development standards, within the limits described in Section 20.940.040(D) and (E) VMC above to develop the number of lots allowed under the provisions of this chapter. The number of lots allowed on the TDL as a result of On-Site Density Transfer may not be increased above gross density.
Example: Total Acreage of Parcel: 2 acres (43,560 sq. ft./acre = 87,120)
Sensitive area: 10,000 sq. ft.
Zoning Designation R-6 (7,500 sq. ft. minimum lot size)
87,120/7,500=11.62
2 acres = Gross Density: 11.62 (11 lots may be developed)
7,500 sq. ft. min. lot size
Total Acreage of Parcel minus Sensitive Area equals Total Developable Area:
(87,120 sq. ft.) (10,000 sq. ft.) (77,120 sq. ft.)
Up to 11 lots @ 6,000 sq. ft. each, with lot size reduction of no more than 20% available via On-Site Density Transfer, may be developed on the Total Developable Area. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
The purpose of these standards is to provide for safe and complete connections to the transportation system, and safe on-site circulation for motorists, bicyclists and pedestrians. In addition, these standards are intended to provide for adequate vehicle parking with appropriate landscaping. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. General. When land is used for motor vehicle and/or bicycle parking, the provisions of this chapter shall apply unless otherwise noted.
B. Types of parking. For the purposes of this chapter, there are three types of parking:
1. Accessory parking is parking associated with a specific development that is reserved for the use of the customers, residents, employees, students and/or visitors associated with the development. Accessory parking shall be subject to the minimum vehicle parking ratios contained in Table 20.945.070-2 and all of the other design and development standards in this chapter.
2. Non-Accessory Parking, which is any private or public vehicle and bicycle parking, either paid or free, which is not accessory to a specific development, including public and private parking structures and lots; transit park-and-ride lots; and free-standing fleet vehicle parking lots, per the definition in Section 20.160.020 VMC. Non-accessory parking shall be subject to all of the design and development standards in this chapter but exempt from the minimum parking ratios contained in Table 20.945.070-2.
3. Valet Parking. The Planning Official may approve valet parking or stacked parking to meet a portion of the on-site parking requirement as appropriate for the use.
C. New construction. Prior to occupancy of a new structure within any zoning district, off-street vehicle parking shall be provided in accordance with Section 20.945.070 VMC.
D. Expansion of existing use. Prior to occupancy of an enlargement of a structure which increases the on-site vehicle parking requirements, off-street vehicle parking shall be provided in accordance with Section 20.945.070 VMC subject to the following:
1. The number of required vehicle parking and loading spaces shall be based only on floor area or capacity of such enlargement using the minimum parking ratios contained in Table 20.945.070-2.
2. If the minimum number of vehicle parking spaces required for the enlargement added to the existing on-site parking supply falls short of the minimum number of vehicle parking spaces required for the project as a whole, the applicant shall provide additional spaces to bring the total supply up to the minimum required.
3. If the minimum number of vehicle parking spaces required for the enlargement added to the existing on-site development exceed the minimum number of vehicle parking spaces required for the whole project, the applicant may reduce the additional number of spaces provided, providing that the total supply still meets the minimum required.
E. Change of use. When an existing structure is changed from one use to another use as listed in Chapter 20.160 VMC, the following provisions shall apply:
1. If the parking requirements for each use are the same, no additional vehicle parking shall be required.
2. Where a change results in an intensification of use in terms of the number of vehicle parking spaces required, additional vehicle parking spaces shall be provided in an amount equal to the difference between the minimum number of spaces required for the existing use and the minimum number of spaces required for the more intensive use; unless there is an excess of vehicle parking on the site to accommodate the difference.
3. Where the change results in a decrease in intensity of use, the applicant may physically eliminate excess vehicle parking spaces in an amount equal to the difference between the minimum number of spaces required for the existing use and the minimum number of spaces required for the less intensive use. An applicant may request approval to reduce the number of excess spaces on the site by means of a Type I procedure.
F. Availability. The required minimum vehicle parking shall:
1. Be available for the parking of operable passenger vehicles of residents, patrons and employees only;
2. For nonresidential uses, it shall not be used for storage of vehicles or materials, or for fleet parking used in conduct of the business or use during regular business hours; and
3. Not be rented, leased or assigned to any other person or organization, unless as part of a joint parking agreement per Section 20.945.030(B) VMC. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Location of accessory vehicle parking in relation to the primary use. The location of off-street parking will be as follows:
1. Whenever possible, the required accessory parking shall be located on the same site as the primary use to which it is accessory.
2. When it is not feasible to locate all or part of the minimum accessory parking on the same site, the following shall apply:
a. Off-street accessory parking spaces for detached and attached single-family and duplex dwellings shall be located on the same lot with the dwelling(s), unless otherwise approved as part of a planned development, per Chapter 20.260 VMC.
b. Off-street accessory parking for multi-family dwellings shall be located no more than 300' from the building that they serve.
c. Off-street accessory parking lots for all other uses shall be located no further than 300' from the building or use that they are required to serve, measured in a straight line from the building with the following exceptions:
1. Commercial, institutional and industrial uses which require more than 40 parking spaces may provide for the spaces in excess of the required first 20 spaces up to a distance of 500' from the primary site, except that marine-related industrial uses such as Ports may locate all parking not associated with an office up to 1,000' from the use it is intended to serve;
2. Parks and recreational trails, where no maximum distance requirements are established.
3. Primary uses jointly using one or more parking facilities, as provided for in Subsection (B) below shall be required to comply with the requirements in Subsection (2)(a-c) above.
B. Joint parking. By means of a Type I procedure, as governed by Section 20.210.040 VMC, owners of two or more uses with legally established parking, may agree to utilize jointly the same parking and loading spaces on one or more lots when the peak hours of operation of the uses do not overlap, subject to the following:
1. The joint parking facility(ies) shall contain the same number of vehicle parking spaces required by the use which requires the greatest amount of parking per Section 20.945.070 VMC;
2. Satisfactory legal evidence shall be presented to the Planning Official in the form of deeds, leases or contracts to establish the joint use and be recorded with the Clark County Auditor’s Office against all properties involved;
3. If a joint use arrangement is subsequently terminated, or if the uses change, the requirements of this title shall apply to each use separately.
C. Parking in mixed-use projects.
1. Mixed-use projects shall include either uses that are contained in a building (vertical mixed-use) or in a group of single-purpose buildings that share a single parking facility (horizontal mixed-use).
2. The required minimum vehicle parking shall be determined using the following formula.
a. Primary use, i.e., that with the largest parking demand within the development, at 100% of the minimum vehicle parking required for that use in Section 20.945.070 VMC;
b. Secondary use, i.e., that with the second largest parking demand within the development, at 90% of the vehicle parking required for that use in Section 20.945.070 VMC;
c. Subsequent use or uses, at 80% of the vehicle parking required for that use(s) in Section 20.945.070 VMC.
D. Disabled-accessible parking and access. All parking areas and accessible routes of travel for the disabled shall comply with the standards of the State of Washington and the City of Vancouver applicable building code. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Review Authority. Parking lot design and drainage shall be subject to review and approval of the City Transportation Manager.
B. Maintenance of parking areas. All parking lots shall be kept clean and in good repair at all times. Breaks in paved surfaces shall be repaired promptly. Broken or splintered wheel stops shall be replaced so that their function will not be impaired.
C. All signing and striping, including that for private parking lots, shall conform to the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). Individual spaces shall be marked with painted stripes.
D. Location. Parking spaces shall not be permitted in any setback except as otherwise specified in this title. For single-family and duplex dwellings, vehicle, vessel, recreational vehicle trailer parking is permitted in the front yard setback provided it is: located on a legally established driveway; located out of sight triangles as per Chapter 20.895 VMC; does not extend into city right-of-way; and is currently licensed and registered. Parking of motor homes, trailers, recreational vehicles and boats is allowed in one side or rear setback on an impervious surface and served by a paved driveway. Such parking must be screened from adjoining properties by a six-foot sight-obscuring fence or hedge.
E. No parking space shall be located where backing maneuvers from such a space would interfere with traffic flow to/from a public street to the parking area, generally within 20' of a circulation aisle-way near a public street access point.
F. Driveways. Driveways which provide access to off-street parking or loading from public streets shall comply with the following:
1. Driveways from the street to off-street parking or loading areas shall be designed and constructed to facilitate the flow of traffic and provide maximum safety for pedestrians. At a minimum all driveways shall meet arterial access spacing standards; on arterial roadways shared driveways and cross-access easements may be required to improve arterial efficiency and safety consistent with access management practices detailed in NCHRP Report 420.
2. Where driveways are gated, even temporarily, the driveway approach shall be designed such that vehicles approaching or leaving the gated drive can queue to enter/exit the traffic stream without blocking the sidewalk or the street traffic, and shall not impede internal site circulation. Design of gated driveways shall be subject to review and approval by the City Transportation Manager.
3. Driveways shall be improved with a permanent surface including but not limited to asphalt, concrete, brick or masonry or other material approved by the Planning Official. Applicants are encouraged to use City and Department of Ecology alternative paving Best Management Practices to enhance on-site water quality where appropriate based on anticipated use.
4. Except for single-family and duplex residences, groups of more than two parking spaces shall be served by a driveway so that no backing movements or other maneuvering within a street or other public right-of-way is necessary.
5. Loading/unloading driveways. If an on-site drop-off is provided, the driveway shall be designed for continuous forward flow of passenger vehicles.
G. On-site vehicle stacking for drive-through use.
1. All uses providing drive-through services as defined by this chapter shall provide a stacking lane on the same site for inbound vehicles as noted in Table 20.945-1. Stacking lane requirements shall be determined through the review process, be based upon an approved traffic study and may either exceed or fall below the guidelines detailed in Table 20.945.040-1.
Table 20.945.040-1 Stacking Lane Guidelines for Uses With Drive-Through Windows | |
|---|---|
Use | Stacking Lane Guideline |
Drive-in banks | 5 spaces per service terminal |
Automated teller | 50'/service terminal machines |
Drive-in cleaners, repair services | 50' |
Drive-in restaurants | 180' |
Mechanical car washes | 3 spaces per washing unit |
Parking facilities | |
Free-flow entry | 1 space per entry driveway |
Ticket dispense entry | 2 spaces per entry driveway |
Manual ticket dispensing | 100'/entry driveway |
Attendant parking | 100' |
Vehicle fuel sales | 3 spaces per pump |
1Minimum length of one space = 18 feet
2. Stacking lanes must be designed so that they do not interfere with parking and vehicle, pedestrian and bicycle circulation. Stacking lanes for the purpose of selling food must provide at least one clearly marked parking space per service window for the use of vehicles waiting for an order to be filled.
3. No portion of a stacking lane shall be located in a setback except at the points of connection between the site and public or private streets.
H. Pedestrian access, circulation and connections. The following standards apply to multi-family, commercial, industrial and institutional uses in all zones:
1. The applicant shall extend pedestrian circulation routes to sidewalks and transit stops along streets abutting the site, to pedestrian facilities that extend to the edge of the site from off-site, and to the edge of the site in the direction of existing, approved or proposed off-site pedestrian and transit facilities.
2. Pedestrian circulation routes shall also connect structures and uses on the site, such as buildings, vehicle and bicycle parking areas, children’s play areas, required outdoor areas, open spaces, plazas, resting areas and viewpoints.
3. To the extent practicable, the pedestrian circulation system shall be designed to minimize the distance a pedestrian needs to walk between typical origins and destinations of and off the site, including transit stops, public sidewalks and building entrances. Circuitous routes generally should be avoided except for an appropriate purpose given the use or setting.
4. Where pedestrian or bicycle routes cross access, maneuvering, parking or loading areas, the crossing must be clearly identified by using elevation changes, speed bumps, a different paving material, and other method that effectively alerts drivers, pedestrians and cyclists of the location and nature of the crossing. Striping is strongly discouraged as the only method of identification of pedestrian crossings. When striping is used, it must be continuously maintained in perpetuity in an effective manner by the property owner.
5. Where a pedestrian or bicycle route is parallel and adjacent to an auto travel lane or parking area, the pedestrian or bicycle route must be safely separated from the auto travel lane by using a raised path, a raised curb, bollards, landscaping or other physical barrier.
6. Lighting. The on-site pedestrian circulation system must be lighted to a level of 0.5 foot candle, except for handicapped accessible areas which must be lighted to 1.0 foot candle. Such lighting shall be directed in a manner to prevent glare on nearby residential areas.
7. Pedestrian route dimensions. In all commercial zones, the primary pedestrian connection between the main entrance and the fronting arterial shall be a minimum of 8' unobstructed width. All other pedestrian connections shall be a minimum of 6' unobstructed width. The Planning Official may modify these standards for minor expansions of existing uses that face site-specific challenges.
8. Required pedestrian circulation routes shall be improved with an asphalt, concrete or other approved all-weather surface; provided, pedestrian circulation routes through recreational or open space areas may be improved with a material consistent with their purpose and the characteristics of their location.
9. Connections. The pedestrian system must be connected to site and adjacent streets and nearby transit stops. The pedestrian system must also connect public open space or parks, commercial, office and institutional developments when existing development does not preclude such connection. Development patterns must not preclude eventual site-to-site connections, even if an adjacent site is not planned for development at the time of the applicant’s development. Connections between buildings and the street shall be no greater than 200' apart.
I. Parking lot landscaping.
1. Purpose. The following landscaping standards are intended to improve and soften the appearance of parking areas; reduce the visual impact of parking areas from sidewalks, streets, and especially from adjacent residential zones; shade and cool parking areas; reduce the amount and rate of stormwater runoff from vehicle areas; and improve air quality.
2. Perimeter Landscaping. Any off-street parking area, other than for a single-family or duplex dwelling, shall be effectively screened by a sight-obscuring fence, wall or evergreen planting on each side which adjoins property situated in a residential zone, the premises of any school or like institution, or a public or private street. Screening along a common property line shall be 6' high. Landscape screening shall be capable of attaining a height of 6' within 2 years of planting. Screening along all public or private streets shall be a minimum of 3' high.
3. Interior Landscaping. Interior landscaping must be provided for sites containing more than 20 parking spaces. At least 10% of the parking and maneuvering areas, not including driveway areas, must be landscaped.
a. Standards. The landscape materials must meet the general standards below:
1. The landscaping must be dispersed throughout the parking area. All of the required landscape area may be in the parking area, or some may be in the loading areas.
2. Perimeter landscaping may not substitute for interior landscaping. However, interior landscaping may join perimeter landscaping as long as it extends at least four feet into the parking areas from the perimeter landscape line.
b. Individual tree-planting spaces. Where an individual tree is planted in a space surrounded by pavement, the planting area must have a minimum dimension of six feet with each tree placed in the middle.
c. Required landscape materials for parking lot landscaping. Landscape materials for parking lot interior and perimeter landscaping must be provided as follows:
1. Tree required. At least one tree must be provided for every 10 parking stalls. Existing trees may be used to meet this standard. At lease one tree shall be planted in each landscape island. Broadleaf trees must be at least 2 caliper inches at the time of planting and conifer trees must be at least 5' tall at the time of planting. Trees must be dispersed throughout the parking area to provide shade for the parking area. Some trees may be grouped, but the groups must be dispersed.
2. Shrubs required. At least one shrub must be provided for every 30 sq. ft. of required landscaped area. Shrubs must be at least the one-gallon container size.
3. Ground cover required. All of the landscaped areas that is not planted with trees and shrubs must be planted in ground cover plants, which may include grasses. Paths made of paving stones, flagstones, bricks, pavement, or similar materials may provide access across landscaped areas, but the surface area of impermeable materials does not count toward the required landscaped area.
4. Native Species. Planting of native species is encouraged.
J. Parking lot surfacing.
1. All areas used for the parking or storage or maneuvering of any vehicle shall be improved with asphalt, concrete or other permanent surface approved by the Planning Official; The Planning Official may approve the use of City and Department of Ecology alternative paving Best Management Practices to enhance on-site water quality where determined to be appropriate based on type and frequency of anticipated use.
2. Parking areas to be used primarily for temporary staging of construction equipment and temporary parking for the facility during construction may be surfaced in gravel when authorized by the approval authority at the time the site development approval is given. The Planning Official may require the property owner to remove the gravel immediately following construction or enter into an agreement to pave the parking area: (1) within a specified period of time after its establishment; or (2) if there is a change in the types or weights of vehicles utilizing the parking area; or (3) if there is evidence of adverse effects upon adjacent roadways, water courses or properties. Such an agreement shall be executed as a condition of approval of the plan to establish the gravel parking area
K. Parking lot and access striping.
1. Except for single-family and duplex residences, any area intended to be used to meet the off-street vehicle parking requirements as contained in this chapter shall have all parking spaces clearly marked; and
2. All interior drives and access aisles shall be clearly marked and signed to show direction of flow and maintain vehicular and pedestrian safety.
L. Wheel stops. Parking spaces along the boundaries of a parking lot or adjacent to interior landscaped areas or sidewalks shall be provided with a wheel stop or bumper rail at least 6" high located 2' back from the front of the parking stall. The front 2' of the parking stall may be concrete, asphalt or low- lying landscape material that does not exceed the height of the wheel stop, provided sidewalks or other pedestrian paths are not obstructed.
M. Drainage. Off-street parking and loading areas shall be sloped to drain in accordance with specifications approved by the Director of Public Works. These areas shall be drained to prevent the flow of water onto the right-of-way, across pedestrian facilities, or onto adjacent properties unless specifically authorized by the Director of Public Works.
N. Lighting. All off-street parking areas larger than 5,550 sq. ft. shall be illuminated. Public parks that close at dusk are exempted from this provision. All lighting shall be directed away from any adjacent residential zone.
O. Space and aisle dimensions. Table 20.945.040-2
Table 20.945.040-2 Space and Aisle Dimensions | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Standard Stall Dimension | Compact Stall Dimension | Aisle Width Dimension | ||||
Angle (degrees) | Stall Width (feet) | Stall Depth (feet) | Stall Width (feet) | Stall Depth (feet) | 1-Way Aisle Width | 2-Way |
0 | 20 | 8 | 8 | 18 | 12 | 20 |
45 | 9 | 17 | 8 | 15 | 14 | 20 |
60 | 9 | 17 | 8 | 15 | 16 | 22 |
90 | 9 | 17 | 8 | 15 | 22 | 22 |
1. Designated disabled parking stalls which meet minimum dimensional requirements shall be counted as standard size parking stalls and shall be provided as required by applicable State of Washington and the City Adopted Building Code, as amended for disabled person parking spaces.
2. The width of each parking space includes a stripe that separates each space.
3. Up to 50% of all required on-site vehicular parking spaces may be compact spaces. Such spaces shall be marked as “compact” or “C”.
4. Clustering. No more than an average of 10 parking spaces shall be placed side by side without an intervening break provided by a circulation aisleway, pedestrian walkway, or landscaping. If an average of no more than 10 side-by-side stalls is maintained overall, up to 15 stalls may be located side-by-side. Where landscaping provides a break in the group of spaces, the landscape island shall extend at least 1' into the circulation aisleway to provide a visual narrowing of the circulation aisleway.
5. A portion of a parking space may be landscaped instead of paved as follows:
a. The landscaped area may be up to 2' of the front of the space as measured from a line parallel to the direction of the bumper of a vehicle using the space.
b. Landscaping must be ground cover plants; and
c. The landscaped area counts towards parking lot interior landscaping requirements, but not perimeter landscaping requirements, and shall not obstruct the minimum width requirements for pedestrian circulation.
6. Other parking angles, such as but not limited to 30 degrees or 75 degrees may be approved by the Planning Official, with dimensional requirements consistent with those illustrated in Table 20.945.040-2.
7. Minimum standards for a standard parking stall’s length and width, aisle width, and maneuvering space in a parking structure shall be determined as noted in Table 20.945.040-2. (Ord. M-4289 § 4, 2019; Ord. M-4195 § 1, 2017; Ord. M-4034 § 32, 2012; Ord. M-3931 § 32, 2009; Ord. M-3847 § 15, 2007; Ord. M-3840 § 45, 2007; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Standards for all bicycle parking. Any bicycle parking implemented under this section must meet the following standards:
1. Bicycle parking must be provided at the ground level, and may be provided in floor, or wall racks that must hold bicycles securely by the means of the frame. Bicycles may be tipped vertically for storage, but not hung above the ground. If the bicycle parking is placed in the public right-of-way, it shall not obstruct pedestrian walkways and shall meet all of the requirements outlined in obtainment of the street use permit.
2. Where required bicycle parking is provided with racks, the racks must meet the following standards:
a. The parking spaces shall be at least 2' wide and 6' long with an overhead clearance of at least 7', and with a 5' access aisle;
b. The rack must hold the bicycle securely by means of the frame. The frame must be able to be supported so that the bicycle cannot be pushed or fall to one side in a manner that will damage the wheels;
c. The bicycle frame and one wheel can be locked to the rack with a high-security, U-shaped shackle lock if both wheels are left on the bicycle;
d. The rack must be securely anchored with theft-resistant hardware.
3. Where bicycle parking is provided with lockers, such lockers must meet the following standards:
a. An area of at least 6' of horizontal distance shall be provided around the entrance of each locker that is free from obstructions, an overhead clearance of at least 7', and with a 5' access aisle; and
b. The lockers must be securely anchored.
B. Bicycle parking signing. Entry and directional signs shall be provided by the property owner if bicycle parking facilities are not directly visible and obvious from the public right-of-way. The signs shall be used to properly direct bicyclists from the public right-of-way to the bicycle parking facilities.
C. Bicycle rack maintenance. The property owner of a site shall have a continuing obligation to properly maintain any bicycle parking facilities on their property. The City of Vancouver will maintain any bicycle parking facilities that are in the public right-of-way.
D. Parking in mixed-use projects. Bicycle parking for multiple uses may be clustered in one or several locations, and shall meet all other requirements for bicycle parking. For buildings with multiple entrances, bicycle racks should be distributed proportionately at and visible from the various public entrances. Bicycle parking lockers should be located adjacent to an employee entrance. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Parking structure dimensions and design shall be subject to review and approval by the Transportation Manager.
B. Ground-floor windows/wall openings. All above-grade parking structures shall provide ground-floor windows or wall openings along the street frontages. Blank walls are prohibited. Any wall facing the street shall contain windows, doors or display areas equal to at least 20% of the ground floor wall area facing the street excluding those portions of the face(s) devoted to driveway entrances and exits, stairwells, elevators and centralized payment booths. Required windows shall have a sill no more than 4' above grade. Where the interior floor level prohibits such placement, the sill may be raised to allow it to be no more than 2' above finished floor wall up to a maximum sill height of 6' above grade. These openings shall be glazed or grated.
C. Entrance/Exit Design. Adequate vision clearance shall be provided so that motorists leaving a parking structure have a clear view of the sidewalk on either side of the exit, and so that approaching pedestrians have a clear view of any approaching vehicle. Parking structure entrances and exits shall be designed to achieve travel speeds not to exceed 5 miles per hour, and shall require a vehicle stop directly prior to crossing the street sidewalk. Entrance and exit areas shall be designed so that vehicles approaching or leaving the parking structure can queue to enter/exit the traffic stream without blocking the sidewalk.
D. Parking Structure Internal Design and Pedestrian Circulation. Parking structure internal circulation design shall include provisions for the safe and convenient circulation of pedestrians. Design speed shall not exceed 10 miles per hour, and traffic control measures shall be provided at any location where vehicle circulation crosses a pedestrian walk way. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Parking requirements for unlisted uses.
1. The planning official may rule that a use not specifically listed in Table 20.945.070-2 below is a use similar to a listed use and that the same parking standards shall apply. If the applicant requests that the planning official’s decision be rendered in writing, it shall constitute an interpretation, as governed by Chapter 20.255 VMC; and
2. The planning official shall maintain a list of approved unlisted use parking requirements that have the same effect as an amendment to this chapter.
B. Choice of parking requirements. When a building or use is planned or constructed in such a manner that a choice of parking requirements could be made, the use which requires the greater number of parking spaces shall govern.
C. Measurements. The following measurements shall be used in calculating the total minimum number of vehicle parking spaces required in this chapter:
1. Fractions. Fractional space requirements of up to 0.5 shall be rounded down to the next whole number and 0.5 or greater rounded up to the next whole number.
2. Employees. Where employees are specified for the purpose of determining the minimum vehicle parking spaces required, the employees counted are those who work on the premises during the largest shift at the peak season.
3. Students. When students are specified for the purpose of determining the minimum vehicle parking spaces required, the students counted are those who are on the campus during the peak period of the day during a typical school term.
4. Space. Unless otherwise noted, where gross square feet (gsf) are specified, the area measured shall be gross floor area under the roof measured from the faces of the structure, excluding only space devoted to covered off-street parking or loading.
D. Exclusions to minimum vehicle parking requirements.
1. The following uses shall be exempt from minimum parking requirements outlined in Tables 20.945.070-1 and 20.945.070-2 below and their required off-street parking shall be zero for all residential units:
a. Any residential developments where the owner certifies and provides evidence that at least 50 percent of dwelling units are rented or sold at levels affordable to households earning 100 percent area median income or lower in accordance with the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development for a minimum of 10 consecutive years from final occupancy.
2. The following shall not be counted towards the computation of the minimum parking spaces as required in Table 20.945.070-2 below:
a. On-street parking. Parking spaces in the public street or alley shall not be eligible as fulfilling any part of the parking requirement except as provided elsewhere in this title;
b. Fleet parking. Required vehicle parking spaces may not be used for storage of fleet vehicles, except when a use can show that employee and fleet parking spaces are used interchangeably (e.g., the employee drives the fleet vehicle from home, or the spaces are used for fleet storage only at night and are available for employee use during the day). For the purposes of this title, space exclusively devoted to the storage of fleet vehicles will be considered as outdoor storage.
E. Reductions in minimum required vehicle parking.
1. The planning official may reduce the minimum off-street vehicle parking spaces required in Table 20.945.070-2 by up to 10 percent in new nonresidential developments by means of a Type I procedure, when an applicant for a development permit can demonstrate in a parking study prepared by a traffic consultant or in parking data from comparable sites that:
a. The requested reduction in parking will not have an adverse impact on uses in the immediate vicinity.
b. Use of transit, demand management programs, and/or special characteristics of the customer, client, employee or resident population will reduce expected vehicle use and parking space demand for this development, as compared with Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE) vehicle trip generation rates and minimum city parking requirements.
c. The city shall not be responsible for providing parking for a development should a reduction in required parking under this section result in a deficit in parking that is not desirable to the owner of the property or use.
2. The planning official may reduce the minimum off-street vehicle parking spaces required in Table 20.945.070-2 up to 20 percent if the required conditions detailed in subsections (E)(1) and (E)(2) of this section are met. Reductions in parking minimums shall be cumulative and inclusive of reductions allowed under any provision of this title.
a. For every five bicycle parking spaces provided which meet bicycle parking design standards or for each bicycle locker (two-bicycle capacity), the minimum motor vehicle parking requirement may be reduced by one space up to seven percent of total required vehicle parking spaces. Mixed-use developments using this provision shall provide bicycle parking indoors.
b. Sites where at least 20 parking spaces are required and where at least one street lot line abuts a designated arterial roadway, transit-supportive plazas may be substituted for up to five percent of required vehicle parking.
i. The plaza must be adjacent to the arterial street. If there is a bus stop along the site’s frontage, the plaza must be adjacent to the bus stop.
ii. The plaza must be at least 300 square feet in area and be shaped so that a 10-foot-by-10-foot square will fit entirely within the plaza.
iii. The plaza must be open to the public, contain a bench or other sitting area, contain a shelter or other weather protection covering at least 20 square feet, and shall have at least 10 percent and no more than 25 percent landscaping.
c. Building Orientation/Site Design Incentive. Developments which incorporate all of the following building orientation/site design characteristics into the site plan shall be eligible for a five percent reduction in required on-site parking:
i. Build to the Sidewalk. Buildings located as close as possible to the public street and sidewalk, preferably at the minimum required setback. Primary entrance shall be oriented toward the street.
ii. Provide public spaces. Commercial development should provide spaces for civic interaction. To make these more accessible and accommodating to the public, pedestrian plazas, street furniture and landscaped open spaces should be incorporated as site amenities.
iii. Build to the corner. Buildings on corner lots should be located on the street corner with building frontage on both streets with primary entrances oriented toward the intersection. If no buildings are located at street corners, pedestrian plazas and amenities should provide a focus for the area. Intersection vision clearance standards shall apply.
iv. Pad Development. Pad development should be located at the corners of a development or at the intersection created by the site driveway with the public street. The location and site design of pad development should integrate seamlessly with the on-site pedestrian circulation plan and all off-site pedestrian, bicycle and transit facilities.
3. A request to reduce the required minimum parking more than 20 percent is subject to a Type II variance procedure.
F. Parking in City Center (CX) Zone. The following minimum requirements shall apply, in accordance with VMC 20.630.060, Parking Control, in all areas zoned City Center (CX) district:
Table 20.945.070-1. CX District Parking Space Requirements
Land Use | Parking Requirements |
|---|---|
Multifamily housing | 0.75 space/dwelling unit |
Senior housing, and housing for persons with disabilities | 0 spaces for residential units 0.75 space per employee1 plus one visitor space per 10 residents |
All other residential uses | 1 space/dwelling unit |
Transient lodging | 1 space/living unit |
Congregate care facilities for nonsenior residents | 1 space/2 living units |
All other uses | 1 space/1,000 sq. ft. of floor area |
1The number of employees based on maximum number of employees present at any given time (i.e., during the largest shift of employees).
G. Parking in Transit Overlay District. Developments located within the Transit Overlay District may be subject to special parking standards contained in Chapter 20.550 VMC.
H. Application of Parking Requirements.
1. Notwithstanding any other requirement of this chapter, no parking shall be required for any commercial use located in an existing structure which abuts Main Street between Fifth Street and McLoughlin Boulevard, up to and including the first two floors above street level, and any basement levels. The requirements for uses in all floors of three stories or above shall be the same as that in all other areas in the City Center district (CX).
2. In addition, notwithstanding any other requirements of this chapter, requirements for off-street parking shall not apply within the Community Commercial (CC) district extending from McLoughlin Boulevard to Fourth Plain Boulevard in the event of a change in commercial occupancy of a building or of a remodeling of a commercial structure if the original floor area is not exceeded by 25 percent. This provision does not apply to conversion of residential occupancy to commercial occupancy. The requirements for off-street parking for the Community Commercial (CC) district within this area shall be based on the City Center (CX) district parking requirements of Table 20.945.070-1 and shall only be for the total area of additions in excess of 25 percent of the floor area in existence on July 19, 2010.
3. Commercial uses in the Neighborhood Commercial (CN) district may count available on-street parking spaces which are immediately adjacent to the development toward the minimum on-site parking requirement.
4. Parking stalls used for electric vehicle basic charging stations and rapid charging stations shall be counted toward the minimum number of required parking stalls in a development.
I. Use of Public Parking. The requirements for off-street parking can be satisfied by execution of a long-term lease for a segment of equivalent parking in an existing public or private parking facility. Lease fees in public facilities would be at market rates as established and adjusted by the Vancouver city council after considering the advice of the parking advisory committee. Continued leasing of such space shall be required, and failure to provide the required parking shall be cause for revocation of the occupancy permit for the structure involved.
J. Specific requirements for minimum parking. Parking shall be provided for uses as per Table 20.945.070-2 below:
Table 20.945.070-2. Minimum Off-Street Vehicle Parking Requirements
Use | Minimum |
|---|---|
RESIDENTIAL | |
Household Living | See Housing Types below |
Group Living | 1.0 space per 7 residents served under age 12 1.0 space per resident served ages 12 – 17 1.0 space per resident served age 18 or older |
Transitional Housing | 1.0:3 beds |
Home Occupations | None |
HOUSING TYPES | |
Single Dwellings, Attached | 1.0/DU1 |
Single Dwellings, Detached | 1.0/DU |
Accessory Dwelling Units | None |
Duplexes | 1.0/DU |
Market Rate Multifamily Dwelling Units | 0.75/DU if located within 0.25 mile of frequent transit line,6 1.0/DU if located 0.25 mile or further from a frequent transit line |
Housing for Low-Income Households Earning Under 60% Median Area Income | 0.75/DU |
Manufactured Home Subdivisions | 1.0/DU |
Manufactured Home Parks | 1.0/DU |
Senior Housing Facilities and Housing for People With Disabilities | 0 spaces for residential units 0.75 space per employee7 plus 1.0 visitor space per 10 residents |
CIVIC (Institutional) | |
Basic Utilities | None |
Community Centers | Per approved parking study |
Community Recreation | Per approved parking study |
Cultural Institutions | 1.0:400 sq. ft. |
Day Care | |
– Child Care | Family Day Care Home: none Institutional: 1.0/employee + 1.0/12 children served |
– Adult Day Care | Family Day Care Home: none Institutional: 1.0/employee + 1.0/12 clients served |
– Dog Day Care | 1.0/employee + |
Emergency Services | 1.0:300 |
Medical Centers | 1.0/4 beds (hospital, residential care center); 1.0/2 beds for patients or residents (convalescent hospital, nursing home, congregate care facility) |
Parks/Open Space | |
– Neighborhood Parks | Parks Department to determine |
– Community Parks | |
– Regional Parks | |
– Trails | |
Postal Service | 1.0:300 |
Religious Institutions | 1.0/6 seats or 12' of bench in main assembly area |
Social/Fraternal Clubs | 1.0/100 |
Transportation Facilities | None |
Schools | |
– Preschool | 2.0/classroom |
– Elementary and Middle | 1.0 space/4 seats or 8 feet of bench length in auditorium or assembly room, whichever is greater |
– High School | 1.0 space/employee, plus 1.0 space/each 6 students, or 1.0 space/4 seats or 8 feet of bench length in auditorium, whichever is greater |
– College* *Classrooms = 30 students. Lecture halls require additional parking of 12.0 spaces per 30 seats. Additional parking may be required as determined by planning official. | 1.0 space/3 seats in classrooms |
COMMERCIAL | |
Commercial and Transient Lodging | 1.0/lodging unit |
Eating/Drinking Establishments | 1.0/250 |
Entertainment-Oriented | |
– Adult Entertainment | Refer to specific use, i.e., theater, book or video store |
Indoor Entertainment | |
– Movie/Live Performance Theaters | 1.0/6 seats or 12' of bench |
– Skating Rinks/Arcades | 1.0/150 |
– Bowling Alleys | 5.0 spaces per lane |
– Shooting Ranges | 1.0 space per lane |
– Major Event Entertainment | 1.0/6 seats or 12' of bench |
General Retail | |
– Sales-Oriented | 1.0/300 |
– Personal Services | 1.0/400 |
– Repair-Oriented | 1.0/400 |
– Bulk Sales | (a) Properties with less than 10,000 square feet of open sales or rental area shall provide 1.0 space for each 1,000 square feet of gross floor area, plus 1.0 space for each 2,500 square feet of open sales or rental area. (b) Properties with 10,000 square feet or more of open sales or rental area shall provide 1.0 space for each 1,000 square feet of gross floor area, plus 4.0 spaces, plus 1.0 space for each 10,000 square feet of open sales or rental area in excess of 10,000 square feet. |
– Outdoor Sales | Same as Bulk Sales |
Animal Kennels/Shelters | 1.0/600 plus 1.0 per employee |
Motor Vehicle Related | |
– Motor Vehicle Sales/Rental | (a) Properties with less than 10,000 square feet of open sales or rental area shall provide 1.0 space for each 1,000 square feet of gross floor area, plus 1.0 space for each 2,500 square feet of open sales or rental area. (b) Properties with 10,000 square feet or more of open sales or rental area shall provide 1.0 space for each 1,000 square feet of gross floor area, plus 4.0 spaces, plus 1.0 space for each 10,000 square feet of open sales or rental area in excess of 10,000 square feet. |
– Motor Vehicle Servicing/Repair | 1.0/500 |
– Vehicle Fuel Sales3 | No less than 2.0 |
– Electric Vehicle Recharging Station | None |
Office | |
– General | 1.0/400 |
– Medical | 1.0/200 |
– Extended | 1.0/300 |
Nonaccessory Parking | N/A |
Self-Service Storage | Based on area of office |
Marinas | |
INDUSTRIAL | |
Industrial Services | 1.0/600 |
Manufacturing and Production | 1.0/800 |
Railroad Yards | None |
Research and Development | 1.0/600 |
Warehouses/Freight Movement | 1.0/5,000 |
Wholesale Sales | 1.0/1,250 |
Waste-Related | 1.0 space per 200 square feet of office space, plus 1.0 space per employee |
OTHER | |
Agriculture/Horticulture | None |
Airports/Airparks | None |
Cemeteries | 1.0/6 seats or 12' of bench in chapels |
Detention Facilities | 1.0/3 beds |
Heliports | None |
Mining | 1.0 per employee maximum shift |
Rail Lines/Utility Corridors | None |
Temporary Uses | None |
Wireless Communication Facilities | 1.0 |
1DU = dwelling unit.
2Does not include outpatient clinics or medical offices; see Medical/Dental Offices.
3Gasoline stations offering other retail goods for sale, in enclosed spaces accessible by the customer, shall also comply with the parking requirements for convenience stores. Gasoline stations providing vehicle repair or maintenance services shall also comply with the parking requirements for vehicle repair or service facilities.
4Senior multifamily housing project shall provide on-site parking at a minimum rate of one space per dwelling unit.
5(Reserved for future use)
6“Frequent transit service” means a bus rapid transit or other high capacity transit corridor, or transit corridors, with existing weekday peak service frequencies of 35 minutes or less, as indicated in the C-Tran 2018-2033 Transit Development Plan.
7The number of employees based on maximum number of employees present at any given time (i.e., during the largest shift of employees).
(Ord. M-4506 § 2 (Exh. B), 2025; Ord. M-4425 § 5, 2023; Ord. M-4377 § 2(c), 2022; Ord. M-4255 § 12, 2018; Ord. M-4254 § 3(QQ), 2018; Ord. M-4223 § 4, 2017; ACM dated 2/18/2014, Correction to E.3 Type III Variance changed to Type II; Ord. M-4002 § 12, 2011; Ord. M-3959 § 48, 2010; Ord. M-3931 § 33, 2009; Ord. M-3922 § 44, 2009; Ord. M-3847 § 16, 2007; Ord. M-3701 § 33, 2005; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Berths required. Except in the City Center (CX) and the Heights (HX) districts, new or substantially renovated buildings or structures that require receipt, delivery or distribution of materials and merchandise by trucks, shall provide and maintain off-street loading berths according to prescribed standards. The planning official may through a Type 1 procedure waive off-street loading requirements for uses that demonstrate a loading berth is not needed. The applicant shall demonstrate that either the proposed use does not require receipt, delivery or distribution of materials and merchandise by truck, that only small delivery trucks will access the site, or that large trucks will only access the site outside of normal business hours.
B. Off-street loading spaces.
1. With the exception of the uses listed in Subsection (2) below, commercial and industrial off-street loading requirements shall provide a minimum number of berths as indicated on Table 20.945.080-1
Table 20.945.080-1 Minimum Loading Berths | |
|---|---|
Number of Berths | Gross Floor Area |
1 | 5,000 sq. ft. up to 25,000 sq. ft. |
2 | 25,000 sq. ft. up to 50,000 sq. ft. |
3 | 50,000 sq. ft. up to 100,000 sq. ft. |
1 additional for each | 50,000 sq. ft. in excess of 100,000 sq. ft. |
2. Office buildings; hotels; restaurants; auditoriums and medical centers, colleges, residential care centers or other institutions that contain a structure or structures with a total area of 30,000 gsf or greater shall provide the minimum number of off-street loading spaces as indicated in Table 20.945.080-2.
Table 20.945.080-2 Minimum Loading Berths for Selected Uses | |
|---|---|
Number of Berths | Gross Floor Area |
1 | 30,000 sq. ft. up to 100,000 sq. ft. |
2 | 100,000 sq. ft. up to 100,000 sq. ft. |
1 additional for each | 50,000 sq. ft. in excess of 100,000 sq. ft. |
C. Size of berths. Berths required by preceding sections shall be a minimum of 10' wide, 45' long and 14' high.
D. On-site location. Required loading berths shall be located on the site of the primary use to which they are an accessory. When there is a campus development, e.g., medical center, college, business park, required loading berths may be aggregated on the site.
E. Design standards. Berths shall be provided in such a manner to avoid undue congestion and interference with public use of adjacent streets, sidewalks and alleys.
1. Access to such berths shall be from an alley when such exists unless the alley abuts a residential zone.
2. Off-street truck loading areas shall be separated from the off-street parking area.
3. The surface shall be paved with asphalt or concrete.
F. Relationship to residential uses. No berth shall be located closer than 50' to any other lot in any residential district unless entirely within a completely enclosed building. (Ord. M-4341 § 3 (Exh. B), 2021; Ord. M-3959 § 49, 2010; Ord. M-3931 § 34, 2009; Ord. M-3840 § 46, 2007; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
These standards are intended to allow groups of small-scale cottages around common areas in single or multifamily zoning districts in a manner promoting accessible housing and community interaction. The individual homes are smaller and shorter than what is allowed in the underlying zoning district, but they may be built at a higher density. (Ord. M-4517 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2025; Ord. M-4465 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2024; Ord. M-4455 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2024; Ord. M-4377 § 2(d), 2022)
A. Permitted Zones and Required Minimum Project Size. Cottage cluster housing developments shall be allowed on properties 10,000 square feet or larger in size in the R-17, R-9, R-6, R-4 and R-2 zoning districts. Lot size minimums of the underlying zone are not applicable to cottage cluster developments.
B. Permitted Uses. Cottage cluster development uses shall be limited to attached and detached single-family homes and associated outbuildings, public or private open space, and parking areas. Duplexes or attached single-family homes may constitute no more than 20 percent of the total number of units. Home occupations pursuant to Chapter 20.860 VMC shall be permitted only if there are no employees residing off site. Accessory dwelling units pursuant to Chapter 20.810 VMC shall be permitted only if located entirely within the single-family homes.
C. The narrow lot development standards in Chapter 20.927 VMC and R-17 zoning district standards of Chapter 20.410 VMC shall not apply to cottage housing developments. Minimum lot frontage and minimum lot sizes are not applicable to cottage housing developments. (Ord. M-4517 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2025; Ord. M-4465 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2024; Ord. M-4455 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2024; Ord. M-4438 § 4(L), 2023; Ord. M-4377 § 2(d), 2022)
A. General Standards.
1. Cottage housing developments may be allowed at up to two times the maximum density of the underlying zone, including any accessory dwelling units.
2. Cottage housing developments shall contain a minimum of four and a maximum of 12 units in a cluster; provided, that a cottage development may contain up to two clusters.
3. Each single-family cottage shall not exceed 1,600 square feet in total floor area, and each duplex cottage 3,000 square feet. Floor areas of attached or detached garages and outbuildings shall count towards these size limits, with the exception of the first 200 square feet of garage or outbuilding per single-family cottage, or 400 square feet per duplex. Existing single-family homes may remain on site but will be counted toward the total density.
4. Building heights may not exceed 25 feet within 50 feet of the project site perimeter, and 30 feet elsewhere in the site. Roofs higher than 18 feet shall be pitched at a ratio of at least 6:12.
5. Covered porches shall be at least 60 square feet, with no dimension less than five feet.
6. Buildings shall be set back at least 10 feet from the nearest public or private road, and at least five feet from other buildings. Building setbacks to exterior property lines shall be that of the underlying zoning district.
B. Cottage Orientation. Cottages must be clustered around a common courtyard and must meet the following standards:
1. At least 75 percent of the cottage units shall be located within 25 feet of a common courtyard, and shall have covered porches and main entries which face the common courtyard or an adjacent public street.
2. The planning official may at their discretion grant exceptions as needed to allow cottages abutting a public street at the site perimeter to face the street, and as needed in cases of very narrow or unusually configured project parcels may reduce the required percentage of lots located within 25 feet of the common courtyard to 50 percent.
C. Common Courtyard Design Standards. Each cottage cluster must share a common courtyard in order to provide a sense of openness and community of residents. Common courtyards must meet the following standards:
1. The common courtyard must contain a minimum of 200 square feet of usable open or congregating space per cottage unit within the associated cluster.
2. The common courtyard must be generally square or round, and no narrower than 15 feet wide at its narrowest dimension.
3. The common courtyard shall be developed with a mix of landscaping, lawn area, pedestrian paths, and/or paved courtyard area, and may also include recreational amenities. Impervious elements of the common courtyard shall not exceed 50 percent of the total common courtyard area.
4. Pedestrian paths must be included in a common courtyard. Parking areas, required setbacks, and driveways do not qualify as part of a common courtyard.
D. Required Parking and Parking Design.
1. Required spaces. Each dwelling unit shall include at least one parking space within the project area. On-street parking spaces abutting the project area may be counted towards this requirement.
2. Common Parking Areas. Parking may be located adjacent to an individual unit or in a common parking area. Common parking areas are subject to the following standards:
a. Cottage cluster projects with fewer than 12 cottages are permitted parking clusters of not more than five contiguous spaces.
b. Cottage cluster projects with 12 cottages or more are permitted parking clusters of not more than eight contiguous spaces.
c. Parking clusters must be separated from other spaces by at least four feet of landscaping.
d. Clustered parking areas may be covered.
3. Parking location, access and screening.
a. Off-street parking areas with five or more spaces shall not be located within 20 feet from any property line that abuts a street other than an alley.
b. No off-street parking space or vehicle maneuvering area is permitted between a property line that abuts a street (other than an alley) and the front façade of cottages located closest to that property line.
c. No off-street parking space is permitted within 10 feet of any other property line external to the cottage cluster, except property lines abutting an alley. Driveways and drive aisles are permitted within 10 feet of other external property lines.
d. Sight-obscuring landscaping, fencing, or walls at least three feet in height shall separate clustered parking areas and parking structures from common courtyards and property lines external to the cottage cluster.
E. Pedestrian Access.
1. A pedestrian path must be provided that connects the main entrance of each cottage to the following:
a. The common courtyard;
b. Shared parking or solid waste storage areas;
c. Community buildings; and
d. Sidewalks in public rights-of-way abutting the site or rights-of-way if there are no sidewalks.
2. The pedestrian path must be hard-surfaced and a minimum of three feet wide.
F. Community Buildings. Cottage cluster projects may include community buildings for the shared use of residents that provide space for accessory uses such as community meeting rooms, guest housing, exercise rooms, day care, community eating areas, community gardens, or picnic shelters. Community buildings must meet the following standards:
1. Each cottage cluster is permitted one community building.
2. The community building shall have a maximum floor area of 1,200 square feet.
G. Maintenance of Common Areas. The development application shall include a plan for ongoing maintenance of shared or common areas, including a mechanism for ensuring that the maintenance plan will be implemented.
H. Solid Waste and Recycling Access and Collection.
1. An access plan for solid waste and recycling collection service to all dwellings in the development shall be submitted with the application.
2. The access and collection plan shall show either a designated collection point for each lot or a common solid waste storage area for use by all lots and the ability of collection vehicles to maneuver safely to all points of collection. All circulation and turnaround designs must meet the requirements of VMC 11.80.070 and the Transportation Standard Details and be feasible using city-provided solid waste truck turning modeling templates and truck specifications. Collection vehicles shall be able to circulate the development and service receptacles with minimal backing required.
3. Collection points and common solid waste storage areas shall be accessible to collection vehicles without requiring backing out of a driveway onto a public street. If only a single access is available to the storage area, adequate turning radius shall be provided to allow collection vehicles to safely exit the site in a forward motion.
4. Where collection is not feasible on each lot, one or more designated common solid waste storage areas, located no further than 150 feet from any dwelling it serves, shall be provided.
a. Common outdoor solid waste storage areas must have a smaller gate, door or open walkway entrance for residents in addition to and separate from the service gate(s).
b. The dimensions of the common solid waste storage area shall accommodate receptacles consistent with current methods of local collection and allow for pedestrian (driver and residents) access between receptacles. Plans shall show footprints of all intended receptacles using dimensions from city-provided solid waste receptacle standards.
c. Outdoor common solid waste storage areas shall be enclosed by a screen comprised of a sight-obscuring wall, fence and/or vegetation. Service gate(s) shall allow access to haulers; they shall be capable of being secured in fully closed and open positions.
d. Solid waste storage receptacles shall be clearly labeled to indicate the type of materials accepted.
e. Common outdoor solid waste storage areas shall not be located in a side or rear yard setback that abuts property that is not within the same development; i.e., impacts of the location on neighboring properties is an important consideration. Every effort should be made to locate outdoor garbage and recycling areas so as to minimize their impacts on existing neighboring residential properties.
5. Designated collection points shall be located adjacent to alleys or streets but shall not obstruct sidewalks, bike lanes, or vision clearance triangles.
6. Maintenance of any private streets or alleys used for solid waste collection service shall be the responsibility of the property owners, and a maintenance agreement shall be recorded with the plat.
7. Each lot must have adequate storage space for carts when not set out for collection day. If lots do not have garages, driveways, or other suitable features for storing carts, individual or shared enclosure areas must be provided and shown on plans. Receptacles and common storage areas must be screened from view and not located in the right-of-way or adjacent to existing neighboring properties. (Ord. M-4517 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2025; Ord. M-4465 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2024; Ord. M-4455 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2024; Ord. M-4438 § 4(L), 2023; Ord. M-4402 § 3(CC), 2023; Ord. M-4377 § 2(d), 2022)
Cottage cluster housing projects shall be reviewed under Chapter 20.320 VMC, Subdivisions, where individual lots are proposed to be owned separately, or as a Type II review subject to Chapter 20.270 VMC, Site Plan Review, where common ownership of lots is proposed. (Ord. M-4517 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2025; Ord. M-4465 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2024; Ord. M-4455 § 3(C) (Att. C), 2024; Ord. M-4377 § 2(d), 2022)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
This chapter regulates signs which can be viewed from any public right-of-way by prescribing regulations and standards for such signs. It provides for administration, requires permits and prescribes fees therefore, and provides for enforcement and for appeals. This chapter is hereby found necessary as an exercise of the city’s police and legislative powers to protect and promote the public health and safety; to promote the convenience and the enjoyment of public travel; to protect the public investment in city streets and public places; and to attract visitors to the city by conserving its natural and man-made beauty. This chapter is intended to balance the need for a well-maintained and attractive community and the need for adequate business identification, advertising and communication. (Ord. M-3868 § 3, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. This chapter shall apply to all property and land within the jurisdiction of the city. It is unlawful for any person, firm, or corporation that owns, occupies, or controls property in the city to construct, maintain, display or alter or cause to be constructed, maintained, displayed or altered, a sign within the city except in conformance with this chapter.
B. It is not intended for this chapter to regulate public sector signing, political campaign signs, private noncommercial signs less than 6 square feet per face, doorway identification nameplates up to 4 square feet, and holiday decorations, as such terms are used and/or defined herein.
C. In addition to subsection B above, the following on-site nonilluminated signs are permitted without a sign permit and in addition to the maximum allowable number and maximum allowable area of signs, as follows:
1. One maximum 6 square feet per face sign, per frontage in all districts; or
2. One maximum 48 square feet per face sign, per frontage, on a lot in any nonresidential district.
3. Three maximum 48 square feet per face sign(s), per frontage on active construction sites in all districts. Active construction sites include properties where development permits are pending or have been issued but a final occupancy permit has not been issued.
4. Exception: This section shall not allow any sign otherwise prohibited by this title.
D. Vehicles Signs (including trailers). Vehicles used as part of the normal function of a business or organization are permitted to have signs relating to that business or organization, subject to the following limitations:
1. Not Permitted. Any sign attached to or placed on a parked vehicle or trailer used principally for advertising purposes, rather than transportation. A vehicle or trailer shall be considered principally used for advertising purposes based on the following criteria: a) a sign is attached or placed on the vehicle or trailer that is larger than 20 square feet in area; b) the sign is attached or placed on the vehicle or trailer for more than 12 hours in any 48-hour period; c) the vehicle or trailer is parked in the same location or within 300 feet of one location for more than four hours; and d) the sign attached or placed on the vehicle or trailer is parked in a public right-of-way or within 50 feet of a public right-of-way; and e) the sign attached to the vehicle or trailer can be read by a person with normal vision from inside the arterial right-of-way.
2. The provisions of the above section shall not apply where: a) the vehicle is temporarily parked at a loading dock, b) the vehicle is substantially hidden from view from any public street by buildings, fences, mature landscaping or similar objects such that the vehicle does not attract attention to or communicate information about the business or organization, c) the vehicle is legally parked at the residence of the driver, d) the vehicle is a contractor’s trailer at the site of an active construction project or e) the vehicle is available for rent as part of an equipment rental business and the content of the sign refers to the rental business only; or when such vehicle is parked at or near the site of the business or organization.
E. Window Signs. Window signs in conjunction with a permitted use are exempt, provided 50 percent or more of the window area is unobscured by signage. Such signs shall not be included in determining the number of signs nor permissible sign area. Sign permits are not required. (Ord. M-3868 § 4, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3701 § 34, 05/02/2005; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
The following types of signs are prohibited, except as otherwise provided by this chapter and in Section 20.960.090 Portable Signs in the Public Right-of-Way:
A. Off-premises signs. Off-premises signs are prohibited except as authorized in this chapter. For exception see Section 20.960.090 Portable Signs in the Public Right-of-Way.
B. Flashing signs. Except where permitted by section regulation for a special district or time/temperature or similar public service information signs. For the purpose of this title, EMC’s consistent with the standards of VMC 20.960.040 I, -.050 I, -.060 I or -.070 I shall not be considered flashing signs.
C. Free-standing signs. Individual free-standing signs are prohibited in any business complex where a business complex sign exists.
D. Billboards. Billboards are prohibited in all zones.
E. Signs that obstruct. Any sign that substantially obstructs free and clear vision of exit, traffic intersection entrance, traffic sign or signal, or constitutes a traffic hazard by reasons thereof.
F. Signs containing unwarranted content. Any sign which contains statements, words, and pictures of an obscene character.
G. Signs which do not conform in structure or material to uniform codes. Any sign which does not structurally or materially conform to the requirements of the City Adopted Building Code as to structure or material except for signs permitted under Section 20.960.090 Temporary Right-of-Way Signs.
H. Projecting signs. No projecting sign may extend into a 2-foot setback from a curb line.
I. Signs with angle iron cages. Any sign whose main structural support is comprised of a visible angle iron cage.
J. Signs in Public Areas. No sign shall be placed or permitted to be placed on public property or public right-of-way except as permitted under Section 20.960.090 Portable Signs in the Public Right-of-Way, or signs on public buildings determined to be in the public interest by the Planning Official.
K. Miscellaneous signs and posters. The tacking, pasting, or otherwise affixing of any sign or signs of a miscellaneous character, visible from a public right-of-way, located on exterior walls of any building, barn, shed, tree, pole, post, fence or other structure is prohibited unless otherwise permitted.
L. Lighting of signs. Any sign which is found by the Planning Official to utilize an inordinate light source such as beacons, strobe lights, or reflectors.
M. Signs emitting pollutants. Any sign that emits audible sound, odor, or visible matter.
N. Garage sale signs. Any sign or signs advertising a garage sale to be held at a given premises which is posted for more than 7 calendar days in any one calendar year.
O. Commercial signs advertising card room gambling or other games of chance prohibited by state law or city ordinance.
P. Banner Signs. Banners used for advertising are prohibited unless otherwise specified in this code.
Q. Signs associated with single family uses. Signs for uses allowed within single family homes are prohibited.
R. Rotating Signs. Rotating signs are prohibited in all zoning districts.
S. Rooftop Signs. Rooftop signs are prohibited in all zoning districts.
T. Any other sign. Any other sign that does not conform to all provisions of this code. (Ord. M-4034 § 33, 12/03/2012; Ord. M-3868 § 5, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004; Ord. M-3266 § 2, 1996)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
In the lower density residential districts, permitted signs include signs exempted by Section 20.960.020 Scope for uses within Central Park for which design guidelines apply, and for nonconforming uses with existing legal signs. Nonconforming signs advertising existing businesses may remain or be replaced in kind, as long as the business remains in operation, but may not be increased in size. In all Lower Density Residential Districts, the regulations of this section shall apply:
A. Billboards. Billboards are prohibited.
B. Off-premises signs. Not allowed except as provided in 20.960.090.
C. Free-standing signs.
1. Allowable Area: 32 square feet per face.
2. Number of Signs: 1 (There shall be no more than one free-standing sign per frontage, and no more than one fascia sign. If both are used, they must be on different frontages).
3. Height of Sign: Maximum 8 feet to be measured from grade.
4. Encroachment: No part of the freestanding sign shall project into any public right-of-way.
5. No freestanding sign shall project or extend into any vision clearance area unless approved by the Planning Official.
6. Any freestanding sign must be integrated. That is, all supports or sign elements shall be an integral part of the design. Auxiliary projections or attachments not a part of a single design are prohibited.
D. Fascia signs.
1. Allowable Area: 5 percent of buildings’ elevation with a maximum of 32 square feet.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per business. (There shall be no more than one free-standing sign per frontage, and no more than one fascia sign. If both are used, they must be on different frontages).
3. Height of Sign: Not to extend above parapet or eave line.
E. Projecting signs. Projecting signs are prohibited.
F. Rooftop signs. Rooftop signs are prohibited.
G. For sale/lease/rent signs. As specified in Section 20.960.090.
1. Allowable Area: Maximum 6 square feet per face side and as specified in Section 20.960.020.C.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per frontage.
3. Encroachment: For sale/lease/rent signs may not encroach on the property line of the subject property.
H. Rotating signs. Rotating signs are prohibited.
I. Electronic Message Center signs. Allowed subject to the following standards:
1. Allowed in association with nonresidential uses only which meet the following criteria:
a. The site has frontage on a major or minor arterial; or
b. The site has frontage on a collector arterial and is at least 2 acres in size
2. Number of signs: 1 per use
3. Type: Fascia or monument-style sign only
4. Maximum size: 16 square feet (50% of allowed area of fascia or monument sign); such sign shall not be in addition to allowable area of fascia or monument sign
5. Maximum height: 8 feet measured from grade if monument sign; fascia signs shall not extend above the parapet or eave line
6. Location: The EMC sign shall either face or be located adjacent to the arterial street
7. Hours of operation: The EMC sign shall be completely turned off between the hours of 9:00 pm and 7:00 am, seven days a week
8. Additional performance standards of VMC 20.960.060, I, 2-9 shall apply to EMC signs in residential districts
9. Signs with an electronic message center which meet all of the above standards may also provide internal illumination to the remainder of the sign.
J. Directional signs. Are regulated as specified in Section 20.960.090.
K. Business complex signs (free-standing signs only). Free standing business complex signs are prohibited. .
L. Allowable combinations of sign types. No combination of sign types is allowed. .
M. Lighting of signs. Only indirect lighting is allowed, except as otherwise allowed by VMC 20.960.040, subsection I, 9. (Ord. M-3868 § 6, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3730 § 33, 12/19/2005; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
In all Higher Density Residential Districts, the regulations of this Section shall apply:
A. Billboards. Not allowed.
B. Off-premises signs. Not allowed except as provided in 20.960.090.
C. Free-standing signs.
1. Allowable Area: 32 square feet per face.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per frontage.
3. Height of Sign: Maximum 8 feet to be measured from grade.
4. Encroachment: No part of the freestanding sign shall project into any public right-of-way.
5. No freestanding sign shall project or extend into any vision clearance area unless approved by the Planning Official.
6. Any freestanding sign must be integrated. That is, all supports or sign elements shall be an integral part of the design. Auxiliary projections or attachments not a part of a single design are prohibited.
D. Fascia signs.
1. Allowable Area: 5 percent of buildings’ elevation with a maximum of 32 square feet.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per business. (There shall be no more than one free-standing sign per frontage, and no more than one fascia sign. If both are used, they must be on different frontages).
3. Height of Sign: Not to extend above parapet or eave line.
E. Projecting signs. Not allowed.
F. Rooftop signs. Not allowed.
G. For sale/lease/rent signs. As specified in Section 20.960.090.
1. Allowable Area: Maximum 6 square feet per face and as specified in Section 20.960.020(C).
2. Number of Signs: 1 per frontage.
3. Encroachment: Not allowed.
H. Rotating signs. Rotating signs are prohibited.
I. Electronic Message Center signs. Allowed subject to the following standards:
1. Allowed in association with nonresidential uses only which meet the following criteria:
a. The site has frontage on a major or minor arterial; or
b. The site has frontage on a collector arterial and is at least 2 acres in size
2. Number of signs: 1 per use
3. Type: Fascia or monument-style sign only
4. Maximum size: 16 square feet (50% of allowed area of fascia or monument sign); such sign shall not be in addition to allowable area of fascia or monument sign
5. Maximum height: 8 feet measured from grade if monument sign; fascia signs shall not extend above the parapet or eave line
6. Location: The EMC sign shall either face or be located adjacent to the arterial street
7. Hours of operation: The EMC sign shall be completely turned off between the hours of 9:00 pm and 7:00 am, seven days a week
8. Additional performance standards of VMC 20.960.060, I, 2-9 shall apply to EMC signs in residential districts
9. Signs with an electronic message center which meet all of the above standards may also provide internal illumination to the remainder of the sign.
J. Directional signs.
1. Allowable Area. Maximum 6 square feet per face per sign.
2. Number of Signs. 1 per function per frontage.
K. Business complex signs (free-standing signs only)
1. Allowable Area: 2 square feet per business or professional tenant per face for tenant identification, and 15 square feet per face for business complex identification.
2. Height of Sign: Maximum height of 10 feet to be measured from grade. (It is recommended that the design be compatible with character of the neighborhood and the profile of the sign be as low as possible.)
3. Number of Signs: 1 per business complex.
L. Allowable combinations of sign types.
1. There shall be no combinations of permanent sign types on a single street frontage.
2. Business Complex Signs are required for any business in a business complex desiring a Free-Standing Sign. The use of a Business Complex Sign shall replace all other Free-Standing Signs on the premises, except temporary or directional signs.
M. Lighting of signs.
1. No neon may be used as a light source.
2. For internally illuminated signs, the background must be opaque and the illuminated portion of the sign face must not exceed 40 percent of the sign face area.
3. For Business Complex Signs, only that portion of the sign identifying the complex may be illuminated. (Ord. M-3868 § 7, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3730, Amended, 12/19/2005; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
In all commercial districts as defined in this Title, the following regulations and standards shall apply:
A. Billboards. Not allowed.
B. Off-premises signs. Not allowed except as provided in 20.960.090.
C. Free-standing signs.
1. Allowable Area: One (1) square foot per face per lineal foot of frontage up to a maximum of 250 square feet per face. Provided that premises with less than thirty-two (32) lineal feet of frontage shall be allowed a maximum thirty-two (32) square foot sign per face.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per frontage.
3. Height of Sign: Maximum 25 feet to be measured from grade to top of sign.
4. Encroachment Above Public Right-of-Way: No part of the freestanding sign shall project into any public right-of-way.
5. No freestanding sign shall project or extend into any vision clearance area unless approved by the Planning Official.
6. Any freestanding sign must be integrated. That is, all supports or sign elements shall be an integral part of the design. Auxiliary projections or attachments not a part of a single design are prohibited.
D. Fascia signs.
1. Allowable Area: Maximum 12 percent of building’s elevation on which the sign is erected with a guaranteed minimum of 32 square feet. Total of all sign face areas shall not exceed 250 square feet.
2. Number of Signs: No maximum number provided the total area of all signs complies with D1 above.
3. Height of Sign: No sign shall extend above parapet or eave line.
4. Fascia Signs: Fascia Signs may not encroach into right-of-way if less than 8 feet above grade.
E. Projecting signs.
1. Allowable Area: Maximum 15 percent of a building elevation on which the sign is erected. Total of all sign face areas shall not exceed 250 square feet.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per elevation per business.
3. Height of Sign: No sign shall extend above parapet or eave line.
4. Encroachment Above Public Right-of-Way. No encroachment allowed for signs less than 8 feet above grade; 3 feet encroachment allowed for signs greater than 8 feet but less than or equal to 10 feet above grade; 4 feet encroachment allowed for signs greater than 10 feet and less than or equal to 12 feet above grade, and 6 feet for signs more than 12 feet above grade.
F. Rooftop signs. Rooftops signs are prohibited.
G. Temporary signs. Not allowed, except for portable signs in the right-of-way under Section 20.960.090.
H. Rotating signs. Rotating signs are prohibited.
I. Electronic Message Center signs. (Not permitted in CN).
1. The area of the electronic message center shall not exceed 20 percent of the area of the sign; provided the area limitation shall not apply if the sign is solely limited to time and temperature.
2. All messages displayed on an electronic message center shall be directly related to the business for which the sign was constructed. No off-premises signage is permitted.
3. All electronic message centers signs shall be constructed as an integral part of a permanent sign constructed on-site. Integral shall be considered to be incorporated into the framework and architectural design of the permanent sign.
4. The display shall be limited to text and static images only and shall not appear to flash, portray blinking or chasing lights, or otherwise create continuously changing images. However, scrolling of text (horizontal or vertical) is permitted. The rate of change for sign copy from one message to another shall be no more frequent than every eight seconds and the actual copy change shall be accomplished in four seconds or less. Once changed, the copy shall remain static until the next change.
5. All electronic message center signs shall have installed ambient light monitors and shall at all times allow such monitors to automatically adjust the brightness level of the electronic message center sign based on ambient light conditions.
6. Electronic message center signs shall not be associated with any dwelling or home occupation in any residential zone.
7. Electronic message center sign permit applications must include a copy of the manufacturer’s operating manual, which includes the manufacturer’s recommended standards for brightness, scrolling or traveling speed, and other display operations.
8. Electronic message center signs which create a source of glare shall be adjusted or removed as directed by the Planning Official. No electronic message center sign may be illuminated to a degree of brightness that is greater than necessary for adequate visibility. In no case may the brightness exceed eight thousand nits (8,000) or equivalent candelas during daylight hours, or one thousand (1,000) nits or equivalent candelas between dusk and dawn.
9. Electronic message center sign permit applications must also include a certification from the owner or operator of the sign stating that the sign shall at all times be operated in accordance with City codes and that the owner or operator shall provide proof of such conformance upon request of the City.
J. Directional signs.
1. Allowable Areas: Maximum 6 square feet per face per sign.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per function per frontage.
K. Business complex signs (free-standing signs).
1. Allowable Area: 1.5 square feet per face per lineal foot of frontage up to a maximum of 250 square feet per face. Provided that a premises with less than thirty-two (32) lineal feet of frontage shall be allowed a maximum thirty-two (32) square foot sign per face.
2. Height of Sign: Maximum 25 feet from grade to top of sign.
3. Number of Signs: 1 per frontage. A secondary sign is allowable if any single frontage exceeds 300 feet. Total square footage of all signage must fall within above formula.
L. Allowable combinations of sign types.
1. Signs attached to a given building elevation will not exceed a total of 15 percent of that elevation.
2. On any street frontage, these combinations are allowable:
a. Fascia and Free-Standing Signs.
b. Fascia and Projecting Signs
c. No other combinations allowed.
3. Business Complex Signs are required for any business in a business complex desiring a Free-Standing Sign. The use of a Business Complex Sign shall replace all other Free-Standing Signs on the premises, except temporary or directional signs.
M. Weather protection. Where a building frontage in the City Center District (CX) is provided with weather protection, said building shall be entitled to the following additional signage; and said additional signage shall not be included in the figuring of the total sign area on the building.
1. A projecting sign suspended from the weather protection structure not exceeding 6 square feet in area per face. Each business shall be allowed 1 such sign per public entry. The bottom of any sign of this type shall be at least 8 feet above the sidewalk.
2. A fascia sign attached to the building but below the weather protection device. Each business shall be allowed one such sign per public entry. (Ord. M-3868 § 7, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3868 § 8, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
In the industrial districts, the regulations and standards of this Section shall apply:
A. Billboards. Not allowed.
B. Off-premises signs in Industrial Parks.
1. Type of Sign: Monument sign.
2. Allowable Areas: Maximum 32 square feet per face per sign. Maximum of 64 square feet total all sign faces.
3. Number of Signs: 1 per business and copy must be related to the resident manufacturers or industries, and for directional purposes only (not allowed in the Industrial Districts along Lincoln Avenue, south of Fourth Plain Boulevard and east of the railroad tracks).
4. Height of Sign: Maximum 15 feet.
5. Encroachment: Not allowed.
6. Portable signs in the right-of-way as per 20.960.090.
C. Free-standing signs (on-site monument sign only).
1. Allowable Area: One (1) square foot per face per lineal foot of frontage up to a maximum of 250 square feet per face. Provided that premises with less than thirty-two (32) lineal feet of frontage shall be allowed a maximum thirty-two (32) square foot sign per face.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per frontage.
3. Height of Sign: Maximum 15 feet.
4. Encroachment: No part of the freestanding sign shall project into any public right-of-way.
5. No freestanding sign shall project or extend into any vision clearance area unless approved by the Planning Official.
6. Any freestanding sign must be integrated. That is, all supports or sign elements shall be an integral part of the design. Auxiliary projections or attachments not a part of a single design are prohibited.
D. Fascia signs.
1. Allowable Area: Maximum 12 percent of the building’s elevation on which the sign is erected with a guaranteed minimum of 32 square feet. Total of all sign areas shall not exceed 250 square feet.
2. Number of Signs: No maximum number, provided the total area of all signs complies with D1 above.
3. Height of Sign: No sign shall extend above parapet or eave line.
4. Fascia Signs: Fascia Signs may not encroach into right-of-way if less than 8 feet above grade.
E. Projecting signs.
1. Allowable Area: Maximum 15 percent of a building elevation on which the sign is erected. Total of all sign face areas shall not exceed 250 square feet.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per elevation per business.
3. Height of Sign: No sign shall extend above parapet or eave line.
4. Encroachment: Above Public Right-of-Way: No encroachment allowed for signs less than 8 feet above grade; 3 feet encroachment allowed for signs greater than 8 feet but less than or equal to 10 feet above grade; 4 feet encroachment allowed for signs greater than 10 feet and less than or equal to 12 feet above grade, and 6 feet for signs more than 12 feet above grade.
F. Rooftop signs. Not allowed.
G. Temporary signs. Not allowed except as provided in 20.960.090.
H. Rotating signs. Not allowed.
I. Electronic message centers signs.
1. The area of the electronic message center shall not exceed 20 percent of the area of the sign; provided the area limitation shall not apply if the sign is solely limited to time and temperature.
2. All messages displayed on an electronic message center shall be directly related to the business for which the sign was constructed. No off-premises signage is permitted.
3. All electronic message centers signs shall be constructed as an integral part of a permanent sign constructed on site. Integral shall be considered to be incorporated into the framework and architectural design of the permanent sign.
4. The display shall be limited to text and static images only and shall not appear to flash, portray blinking or chasing lights, or otherwise create continuously changing images. However, scrolling of text (horizontal or vertical) is permitted. The rate of change for sign copy from one message to another shall be no more frequent than every eight seconds and the actual copy change shall be accomplished in four seconds or less. Once changed, the copy shall remain static until the next change.
5. All electronic message center signs shall have installed ambient light monitors and shall at all times allow such monitors to automatically adjust the brightness level of the electronic message center sign based on ambient light conditions.
6. Electronic message center signs shall not be associated with any dwelling or home occupation in any residential zone.
7. Electronic message center signs which create a source of glare shall be adjusted or removed as directed by the Planning Official. No electronic message center sign may be illuminated to a degree of brightness that is greater than necessary for adequate visibility. In no case may the brightness exceed eight thousand nits (8,000) or equivalent candelas during daylight hours, or one thousand (1,000) nits or equivalent candelas between dusk and dawn.
8. Electronic message center sign permit applications must also include a certification from the owner or operator of the sign stating that the sign shall at all times be operated in accordance with City codes and that the owner or operator shall provide proof of such conformance upon request of the City.
J. Directional signs.
1. Allowable Area: Maximum 10 square feet per face per sign.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per function per frontage.
K. Industrial complex signs (free-standing signs).
1. Allowable Area: 1.5 square foot per face per lineal foot of industrial complex frontage up to a maximum of 250 square feet per face. Provided that an industrial complex with less than thirty-two (32) lineal feet of frontage shall be allowed a maximum thirty-two (32) square foot sign per face.
2. Number of Signs: 1 per complex frontage.
3. Height of Sign: Maximum 25 feet.
L. Allowable combinations of sign types.
1. No signs attached to the building will exceed a total of 15 percent of said building elevation.
2. On any frontage, these combinations are allowable:
a. Fascia and Free-Standing Signs.
b. Fascia and Projecting Signs
c. No other combinations allowed. (Ord. M-4147, 2015; Ord. M-3868 § 9, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Code reviser’s note: Ord. M-4147, Amended, 12/07/2015, Effective 01/07/2016 ACM Correction.
Signs allowed in the Open Space District shall be governed by chapter 20.450 Open Space Zoning Districts (Ord. M-3868 § 10, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Definitions.
1. Permanent Portable Signs shall be defined as “onsite” signs placed in the right-of-way along the business frontage and on the same side of the street of the building or establishment which it advertises. Permanent portable signs shall be meant for continuous display during the hours the business is open and shall have the primary purpose of identifying the business.
2. Temporary Portable Signs shall be defined as “off-site” signs placed in the right-of-way advertising an approved business or use. Temporary portable signs shall be displayed during the hours the business is open and shall have the sole purpose of identifying the business or providing directions.
B. General.
1. Portable signs in the public right-of-way shall be allowed for approved uses in all zones except in areas designated as parks, open space or greenway, and subject to the standards in Section 20.960.090. They may include off-site signs that advertise and are associated with an approved business or use or direct persons to premises different from where the sign is located.
2. Portable signs shall not be allowed as part of home occupations or uses located within residential districts. Portable signs shall be permitted as part of a home occupation in all nonresidential district:
C. Design standards.
1. Portable right-of-way sign structures shall be in the shape of an inverted V, with two sign boards attached to each other at the top of the sign (also known as a sandwich board or A-frame sign).
2. Signs shall be constructed of weather-resistant materials, such as wood, plastic, or metal. Signs constructed of impermanent materials, including but not limited to cardboard and paper are prohibited.
3. No materials such as paper, balloons, windsocks, etc., may be attached to the sign.
4. No sign shall contain foil, mirrors, bare metal, or other reflective materials which could create hazardous conditions to motorists, bicyclists or pedestrians.
5. No sign may contain lights of any kind.
D. Size and number of signs allowed.
1. Maximum size of sign shall be nine (9) square feet per sign face, with a maximum of two sign faces per sign.
2. Maximum of one (1) on-site sign per approved business or use on right-of-way abutting the business or use including businesses having more than one street frontage.
3. Maximum of three (3) off-site signs per approved business or use.
4. Maximum height of sign shall be 36 inches above the sidewalk, walkway, or plaza upon which it is placed. The height of such signs may not be artificially increased above the allowed maximum by the placement of other materials.
E. Location of signs.
1. One portable sign allowed per business to be placed in the right-of-way along the business frontage (front or side street) and on the same side of the street of the building or establishment which it advertises.
2. Off-site temporary signs advertising an approved business or use shall be located within a one (1) mile (driving) radius from where the business or use is being advertised.
3. No sign may be placed in such a way as to reduce the continuous unobstructed width of a sidewalk or walkway to less than five (5) feet.
4. Sign placement may not obstruct an entrance to a building, steps or driveway access.
5. No sign may be placed within a sight vision clearance triangle as (required by Section 20.985) or within twenty (20) feet of a wheelchair ramp.
6. No sign shall be placed within the roadway, traffic island, median or circle.
F. Duration.
1. Permanent portable signs may be displayed in the right-of-way during the hours the business is open.
2. Temporary portable signs may be displayed in the right-of-way during the hours the business is open on Friday 10 a.m.-6 p.m., Saturday 10 a.m.-6 p.m. and Sunday 10 a.m.-6 p.m.
G. Additional Standards.
1. Owners are responsible for the removal of their portable signs following business hours and during periods of strong winds.
2. Off- site portable signs may be placed in the right-of-way abutting private property only with the written consent of the owner(s) of the property abutting the right-of-way and/or their authorized representative.
3. A portable sign placed in the right-of-way shall bear the name and address of the person/organization placing the sign.
H. Enforcement.
1. All new portable signs shall comply immediately with the above standards. All temporary signs (conforming and nonconforming) in existence prior to January 26, 2004, shall comply with the above standards within forty-five (45) calendar days after January 26, 2004.
2. The enforcement of this section shall be governed by the provisions of Title 22 of the Vancouver Municipal Code.
I. Permit. Portable signs in the right-of-way shall be exempt from the permit and fee requirements of this chapter. (Ord. M-3701 § 35, 05/02/2005; Ord. M-3663, Amended, 08/02/2004; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Persons occupying 70 percent or more of the linear street frontage of properties on both sides of the street in any area, may petition the City Council for the formation of a Special Sign District. This might be done for such reasons as to create or maintain an area with a particular ethnic atmosphere, to stimulate a historic period, theater or entertainment area, or other similar purpose. A group of property owners or persons in the right of possession will be chosen by such property owners to comprise an advisory body of the Sign District. This body will draw up the criteria for signs in the District and submit such criteria to the Planning Official for his/her review and recommendation, and for review and recommendation by the Planning Commission prior to the submittal to Council for approval. Council will instruct the City Clerk to notify all owners or persons in the right of possession within the District, after which the Council may approve the Special Sign District by ordinance. If the criteria for the Special Sign District are approved and become effective, the City shall adopt them by ordinance as regulations of the Sign District. (Ord. M-3868 § 13, 02/25/2008; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
A. Except as otherwise provided in this chapter, it shall be unlawful for any person to erect, construct, enlarge, move, or convert any sign in the City or cause the same to be done, without first obtaining a sign permit for each such sign from the Planning Official. This shall not be construed to require any permit for a change of copy of any reader board sign, nor for the repainting, cleaning, and other normal maintenance or repair of a sign or sign structure for which a permit has been previously issued, so long as the sign or sign structure is not modified in any way. No new permit is required for signs which have permits and which conform with the requirements of this Code on the date of its adoption, unless and until the sign cabinet or profile is altered or the sign is relocated.
B. Every sign permit issued by the Planning Official shall become null and void if work is not commenced within 180 calendar days after the date of such permit. If work authorized by such permit is suspended or abandoned for 180 calendar days any time after the work is commenced, a new permit shall be first obtained to do so, and the fee will be one-half the amount required for a new permit for such work, provided that no changes have been made in the original plans.
C. In emergency repair situations, work may be initiated and completed without first applying for a permit. However, a permit shall be applied for within 48 hours after the first working day when work commenced on the sign. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Application for a sign permit shall be made in writing upon forms provided by the City, and shall state the following information:
A. Name, address, and telephone number of the applicant.
B. Name, address, and telephone number of the sign owner.
C. Location by street number of the building, structure, or lot to which or upon which the sign is to be installed or affixed.
D. A drawing to scale showing the design of the sign, including dimensions, sign size, method of attachment, source of illumination, and showing the relationship to any building or structure to which it is, or is proposed to be, installed or affixed, or to which it relates.
E. A plot plan, approximately to scale, indicates the location of the sign relative to property lines, rights-of-way, streets, sidewalks, and other buildings or structures on the premises.
F. The maximum and minimum heights of the sign.
G. The number, size, and location of all existing signs on the same building, lot or premises. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
No person shall erect or hang a sign upon any property or building without the consent of the owner or person entitled to possession of the property or building, if any, or their authorized representatives. (Ord. M-3701 § 36, 05/02/2005; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
A. The Planning Official shall issue a permit for the erection, alteration or relocation of a sign within the City when an application therefore has been properly made and the sign complies with all appropriate laws and regulations of the City and all procedures required by City Ordinance have been complied with and completed.
B. The Planning Official may, in writing, suspend or revoke a permit issued under provisions of this chapter whenever the permit is issued on the basis of a misstatement of fact or fraud. When a sign permit is denied by the Administrator, he shall give written notice of the denial to the applicant, together with a brief written statement of the reasons for the denial. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
No permit for a sign issued hereunder shall be deemed to constitute permission or authorization to maintain an unlawful sign nor shall any permit issued hereunder constitute a defense in an action to abate an unlawful sign. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A fee shall be paid to the City at the time of issuance in accordance with the provisions of the City fee schedule. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
In order to obtain a permit for the erection of a sign in the City (except painted wall graphics), the applicant must have a Washington State Contractors’ license under Chapter 18.27 RCW, unless he is going to install a sign upon his own property and is exempted from such requirement by such statute. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
No license shall be transferable and no holder of any license issued under this chapter shall allow his name to be used by any other party, either for the purpose of doing work or obtaining a permit under the penalty of forfeiting his license in addition to any fine levied, and the Planning Official is authorized to refuse to issue permits to the holder of any license violating this provision. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
The Planning Official is hereby authorized and directed to enforce and carry out all provisions of this chapter, both in letter and spirit, with vigilance and with all due speed. The Planning Official is authorized to promulgate regulations and procedures consistent with the purpose of this chapter. The Planning Official is further empowered to delegate the duties and powers granted to and imposed upon him/her within this chapter. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
The Planning Official is hereby empowered to enter or inspect any building, structure, or premises in the City upon which, or in connection with which a sign, as defined by this chapter, is located, for the purpose of inspection of the sign, its structural and electrical connections, and to ensure compliance with the provisions of this chapter. Such inspections shall be carried out during business hours, unless an emergency exists. In the case of a residential use, the Superintendent shall secure assistance from the City Attorney, who may apply to a court for any necessary process to allow such inspection.
A. Maintenance. Every sign in the City, including but not limited to those signs for which permit fees are required, shall be maintained in good structural conditions at all times.
B. Signs declared unlawful. The Administrator shall declare any sign unlawful and order its removal if he finds in writing that it endangers public safety by reasons of inadequate maintenance, dilapidation or abandonment. Any such declaration shall state the reasons of the Administrator for stating that the sign constitutes a safety hazard to the general public, and must direct that it be corrected immediately or within a time to be set in such order.
C. Any sign owned, kept, displayed, or maintained by any person within the City, which is unlawful under the provisions of this chapter, is hereby declared to be in violation of this chapter. The Administrator may declare any such sign to be unlawful, and such declaration shall state in writing the reason or reasons why such sign and the keeping, owning, maintenance, construction, and display of this chapter, and shall require its removal or repair within a time to be stated in such order. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
In enforcing this chapter, the Administrator may accept a written Assurance of Discontinuance of any act or practice deemed in violation of this chapter, or of any rule or regulation adopted pursuant hereto, from any person engaging in, or who has engaged in such act or practice. Any such assurance shall specify a time limit during which such discontinuance is to be accomplished. Failure to perform any such assurance shall constitute prima facie proof of a violation of this chapter or any rule or regulation adopted pursuant hereto order issued pursuant thereto. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Any advertising structure or sign which prior to the effective date (12/19/79) of the sign code ordinance (M-2035) codified in this chapter has been lawfully erected, or for which a permit to erect it had been issued prior to the effective date of the sign code ordinance codified in this chapter and which is rendered nonconforming by this chapter may continue to exist but not to be increased in size. Provided, however, this section shall not apply to signs prohibited under subsection 20.960.030 of this chapter. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
The provisions of this chapter shall not be construed as relieving or limiting in any way the responsibility or liability of any person erecting or owning any sign for personal injury or property damage resulting from the placement of a sign, or resulting from the negligence or willful acts of such person, its agents, employees, or workmen in the construction, maintenance, repair or removal of any sign erected in accordance with a permit issued hereunder. Nor shall it be construed as imposing upon the City or its officers or employees any responsibility or liability by reason of the approval or disapproval of any signs, materials, or devices under the provisions of this chapter. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
All existing legally erected signs which are rendered nonconforming by the adoption of this chapter must comply with structural and material Code requirements of the Uniform Sign Code and the City Adopted Building Code at the time of any replacement, an alteration, or modification over and above routine maintenance. (Ord. M-4034, Added, 12/03/2012, Sec 37)
All decisions by the Building Official concerning signs which involve questions of methods of construction or suitability of materials shall be subject to appeal to the Building-Fire Codes Board of Appeals pursuant to the provisions of VMC 17.08.040. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
See Section 20.985 Vision Clearance. (Ord. M-4034, Renumbered, 12/03/2012, Sec 39; Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Repealed by Ord. M-4289.
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
Purpose. It is the intent and purpose of these provisions to implement the recycling and waste management policies of the city and to support the goals, priorities, and strategies of the Clark County and State of Washington Solid Waste Management Plans. Additionally, the purpose of these regulations is to facilitate the delivery of efficient, safe and convenient refuse and recycling services to facility occupants using collection receptacles, vehicles and technologies offered through the city’s contracted or licensed service providers. Facility designs must incorporate adequate storage space for both solid waste and recyclables and shall provide for a serviceable and accessible on-site location(s) and/or enclosures to temporarily store these materials between scheduled collection days. (Ord. M-4402 § 3(DD), 2023; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
A. Chapter applicability. This chapter shall apply to new multifamily residential buildings containing five or more units and nonresidential construction projects that are subject to site plan review, as governed by Chapter 20.270 VMC. (Ord. M-3643, 01/26/2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Storage area criteria. The amount of solid waste and recyclable storage area required is based on the predominant use(s) of the building, i.e., residential, office, retail, educational/institutional, commercial/industrial or other. If a building has more than one of the uses listed in this section, and that use occupies 20 percent or less of the gross floor area of the building, the floor area occupied by that use shall be counted toward the floor area of the predominant use(s). If a building has more than one of the uses listed in this section, and that use occupies more than 20 percent of the gross floor area of the building, then the storage area requirement for the whole building shall be the sum of the requirement for the area of each use.
B. For multiple uses. Storage areas for multiple uses on a single site may be combined and shared.
C. Storage standards. Storage shall be provided consistent with the following:
1. Multi-unit residential buildings containing five or more units shall provide a minimum storage area using this formula:
Number of units × 32 gallons = Total weekly storage volume for garbage
Number of units × 48 gallons = Total weekly storage volume for recycling
Number of units × 8 gallons = Total weekly storage volume for glass
Depending on the number of units, the total volume needed for each stream of waste can be calculated and the number and size of carts or containers determined. Mixed recycling is collected in 95-gallon recycling carts. Glass is collected in 64-gallon carts. Each storage area must provide for collection of both garbage and recycling with space to walk between the containers.
Mixed recycling or cardboard containers and cages, with a standard size of three or four cubic yards (606 gallons), can be planned for accommodating a portion of the required recycling storage for these commodities.
For recycling, determine the number of mixed carts needed by dividing total weekly storage requirements by 95; determine the number of glass recycling carts needed by dividing total weekly storage requirements by 64.
Complexes with less than 20 units are encouraged to include space for a recycling container large enough to accommodate flattened cardboard boxes (typically a three-yard or four-yard container). Complexes larger than 20 units are required to include space for a three- or four-yard recycling container large enough to accommodate flattened cardboard boxes.
Large apartment complexes sometimes utilize a centralized garbage compactor(s) instead of or in coordination with more distributed garbage containers. Compactors are intended for commercial and industrial use by trained personnel and should not be the container that residents use directly for disposal of their household garbage.
Property owners/managers must still provide convenient recycling locations accessible to residents.
Recycling roll carts are normally co-located with the garbage collection containers, rather than with the compactor, to improve recycling convenience and participation. Containers larger than four cubic yards do not have wheels, so it is necessary to allow sufficient space so they can be emptied without being rolled out. No solid waste or recyclables collecting shall be done in any residential zone before 6:30 a.m. or after 6:30 p.m. (VMC 6.12.130).
Maximum distance from residential unit to closest garbage/recycling enclosure shall be no more than 150 feet.
2. Nonresidential buildings shall provide a minimum storage area of 100 square feet plus:
a. Office: four square feet per 1,000 square feet of gross floor area (GFA);
b. Retail: 10 square feet per 1,000 square feet of GFA;
c. Educational/institutional: four square feet per 1,000 square feet of GFA; or
d. Other: four square feet per 1,000 square feet of GFA.
3. Large developments or single buildings utilizing a compactor for garbage shall plan for the size of concrete pad appropriate for the equipment being installed and the volume of waste and recycling to be generated, plus allocate additional space for containers for materials not compacted.
4. Storage area space size and area configuration needs shall be determined based on an assessment of how similar facilities meet their waste disposal and recycling needs.
5. Service agreements between the building owner and the service provider may be required if proposed methods or technologies used to manage waste are atypical or unproven. (Ord. M-4402 § 3(DD), 2023; Ord. M-4147 § 4, 2015; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Location. Required storage areas for solid waste and recyclable materials shall comply with the following standards:
1. The storage area(s) for source-separated recyclable materials in multi-unit residential complexes shall be at the same locations(s) as storage areas for residential mixed solid waste.
2. Indoor and outdoor storage shall comply with city adopted building and uniform fire code requirements.
3. Storage area space requirements can be satisfied with a single location or multiple locations, and can combine both interior and exterior locations. Storage areas shall be no farther than 150 feet from each unit and be easily accessed by users and maintenance personnel.
4. Outdoor storage areas can be located within interior side yard or rear yard areas. Outdoor storage areas shall not be located within a required front yard setback or in a yard adjacent to a public right-of-way or private street easement, except alleys, unless no alternative location is possible. Outdoor storage areas shall not be located in a side or rear yard setback that abuts property that is not within the same development; i.e., impacts of the location on neighboring properties is an important consideration. Every effort should be made to locate outdoor garbage and recycling areas so as to minimize their impacts on neighboring properties. When a single-family home is converted to an office, the business owners are encouraged to continue roll cart garbage service instead of container service to minimize the noise impacts on their neighbors.
5. Exterior storage areas shall address both user safety/security and aesthetic considerations.
6. Exterior storage areas can be located in a parking area if the proposed use provides at least the minimum number of parking spaces required per the requirements of Chapter 20.945 VMC, Parking and Loading, after deducting the area used for storage and access.
7. The storage area shall be accessible for collection vehicles and located so it will not obstruct pedestrian or vehicle traffic movement on the site or on public streets or sidewalks adjacent to the site.
B. Design standards.
1. The dimensions of the storage area shall accommodate containers consistent with current methods of local collection and allow for pedestrian (driver and residents) access between containers. Plans shall show footprints of all intended receptacles using dimensions from city-provided solid waste receptacle standards. The preferred recycling receptacles for resident use are roll carts versus recycling containers. Roll carts are more easily accessed by residents and help to prevent confusion/contamination with garbage.
2. Repealed by Ord. M-4402.
3. Exterior storage areas shall be enclosed by a screen comprised of a sight-obscuring wall, fence and/or vegetation. For multifamily tenant access, a person door, gate, or walkway separate from the service gate or door is required. Service gate(s) for haulers shall be capable of being secured in closed and open positions of 90 degrees or greater.
4. Storage containers shall be clearly labeled to indicate the type of materials accepted.
5. Where electrical connections or engineered structures and surfaces are required to support the utilization of compactors or other storage and handling equipment, these shall be designed according to the applicable codes.
C. Access standards.
1. Access to storage areas can be limited for security reasons. However, the storage area shall be accessible to users at convenient times of the day, and to collection service personnel on the day and approximate time they are scheduled to provide collection service.
2. Storage areas shall be designed to be easily accessible to collection trucks and equipment, considering paving, grade and vehicle access. Where direct truck access to a storage area is not possible, the grade and ramp design shall consider the weights and size of containers that can reasonably and safely be managed for roll-out to an accessible truck loading position. If the collector is expected to move compacted containers larger than two cubic yards, mechanized equipment such as motorized pushcart must be provided for efficient transferring of receptacles and to promote worker safety.
3. Storage areas shall be accessible to collection vehicles without requiring backing out of a driveway onto a public street. If only a single access is available to the storage area, adequate turning radius shall be provided to allow collection vehicles to safely exit the site in a forward motion. All circulation and turnaround designs must meet the requirements of VMC 11.80.070 and the Transportation Standard Details and be feasible using city-provided solid waste truck turning modeling templates and truck specifications. Collection vehicles shall be able to circulate the development and service receptacles with minimal backing required. (Ord. M-4402 § 3(DD), 2023; Ord. M-4147 § 4, 2015; Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that development or redevelopment on a site will not impede visibility of operators of motor vehicles using the City’ s street system. (Ord. M-3643, 2004)
Click here to view prior versions of this section.
A. Conditional sight obstructions. Nothing in this title shall be deemed to permit a sight obstruction at a street intersection or service drive interfering with the view of the operation of motor vehicles on the streets to such an extent as to constitute a traffic hazard.
B. Provisions with precedence. The provisions of this Section shall take precedence over any building and parking setbacks, except in the City Center (CX) and the Heights (HX) districts where the city transportation manager may authorize lesser requirements upon a finding that the public health, safety and welfare will not be adversely impacted.
C. Provisions for established vision area. There shall be no sight obstruction between 30" and 10' above the street grade within the triangular vision clearance area established as follows:
1. Street Intersection. In the case of a street intersection, or street and alley intersection, two sides of this triangle are lot lines measured 20' from their intersection, and the third side is a line across the corner of the lot joining the extremities of the other two sides. See Figure 20.985-1.
2. Commercial Driveways and Private Streets. In the case of service drives, a triangle whose base extends 30' along the street right-of-way line in both directions from the centerline of the service drive with the apex of the triangle 30' into the property on the centerline of said service drive. See Figure 20.985-2.
3. Residential Driveways. In the case of a private driveway, two sides of the triangle are measured 7' from the intersection of the right-of-way line and edge of the driveway, one side extending up the driveway and the other along the public right-of-way. The third side of the triangle is a line connecting the extremities of the other two sides. See Figure 20.985-3.
a. Residential Driveways on Alleys. In the case of private driveways on an alley, this section shall not apply.
Figure 20.985-1. Street Intersection

Figure 20.985-2. Commercial Driveways and Private Streets

Figure 20.985-3. Residential Driveways

(Ord. M-4341 § 3 (Exh. B), 2021; Ord. M-3922 § 45, 2009; Ord. M-3840 § 47, 2007; Ord. M-3701 § 37, 2005; Ord. M-3643, 2004)